APPENDIX 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ... - Charles …...Aug 19, 2015 · Charles County Department...

APPENDIX 1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

Charles County Department of Utilities

Swan Point and Cobb Island Interconnection

Project Number UN-1196

GHD Inc. 16701 Melford Boulevard

Suite 330 Bowie, Maryland 20715

It is a violation of the Maryland State Education Law for any person unless he/she is acting under the direction of a licensed professional engineer, to alter an item on this specification in any way. If an item is altered, the altering engineer shall affix to the item his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature and the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration.

August 2015

APPENDIX 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR Charles County Department of Utilities

Swan Point and Cobb Island Interconnection

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENT 01010 Summary of Work ..................................................................................................... 1 thru 7 01019 Contract Considerations ............................................................................................ 1 thru 3 01039 Coordination .............................................................................................................. 1 thru 4 01100 Mobilization .............................................. Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 01300 Construction Stakeout .............................. Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 01305 Submittals ................................................................................................................. 1 thru 6 01310 Progress Schedule .................................................................................................. 1 thru 10 01380 Construction Documentation ..................................................................................... 1 thru 3 01400 Quality Control ........................................................................................................... 1 thru 3 01500 Protection of the Environment .................. Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 01501 Temporary Facilities .................................................................................................. 1 thru 6 01540 Temporary Pumping .................................................................................................. 1 thru 5 01600 Materials and Equipment .......................................................................................... 1 thru 3 01640 Equipment - General ................................................................................................. 1 thru 8 01650 Starting of Systems ................................................................................................... 1 thru 2 01700 Contract Closeout ..................................................................................................... 1 thru 4 DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 02011 Subsurface Investigation .......................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02012 Test Pits .................................................................................................................... 1 thru 3 02030 Demolition ................................................................................................................. 1 thru 4 02110 Clearing and Grubbing ............................. Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02140 Adjusting Existing Utilities to Finished Grade ........................................................................ ................................................................. Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02150 Removal or Abandonment of Existing Utilities and Underground Structures …...

................................................................. Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02160 Removal of Existing Pavement, Sidewalk, Curb, and Combination Curb and

Gutter ....................................................................................................................... 1 thru 2 02205 Protection of Existing Facilities ................................................................................. 1 thru 3 02210 General Excavation ................................................................................................... 1 thru 6 02240 Borrow Excavation .................................................................................................... 1 thru 4 02245 Selected Backfill ........................................................................................................ 1 thru 2 02250 Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction .......................................................... 1 thru 13 02260 Embankment ............................................................................................................. 1 thru 8 02265 Tamped Fill ............................................................................................................... 1 thru 3 02295 Riprap Slope and Channel Protection ...... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02400 Excavation Support ................................................................................................... 1 thru 4 02512 Dewatering ................................................................................................................ 1 thru 3 02551 Water Mains ............................................................................................................ 1 thru 11 02552 Water Valves and Appurtenances ............................................................................ 1 thru 8 02562 Sanitary Sewer Manholes ......................................................................................... 1 thru 9 02563 Sanitary Sewer Force Mains ..................................................................................... 1 thru 7

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 TOC-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE 02564 Connections to Existing Sanitary Sewer Facilities .......................... Refer to Charles County ........................................................................................................ Standard Specifications 02567 Testing of Process Pipe ............................................................................................ 1 thru 5 02610 Subgrade Preparation ............................................................................................... 1 thru 4 02621 Aggregate Base and Subbase Courses ... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02641 Bituminous Concrete Pavement ............... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02651 Plain and Reinforced Portland Cement Concrete Pavements ........ Refer to Charles County ........................................................................................................ Standard Specifications 02680 Patching Pavement .................................. Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02721 Traffic Barriers.......................................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02811 Salvaged Topsoil ...................................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02812 Placing Salvaged Topsoil ......................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02813 Furnished Topsoil ..................................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 02820 Turf Establishment ................................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications DIVISION 2 – ELECTRICAL SITEWORK 02730 General Electric Work ............................................................................................... 1 thru 5 02731 Electrical Conduit and Fittings ................................................................................... 1 thru 5 02732 Precast Electrical Handboxes ................................................................................... 1 thru 2 02733 Electrical Pull and Junction Boxes ............................................................................ 1 thru 2 02734 Concrete Foundations ............................................................................................... 1 thru 3 02735 Electrical Cable, Wire, and Connectors .................................................................... 1 thru 3 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete Structures ........... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 03310 Portland Cement Concrete ....................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 03400 Precast Concrete Utility Structures .......... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications 03600 Grout ......................................................................................................................... 1 thru 3 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09900 Painting .................................................... Refer to Charles County Standard Specifications DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11300 Pumping Equipment - General .................................................................................. 1 thru 5 11317 Sump Pumps ............................................................................................................. 1 thru 5 DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15170 Motors ..................................................................................................................... 1 thru 11 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 16057 Electrical Equipment Modifications ........................................................................... 1 thru 4 16191 Electrical Supports, Anchors and Fasteners ............................................................. 1 thru 6 16196 Electrical System Identification.................................................................................. 1 thru 7 16900 Instrumentation – General ....................................................................................... 1 thru 16 16903 Auxiliary Controls and Relays.................................................................................... 1 thru 8 16950 Testing and Inspection .............................................................................................. 1 thru 8 16990 Control Panels ......................................................................................................... 1 thru 14 Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 TOC-2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Refer to the Charles County, Maryland website for Charles County Standard Specifications for Construction: https://www.charlescountymd.gov/pgm/cpis/standard-specs-construction

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 TOC-3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01010-1 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work covered by Contract Documents.

B. Work by others.

C. Contractor’s use of Site.

D. Limits of Work area.

E. Sequence of Work.

F. Operation of existing facilities.

G. Cutting and Patching.

H. Facility outages.

I. Continuity of service plan.

J. Requests to work outside normal working hours.

1.02. PROJECT – WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work covered by the Contract Documents is generally described as follows and includes the following:

1. Installation of new force main to provide an interconnection between Hill Road Pump Station Force Main at Breeze Farm Lagoons and Intersite Pump Station wet well that allows pumping of sewage directly to Intersite Pump Station.

2. Installation of overflow from the Intersite Pump Station to the Breeze Farm lagoons and discharge piping to allow Swan Point effluent to be pumped to Breeze Farm Lagoons.

3. Installation of new interconnections at Swan Point WWTP

a. Intersite Pump Station effluent to Swan Point WWTP influent

b. Matthews Manor effluent to Swan Point WWTP influent

c. Swan Point WWTP effluent to Breeze Farm Lagoon

4. Installation of flow meter and manhole on Matthews Manor influent force main at Swan Point WWTP.

5. Installation of all level sensors and a new level controller to be integrated to existing pump controls at Intersite Pump Station. Providing power and control wiring for the


flow meter, a sump pump for flow meter manhole at Matthews Manor force main at Swan Point WWTP.

6. Site Work.

B. Work not specifically identified in the Schedule of Prices, but nevertheless required in the Contract Documents, shall be performed as shown and/or specified.

1.03. WORK BY OTHERS

A. County may self-perform other related work at the site either directly with County employees or through separate contracts.

1.04. CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE

A. Limit use of Site to allow:

1. County occupancy and/or partial utilization.

2. Work by County.

1.05. LIMITS OF WORK AREA

A. Confine construction operations within the Limit of Work shown on the Drawings.

B. Storage of equipment and materials, or erection and use of sheds outside of the Limit of Work, if such areas are the property of County, shall be used only with County’s approval. Such storage or temporary structures, even within the Limit of Work, shall be confined to County’s property and shall not impede County’s access to the well pump stations or be placed on properties designated as easements or rights-of-way.

C. Where storage of equipment, materials, job trailers, etc. are proposed outside the Limit of Work, obtain permits including erosion and sediment control plan approval for those areas at no additional cost to County.

1.06. SEQUENCE OF WORK

A. General

1. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, manpower, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction unless specifically identified in the Contract Documents.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for sequencing and coordinating the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3. Contractor shall provide temporary facilities to maintain continuous operation of all existing facilities and utilities unless scheduled facility shutdowns are identified in the Contract Documents

4. Contractor has the option to use by-pass pumping, temporary piping connections including wet tapping, line stops, temporary storage, vacuum trucks for transportation of stored flow to Breeze Farm or Cuckold Creek Lagoons or any combination to temporarily stop or divert flow in order to perform work on piping (i.e. pipe tie-ins, etc.).


5. Work shall be performed in a manner that minimizes impact to normal operation of existing facilities and utilities.

6. Contractor’s operations shall not cause County to violate permit requirements.

7. If Contractor’s operations cause County to receive a notice of violation for erosion and sedimentation practices, all costs including fines, legal notices, postings and notifications, mailings, administrative tasks, and engineering associated with resolving the notice shall be borne by Contractor.

B. Sequence of Constraints

1. Hill Road Pump Station force main that discharges to Breeze Farm Lagoons shall remain operational at all times without disruption. Provide bypass arrangements (wet tap and line stops) to allow discharge of sewage to Breeze Farm Lagoons while the new interconnection tee and valve is installed. Alternately, temporary storage or transport to Breeze Farm Lagoon can be provided at Hill Road Pump Station. Use of temporary storage for flow diversion shall not exceed 6 hours.

2. Breeze Farm Lagoons shall remain operational at all times. Provide cofferdam for installation of Intersite Pump Station overflow and Swan Point effluent discharge line to lagoon.

3. Flow from Intersite Pump Station can be interrupted for installation of interconnecting piping on Intersite Pump Station Force Main. Interruption period shall not exceed 8 hours.

4. For installation of interconnection piping on Matthews Manor Force Main, provide bypass arrangements (wet taps and line stops) to allow pumping directly to Cuckold Creek Lagoons.

5. For installation of interconnection piping on Swan Point Influent Force Main, provide bypass arrangements (wet taps and line stops) to allow pumping directly to Swan Point Influent Structure.

6. For installation of interconnection piping on Swan Point Effluent Force Main, provide bypass arrangements (by-pass pumping) to allow pumping from Effluent Pump Station or UV Disinfection system effluent to Cuckold Creek Lagoons.

7. Traffic access to the Swan Point WWTP shall be maintained at all times. The construction of interconnecting by-pass piping and flow meter manhole installation shall be sequenced such that a minimum 10 ft wide access lane shall be provided at all times. Provide temporary gravel access road, traffic barriers and flag man to direct incoming or outgoing traffic to or from Swan Point WWTP.

8. Total duration of interconnecting piping and manhole installation at Swan Point WWTP shall not exceed 5 (five) work days.

9. Breeze Farm and Cuckold Creek Lagoons can be used for temporary storage of raw sewage or plant effluent.

1.07. OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Normal operations of the existing facilities will be performed by County. Only County’s staff is allowed to operate existing facilities including equipment.


1. Contractor’s activities shall not disrupt County’s access to operate and maintain existing equipment and facilities. Contractor shall furnish any temporary access required, including ladders, platforms, grating, walkways, and awaits, which shall comply with OSHA laws and regulations, for necessary plant operations.

2. Contractor’s operations shall not disrupt truck access for the delivery or hauling of materials and suppliers to and from the Site.

1.08. CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Materials: As specified in individual Specification sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity.

C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition.

D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

E. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.

F. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Engineer.

G. Where a change of plane of 1/4-inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Engineer review.

H. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections.

I. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Specification sections.

J. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.

K. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects:

1. Structural integrity of element.

2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.

4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

5. Work of County or separate contractor.

L. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to:

1. Fit several parts together, to integrate with other work.


2. Uncover work to install or correct ill-timed work.

3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

4. Remove samples of installed work for testing.

5. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work.

M. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

N. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.

O. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

P. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

Q. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.

R. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

S. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to Engineer in writing for decision or remedy.

1.09. FACILITY OUTAGES

A. General:

1. Provide a minimum of 30 working days written notice to County and Engineer prior to actual date of scheduled outage.

2. All associated work that can be completed on a system without taking a unit or process out of service shall be completed prior to the outage to minimize down time.

3. Have all required materials, labor, tools, and equipment on Site at the required locations and available for use prior to beginning an outage.

4. Provide temporary power as described herein to maintain continuity of service.

5. Outages cannot be scheduled to begin on a Friday or day before a scheduled Holiday.

6. Begin work on temporarily isolated facilities immediately after isolation and expedite.

7. During scheduled outages, complete all associated work within time frames and constraints identified in Contract Documents and the approved Continuity of Service Plan, including testing and Startup.

8. Construction may require the closing of various gates and valves to isolate tanks, channels, and equipment. The County does not guarantee that the gates and valves will be completely water tight. It is Contractor’s responsibility to take whatever measures are necessary to proceed with construction in the event that valves or gates leak.


B. Scheduled Outages:

1. Contractor will be allowed to schedule facility outages as described herein and in Section 01305, Submittals.

2. Hill Road Pump Station shall remain operational at all times.

3. Intersite Pump Station can be taken out of service for a period not exceeding 24 hours. Interruption to service consecutive 24 hours is not allowed.

4. Swan Point Influent and Effluent Pump Stations shall remain operational at all times.

5. Matthews Manor force main shall remain operational at all times.

6. Breeze farm and Cuckold Creek Lagoons shall remain operational at all times.

1.10. CONTINUITY OF SERVICE PLAN

A. Submit in accordance with the procedures described in Section 01305, Submittals.

B. Submit plans for the continuity of utility service and plant operations no later than 30 days prior to each planned interruption.

C. Plans shall include:

1. Approximate dates and times of scheduled interruption of service

2. Estimated period of outage

3. List of existing equipment and facilities that will be affected by the outage

4. Proposed sequence of equipment and facility shutdown and startup

5. Contractor personnel responsible for overseeing operations

D. Plans must be approved by County and Engineer prior to proceeding with outage. Revisions to Continuity of Service Plans after initial approval shall be resubmitted to County and Engineer at least 14 days prior to scheduled outage and must be approved by County and Engineer prior to proceeding with outage.

E. At a minimum, one utility and one standby power source, or two standby power sources shall be available for connection at all times. The contractor is required to maintain only one source for a maximum period of 8 hours during a power outage; at all other times two power sources shall be maintained.

1.11. REQUESTS TO WORK OUTSIDE OF NORMAL WORKING HOURS

A. Submit requests to work outside normal working hours at least one week in advance. Requests to work outside normal working hours must be approved in advance by County and Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.


PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01019-1 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

SECTION 01019

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Schedule of Values.

B. Application for Payment.

C. Change Procedures.

1.02. GENERAL

A. This section supplements the requirements of General Provisions.

1.03. RELATED SECTIONS

A. General Provisions

B. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1.04. SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit hard-copy and electronic schedule in accordance with the format below.

B. Submit a separate Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 work days after the Notice to Proceed.

C. Include within each line item a direct proportional amount of Contractor’s overhead and profit.

D. Payments during the course of the work for lump sum items will be made on the basis of percentage completion of the work items listed in the schedule of values for each lump sum item. The Schedule of Values shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner as specified herein. The Schedule of Values shall serve as a breakdown of the lump sum bid for the purpose of arriving at a basis for the monthly estimate. The Schedule shall be broken down into schedule of values categories and each category shall be further broken into each applicable specification section. The Schedule shall add up to 100% of the Lump Sum bid.

E. Format - Contractor’s Schedule of Values shall conform to the following format:

1. Eligible payment items shall be separated on the Schedule of Values into the following categories:

a. Sitework

b. Demolition

c. Breeze Farm Interconnection

d. Breeze Farm Overflows


e. Swan Point interconnections

f. Intersite PS Electrical Control Modifications

g. Swan Point WWTP Electrical

h. Startup

i. Contract Closeout

j. Change Orders

2. Additional categories may be added if required.

3. Each eligible payment item shall be separated into two distinct line-items on the Schedule of Values. One line item shall be for the supply of materials/equipment (for example: “furnish ultrasonic flowmeter”) and the second line item shall be for installing the materials/equipment (for example: “install ultrasonic flowmeter”).

4. The category “Sitework”, in the Schedule of Values, shall be further subdivided into itemized quantities and unit costs for all individual construction components. Items shall be separated according to Specification Sections Titles in the Table of Contents (for example: “Dewatering”, “Turf Establishment”, etc.).

5. The category “Demolition” in the Schedule of Values shall include the Work shown on the Contract Drawings.

6. Under “Startup”, Contractor shall list each piece of equipment that will require startup and initial testing. Values shall include troubleshooting, manufacturer field services, field testing equipment, and initial operation.

7. The category “Contract Closeout” should include all items listed in Specification Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

8. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment. Each Change Order shall list separately the individual Proposed Change Orders (PCOs) that make up the Change Order.

1.05. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Submit three copies of each application on forms furnished by Owner.

B. Content and Format - Approved Schedule of Values will be used to list items in Application for Payment. Certification by Contractor must accompany each application.

C. Payment Period - Monthly.

D. Attach required documents and Contractor’s back-up data, including updated schedule and all invoices for stored materials.

E. Contractor must have all as-builts/record drawings and construction schedule current and up to date prior to submitting Application for Payment.

1.06. CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. Change Procedures are outlined in the General Provisions.


B. The Owner may issue a Proposal Request or Notice of Change which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit an estimate within 15 calendar days.

C. The Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to the Owner, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation.

D. Lump Sum/Price Change Order - Based on Proposal Request or Notice of Change and Contractor’s fixed or estimated price quotation.

E. Unit Price Change Order - For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not predetermined, execute Work under a Work Change Directive. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.

F. Time and Material Change Order - Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. Owner will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.

G. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01039-1 COORDINATION

SECTION 01039

COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Coordination.

B. Field engineering.

C. Preconstruction conference.

D. Progress meetings.

E. Pre-installation conference.



1.03. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduled work sequences and related operations beforehand with appropriate local, county, or state officials and agencies including affected property owners, when project is to be located in or adjacent to the public right-of-way.

B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.

C. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, and conduit, as closely as practicable. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Final Acceptance.

G. Coordinate with County access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, which minimizes disruption of County activities.

1.04. FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Contractor shall provide field engineering services as follows:

1. Employ a land surveyor licensed in the State of Maryland and acceptable to the County.


2. Protect all control and reference points. Accurately replace any such point which is damaged or moved.

3. Provide correct lines, grades, locations and elevations for construction of all Project components.

4. Provide correct information for preparation of Project record documents.

5. Submit a copy of registered site drawing and certificate signed by the land surveyor who provided field engineering services that the locations and elevations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents.

1.05. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. County will schedule a conference after the Effective Date of Agreement.

B. Attendance Required – County, General Contractor and major subcontractors.

C. Agenda

1. Distribution of extra sets of Contract Documents by County to General Contractor.

2. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule.

3. Designation of personnel representing the parties for Contractor and County.

4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, change orders and contract closeout procedures.

5. Scheduling.

6. Requirements of regulatory agencies.

7. Temporary facilities to be provided by County; and by Contractor.

8. Procedures for testing.

9. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

10. Periodic cleanup of site.

11. Notification of utilities’ owners.

12. Use of premises by County and Contractor.

13. County’s requirements.

14. Construction facilities and controls provided by County.

15. Temporary utilities provided by County.

16. Survey.

17. Security and housekeeping procedures.


18. Schedules.

19. Procedures for testing.

20. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

21. Requirements for start-up of equipment.

22. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.

D. County will record minutes and distribute copies within five business days after meeting to participants, and to those affected by decisions made.

1.06. PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. County will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals.

B. County will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within five days to participants, and those affected by decisions made.

C. Attendance Required - County, Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

D. Agenda

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of Work progress.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.

4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

7. Maintenance of progress schedule.

8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

10. Coordination of projected progress.

11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.

13. Other business relating to Work.


1.07. PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. When required in individual specification sections, Contractor shall convene a pre-installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section.

C. Notify County at least four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days after conference to participants.

E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01305-1 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01305

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittal procedures.

B. Construction progress schedules.

C. Outage schedules.

D. Proposed products list.

E. Product data.

F. Shop drawings.

G. Manufacturers’ instructions.

H. Manufacturers’ certificates.

I. Construction photographs.



B. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL

C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

D. Section 01640 – EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

E. Section 01660 - TESTING AND STARTUP

F. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

1.03. GENERAL

A. This section supplements the requirements of Standard Specifications for Construction General Provisions Article GP-5.04 and General Provisions Article 40.

1.04. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each required submittal using County Engineer accepted form.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix.

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.


D. Apply stamp, signed or initialed providing certification including the following information (items 6.a. through d. are copyright protected language and used with the permission of the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee under license by GHD Inc. (Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved):

1. Submittal Number 2. Deviations: None_________________; As Listed 3. Reference Specification Section 4. Reference Drawing Number 5. Space Requirement: As Designed____________ Different, As Listed 6. Representation is made to County and County Engineer that Contractor has:

a. reviewed and coordinated submittal with other submittals and with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto;

and that the Contractor hereby approves this submittal. Contractor Signature Date Date

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Owner at business address. Coordinate submission of related items.

F. Identify deviations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Identify space requirements which differ from those designed or shown on the Contract Documents.

G. Provide space for Contractor and Owner review stamps.

H. Revise and resubmit submittals in accordance the procedures established herein for original submittals within 30 days of receipt of review comments from County and/or County Engineer. Identify all changes made since previous submittal.

I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

J. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

K. Fabrication restrictions are identified in Standard Specifications for Construction General Provisions Article GP-5.04.5.

1.05. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit a separate a preliminary critical path method (CPM) schedule within 15 calendar days after date indicated in the Notice to Proceed for Owner’s review.

B. Submit finalized CPM schedule at least 15 calendar days before submission of the first Application for Payment.


C. Submit revised schedules at each progress meeting, identifying changes since previous version.

D. Prepare a computer generated, horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.

E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.

F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each progress meeting.

G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances if applicable.

1.06. OUTAGE SCHEDULES

A. Contractor shall develop a schedule for necessary power outages. A power outage shall be defined as any time period where the utility power is disconnected or interrupted to perform work required for the project. Schedule shall include times and dates of each scheduled interruption with estimated period of outage. Submit plan for continuity of utility service and facility operations no later than 30 calendar days prior to the date of the first scheduled outage. Schedules shall be reviewed by County Engineer and Owner and subject to change based on limitations required to minimize the effect of outages on facility operation. The plan must be approved by the County Engineer and Owner prior to proceeding with any service or operational interruptions.

B. At a minimum, one utility and one standby power source, or two standby power sources shall be available for connection at all times. The contractor is required to maintain only one source for a maximum period of 8 hours during a power outage; at all other times two power sources shall be maintained.

1.07. PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 10 work days after date indicated in the Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product, and appropriate Specification Section Number.

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.

1.08. PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit five copies to Owner, three copies of which will be retained by the Owner.

B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers’ standard data to provide information unique to this Project.

C. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

D. After review and approval by County Engineer, distribute in accordance with Article on Submittal Procedures (above). Provide copies for required Record Documents described in Section 01700, Contract Closeout.


1.09. REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS

A. The following paragraphs included in this Article (Review of Submittals) are based on copyright protected language and used with the permission of the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee under license by GHD Inc. (Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved). The language has been modified slightly to avoid references to documents that are not included in this Contract.

B. County Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

C. County Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

D. County Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has specifically identified such and County Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. County Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements identified on the Contractor’s submittal stamp specified herein.

E. Review times:

1. No less than 15 days shall be allowed for County Engineer’s review of submittals and resubmittals unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

F. Review Codes will be in accordance with Standard Specifications for Construction General Provisions Article 5.04.3.

1.10. SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

A. Within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, submit three (3) copies of preliminary Schedule of Submittals.

B. Revise and resubmit until acceptable to County Engineer.

1.11. SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawing submittals shall include all descriptive data, performance characteristics, material specifications, spare parts list, drawings, piping diagrams, wiring schematics, and shall be complete and accurate to indicate item-by-item compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Shop Drawings shall be drawn at scales matching those on the Drawings depicting the same items.

C. All catalog cuts, manufacturer’s specifications, drawings, and verbal descriptions shall be clearly marked to allow identification of the specific products used.


D. If the submittal deviates from the requirements of the Specifications in any way, it shall be clearly marked in the submittal with the justifying reason stated for evaluation by County Engineer.

E. Electrical and control submittals shall include a verbal description of the functions, metering equipment, alarm points, alarm sequences, and any other specific features provided.

F. Electric motor submittals shall be in accordance with Section 15170, Motors.

G. All electrical equipment submittals shall be in accordance with Division 16, Electrical Specifications.

H. Submit eight (8) opaque reproductions to County Engineer, three copies of which will be retained by the County Engineer.

1.12. SAMPLES

A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers’ standard colors, textures, and patterns for Engineer’s selection.

C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Engineer.

E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.13. MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers’ printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. When specified in Section 01640, Equipment - General, submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for equipment supplied for this project. Manuals shall be delivered prior to 60 percent completion point of project, and shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

C. Identify conflicts between manufacturers’ instructions and Contract Documents.

1.14. MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s certificate to Owner for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to County Engineer.


D. When specified in Section 01640, Equipment – General, or individual specification sections, submit manufacturer’s performance affidavit for equipment to be furnished for this project. Affidavits shall be of format and content prescribed in Section 01640, Equipment – General, and shall be included with the shop drawing or product data submittal for the item of equipment to be furnished.

1.15. CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Take pre-construction photographs of physical features on private and public property which may be disturbed by Contractor’s operations at each jobsite:

1. Take photographs just prior to start of construction in a particular area.

2. Camera angle, direction, and frequency will be dictated by range and nature of physical features to be recorded.

3. Provide minimum of 40 photographs (total) as digital images on electronic media as JPEG files.

B. Take construction photographs of job progress and completed project at each jobsite as follows:

1. Take a minimum of 10 photographs from differing directions indicating relative progress of the Work every day and submit with each application for payment.

C. Completed project photographs at each jobsite shall be provided on digital media as JPEG files.

D. Identify prints with date, time, orientation, and project identification.

E. Minimum number of acceptable photographs is 20. Unacceptable photographs will not be charged against the allowance total.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01310-1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

SECTION 01310

PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01. SUMMARY

A. This Specification section covers the development and utilization of the Progress Schedule. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies with any other provisions of the Contract Documents relating to such, this section shall govern.

1.02. DEFINITIONS

A. Terms used herein shall be in accordance with the definitions set forth in the Associated General Contractors of America (GCA) publication, “Construction Planning & Scheduling”.

1.03. BASIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Schedule and monitor all Work using Critical Path Method (CPM) techniques. Scheduling software shall be Primavera P6.

B. Progress Schedule shall be maintained throughout entire Contract and shall be used by Contractor to schedule, plan, organize, and execute the Work.

C. Progress Schedule shall:

1. Represent Contract Times identified in the Agreement.

2. Reflect all mandated sequencing identified in Contract Documents.

3. Include adequate time for Engineer’s review of submittals. Under no circumstances will the Progress Schedule be allowed to include Engineer review times shorter than those prescribed in the Contract Documents. The need for resubmittals based on Engineer’s review will not entitle Contractor to Contract Time extensions.

4. Include the average number of lost weather days prescribed in the Specifications. The prescribed weather days included in the Specifications are based on NOAA 10-year average precipitation data.

5. Progress Schedule shall include adequate time for testing and Startup.

6. Schedule shall be cost loaded for labor, materials, and equipment comprising the Contract amount. Show resource assignments (number of resources and categories of labor) for each activity at least at the summary task.

D. Each activity, except Notice to Proceed, shall have at least one predecessor. Each activity, except final completion, shall have at least one successor.

E. Construction activities shall have a maximum duration of 20 work days. All durations shall be developed based on definitive manpower and resource planning.

F. Float is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner or Contractor and must be used in the best interest of the Project in order to maintain Contract Times. Contractor will not be allowed to


sequester float through such strategies as extended activity durations, extensive crew/resource sequencing, etc.

1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. CPM scheduler shall be skilled in the time and cost application of CPM scheduling techniques for multi-disciplined construction projects.

B. CPM scheduler shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in preparing CPM schedules for projects of similar size and complexity.

C. Engineer reserves the right to reject proposed CPM scheduler if, in the Engineer’s opinion, the proposed CPM scheduler does not meet the qualifications specified herein. Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision concerning acceptability of proposed CPM scheduler within 14 days of receipt of proposed CPM scheduler qualifications submittal. If Engineer rejects proposed CPM scheduler, resubmit another proposed CPM scheduler within 7 days of receipt of Engineer’s rejection notice. Such rejection by Engineer does not release Contractor from its obligations under this Contract and will not entitle Contractor to an adjustment of Contract Price and/or Contract Times.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the procedures identified in Section 01305, Submittals:

1. CPM scheduler’s qualifications within ten days of Notice of Award including:

a. Name and address of proposed CPM scheduler.

b. Sufficient information showing proposed CPM scheduler’s qualifications including:

1) List of prior construction projects of similar size and complexity.

2) At least one sample network analysis demonstrating complete project planning similar to those required under this Contract, prepared by, or under the direction of, the proposed CPM scheduler.

3) Letter from proposed CPM scheduler indicated they have reviewed this Specification section and understand the requirements specified herein.

2. Preliminary 90-Day Progress Schedule:

a. Submit electronic schedules as .xer files and hard copies as .pdf files sent via e-mail within 10-days of the effective date of the Contract. The files will be distributed and reviewed by Engineer and Owner project representatives.

b. Bar chart shall show the following for each activity:

1) Activity ID

2) Activity description

3) Original duration


4) Early start

5) Early finish

6) Late start

7) Late finish

3. Detailed Baseline Progress Schedule:

a. Submit electronic schedules as .xer files and hard copies as .pdf files sent via e-mail within 30-days after acceptance of the Preliminary 90-Day Progress Schedule. The files will be distributed and reviewed by Engineer and Owner project representatives.

b. Bar chart shall clearly identify the critical path and shall provide a tabulated listing of the following for each activity:

1) Activity ID



4) Percent complete

5) Remaining duration

6) Early start

7) Early finish

8) Late start

9) Late finish

10) Total float

c. Submit cost curves showing early finish and late finish costs for labor costs and total costs. Update these curves monthly and submit with monthly Progress Schedule updates.

d. No progress payments will be made to Contractor for work completed more than 90 days after Notice to Proceed without an approved Baseline Progress Schedule.

4. Monthly Updates

a. After acceptance of the baseline Progress Schedule, submit monthly updates with each Application for Payment. The cutoff date for each monthly update shall be mutually agreed upon by Engineer and Contractor prior to submittal of first monthly update.

b. Submit electronic schedules as .xer files and hard copies as .pdf files sent via e-mail. The files will be distributed and reviewed by Engineer and Owner project representatives.


c. The monthly updates shall include, but not be limited to, three copies of a tabulated listing all activities showing the following:

1) Activity ID



4) Percent complete

5) Remaining duration

6) Early start or actual start

7) Early finish or actual finish]

8) Late start or actual start

9) Late finish or actual finish

10) Total float

d. Submit electronic schedules as .xer files and hard copies as .pdf files sent via e-mail within 30-days after acceptance of the approved Baseline Progress Schedule. The files will be distributed and reviewed by Engineer and Owner project representatives.

e. Written report including the following:

1) Summary of Work accomplished during period

2) Summary of Work to be accomplished during next period

3) Milestone comparison chart

4) Critical path analysis

5) Analysis of work paths with less than 20 days total float

6) Analysis of time lost or gained during the period

7) Identification of problem areas

8) Identification of issues potentially having an adverse impact on the Progress Schedule

B. Engineer’s review of Progress Schedule submissions is solely to determine if Progress Schedule has been prepared in accordance with Contract Documents. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer and/or Owner responsibility for the Progress Schedule, sequencing of Work, progress of Work, nor will it interfere with and/or relieve Contractor full responsibility for the Progress Schedule, means, methods, and sequence of construction when not specifically dictated by the Contract Documents.


C. Should Contractor fail to provide submittals, and/or revised submittals, within the time frames prescribed, Contractor will be in default and Owner is not obligated to provide progress payments to Contractor until such time as acceptability of submittals can be verified.

1.06. PROGRESS SCHEDULE ARCHITECTURE

A. Each activity in the Progress Schedule shall include:

1. A unique activity identification (ID) number

2. Activity description

3. Original Duration

4. Responsibility code assigning activities to Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Owner, or other entity.

5. Cost-loading for all construction activities.

a. Except for manufacturer fabrication lead-time, all activities that have an actual cost shall have an all-inclusive cost-value assigned to it including project management, superintendence, overhead and profit.

b. Major equipment or material delivery costs shall be separate activities.

c. The sum of all activity costs shall be equal to the current Contract value at all times including approved Purchase Order.

d. Certify that the costs are not unbalanced and that the value assigned to each activity represents Contractor’s total cost to perform that activity.

e. If Engineer or Owner determines cost data does not meet the requirements for a balanced bid breakdown, Contractor shall submit documentation substantiating any cost allocation questioned.

f. Cost allocations will be considered unbalanced if activity on the Progress Schedule has been assigned a disproportionate allocation of direct costs, overhead and profit.

g. If documentation of the cost data does not, in the opinion of Engineer, substantiate cost allocations, the Progress Schedule will be returned to the Contractor for action.

B. Project Calendars shall use workdays and calendar days as the planning unit for the schedule. Use of Global Calendars is reserved for Owner. Each calendar shall be set to start on Mondays with holidays in accordance with Owner policy. The following calendars shall be used for each activity except as otherwise accepted by Engineer:

1. 5-Day x 8 Hour Workweek (with holidays) shall be used for 5-day 40-hour workweek activities: Monday through Friday. All holidays and non-work days shall be assigned to this calendar. This calendar shall be used for all normal work activities, submittals, and fabricate and delivery activities. This calendar shall be the default calendar for the project unless otherwise specified.


2. 5-Day x 10-Hour Workweek (with holidays) shall be used for 5-day 50-hour workweek activities: Monday through Friday. All holidays and non-work days shall be assigned to this calendar.

3. 6-Day x 10-Hour Workweek (with holidays) shall be used for 6-day 60-hour workweek activities: Monday through Saturday. All holiday and non-work days shall be assigned to this calendar.

4. 7-Day Calendar (no holidays) shall be used for 7-day workweek activities. No non-work days shall be entered into this calendar.

5. Additional Calendars may be assigned depending on need. However, Contractor shall consult with Engineer before other calendars are entered and/or used in the Progress Schedule.

6. The work day to calendar day correlation shall be based on a single shift and 5-day work week with adequate allowance for holidays, adverse weather and all other special requirements of the Work. Contractor may, at his option, propose alternate baseline calendars to allow a second shift and/or a single shift on Saturdays subject to the concurrence and acceptance of Owner. Under no circumstances will a schedule be accepted which allows regularly scheduled work on holidays, Saturdays and/or Sundays.

7. Holidays observed by Owner are identified in General Provision Article 1.03.

1.07. PRELIMINARY 90-DAY PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Include the following:

1. Detailed activities with associated logic for first 90 days after Notice to Proceed. The Preliminary 90-Day Progress Schedule shall include, but not be limited to, mobilization, sitework, demolition, key procurement activities (i.e., submissions, approvals, fabrication and delivery) and all other work that will occur in the first 90 days after Notice to Proceed.

1.08. DETAILED BASELINE PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Baseline Progress Schedule shall include no activity progress.

B. Incorporate 90-day preliminary Progress Schedule.

C. Provide sufficient detail to allow use for planning, scheduling, and control all Work included in Contract. The degree of detail shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and shall account for the following Project specific items:

1. Structural breakdown of Project

2. Required phasing

3. Milestones

4. Trades involved

5. Maintaining operation of existing facilities

6. Subcontractor work plans


7. Crew flows and sizes

8. Access to Site and work areas

9. Identification of coordination between Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers

10. Testing and Startup

11. Partial utilization by Owner

D. In addition to a breakdown of physical construction activities specified herein, include activities for the following:

1. Submittals

2. Engineer’s review of submittals

3. Fabrication and delivery of materials and equipment

4. Finish milestone activity for all Functional Tests associated with a given System (see Section 01650, Starting of Systems, for definition).

5. Separate activities for loading/debugging application software for each System. Amount of time Contractor shall allow for these activities shall be no less than that defined in the Division 17 Specifications.

E. Update to include any revisions to the System Delivery Plan identified in Section 01650, Starting of Systems.

F. The accepted baseline Progress Schedule will form the basis of the first monthly update.

1.09. SCHEDULING MEETINGS

A. Attend monthly meetings with Engineer one week prior to submitting monthly Progress Schedule updates.

B. Review proposed activity progress completed during the period, current status of the Project, planned work for the next period, and areas where Contractor needs to coordinate with Owner and/or Engineer.

1.10. REVISIONS

A. Engineer will be the custodian of all official versions of the Progress Schedule including the 90-Day Preliminary Progress Schedule, the baseline Progress Schedule, and each acceptable subsequent monthly update included with Applications for Payment.

B. The Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall have the right to propose revisions to the Progress Schedule if it is deemed to be in the best interest of the Project.

C. All Owner, Engineer, and Contractor proposed revisions must be submitted to each party no later than seven days prior to the date by which Contractor must submit monthly updates in order for proposed revisions to be considered for that update.

D. Objections to Proposed Revisions:


1. If Owner, Engineer, and/or Contractor object to proposed revisions made by any other party, the objecting party shall provide written notice to each other party within seven days of receipt of proposed revisions, stating objections.

2. Proposed revisions that are not mutually agreeable shall be discussed at the monthly scheduling meetings.

E. Engineer shall have final say on acceptance or rejection of all proposed Progress Schedule revisions based solely on requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. All Engineer accepted revisions will be incorporated into the next Progress Schedule update.

1.11. RECOVERY SCHEDULES

A. If Contractor fails to achieve planned progress, as indicated in the Progress Schedule, and lack of progress delays the critical path or an intermediate Milestone by more than 10 work days, submit a proposed recovery schedule to Engineer identifying how Contractor will recover lost time.

B. Failure to submit a recovery schedule and failure to cooperate with the Owner and/or Engineer in the recovery schedule process shall allow Owner the right to order Contractor to increase manpower to recover lost time, without adjustment to the Contract Price. Furthermore, Owner has the right to withhold progress payments until such time as Contractor’s progress is brought into compliance with Progress Schedule.

1.12. DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF CONTRACT TIMES

A. When Contractor believes that Contract Times will be delayed by circumstances outside if its control, Contractor shall include with its notice of Claim, a forward looking Time Impact Analysis (TIA) identifying the anticipated impact to Contract Times. Forward looking Time Impact Analysis shall include the following:

1. A fragnet prepared using the Progress Schedule submitted with the most recent Application for Payment.

2. A report identifying all new activities included with the fragnet and all proposed logic changes associated with the fragnet.

3. Summary of all requested extensions to Contract Times.

4. Cause of the delay, actions Contractor proposes to take to minimize delays, and actions Contractor proposes for Owner and/or Engineer to minimize delays.

B. Engineer will review each forward looking TIA after submission. If acceptable to Engineer, Engineer will provide written notice to Owner within 14 days of submission, copying Contractor on correspondence, recommending that the fragnet should be incorporated into the Progress Schedule and a Change Order should be issued providing requested extension of Contract Times. Owner will provide written notice to Contractor within 14 days of receipt of Engineer’s recommendation, either concurring or denying Engineer’s recommendation.

C. If a forward looking TIA submittal is not acceptable to Engineer, Engineer will provide written notice to Contractor identifying deficiencies with TIA. Contractor will have 7 days from receipt of Engineer’s written notice to submit a revised TIA addressing deficiencies.

D. Time extensions will be granted only to the extent that equitable time adjustments for the activity or activities affected exceed the total or remaining float along the critical path at the


time of actual delay. Delays in activities which are not on the critical path and do not affect Contract completion dates, will not be considered for an extension of time.

E. Causes for Extension of Time: The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified herein:

1. Owner Initiated Changes: Owner initiated changes to the Contract that absorb float time will not be considered for an extension of time. Owner initiated changes that affect the critical path of the Progress Schedule shall be grounds for extending or shortening completion dates. Use of float time for Contractor initiated changes will require Owner’s concurrence. Contractor’s changes, however, shall give way to Owner initiated changes competing for the same float time.

2. Outside Contractor’s Control: Events of Contractor’s control that affect the critical path of the Progress Schedule will be considered for an extension or reduction of the Contract Times.

3. Weather delays: Engineer will obtain weather data during construction and maintain weather records. Engineer will determine entitlement to Contractor’s request for extension of Contract Time for weather delays based on procedures contained herein and data included in Tables 1 and 2. All weather-related extension of Contract Time are non-compensable. Efficiencies gained as a result of favorable weather within a calendar month, where the number of days or normally anticipated weather days is less than expected, shall contribute to the Project float and shall not affect the Contract Times. Application for weather related extension of time shall be submitted to Engineer, and shall state the extension requested and be supported by the relevant weather data.

Table 1

Average Monthly Precipitation (inches) 10 year average (2001 – 2010)

(NOAA National Data Center, Annual Climatological Summaries) Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec 2.49 2.64 3.62 3.76 4.32 4.11 4.74 3.59 4.36 4.53 3.42 3.74

Table 2

Average Number of Calendar Days with Precipitation of (>=0.10) inches or More in a Single 24-hour Period

10 year average (2001 – 2010) (NOAA National Data Center, Annual Climatological Summaries)

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec 5 5 7 6 7 7 7 6 5 6 6 6

a. If weather adversely impacts completion of work on the critical path, requests for extension of time will be considered if conditions meet the following eligibility requirements:

1) Step 1: the total precipitation amount included in Table 1 must have been exceeded for the month. If so, then proceed to Step 2.

2) Step 2: the total number of precipitation days included in Table 2 must have been exceeded. If so, then the request is eligible.

3) The number of eligible weather days over the average number of days included in Table 2 will be considered for extension of time.


4) Requests for extension of time must be submitted within 14 calendar days of the month following the month affected by weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01380-1 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION

SECTION 01380

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Construction Photographs.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Take construction record photographs prior to mobilization and periodically during the course of the Work.

1.03 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Digital construction photographs shall be taken at each of the major stages of construction listed below and shall be furnished to Engineer and Owner with each Application for Payment.

1. Site before mobilization.

2. Completion of underground facilities prior to backfilling.

3. Completion of excavations for each structure.

4. Completion of reinforcing and formwork prior to concrete pours.

5. Completion of new wet well slab.

6. Installation of all interior and exposed exterior piping, equipment, and electrical components.

7. Completion of Site restoration and landscaping.

B. Views and Quantities Required

1. Two views of each item.

2. At least five views of overall Project Site monthly.

3. Four prints of each view.

C. Camera used for digital photography shall be a 12 megapixel or greater.

D. Electronic Copies

1. Maintain database of pictures for the entire length of the Project.

2. Each month, provide two CDs with electronic versions of all prints taken in the past month.

3. Provide two CDs with electronic versions of all prints taken during the course of the Project (in .jpg format) with final Application for Payment.


4. All electronic copies of photos shall be in .jpg format. All electronic copies of photos shall be arranged on CDs by date and subject. Each .jpg photo file name shall include the subject description and date.

1.04 REUSE OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION

A. All construction documentation furnished to Owner shall become the property of the Owner and cannot be copyright or otherwise protected in a manner that prevents free reuse by either the Owner and/or Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRINTS

A. Digital Progress Photos

1. Printer

a. Printer shall be designed to print digital photos.

b. Printer shall have a minimum 4800 x 1200 dpi resolution.

2. Color Prints

a. Paper: Single weight, smooth, photo-quality paper.

b. Finish: Smooth matte-finish.

c. Size: 8-inch x 10-inch.

d. Enclosure: Each print shall be provided in an acid-free plastic sleeve, three hole punched, for insertion into a three ring binder. Provide a suitable quantity of three-ring binders for containing all prints, labeled on the front and spine of the binder with the name and Owner’s Contract number.

3. Identify each print on front, listing:

a. Name and Owner’s Contract number.

b. Subject and orientation of view (for example, “Aeration Tank Foundation, looking north”).

c. Date and time of exposure.

d. Contractor’s numbered identification of exposure (i.e., December 2009, Photo #1).


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY OF PRINTS

A. Preconstruction photos shall accompany the first Application for Payment. This Application for Payment will not be approved without receipt of such materials.

B. Monthly construction photos (in both print and CD format) shall accompany each monthly Application for Payment. Monthly Applications for Payment will not be approved without receipt of such materials.

C. Final construction photos and photo database shall accompany the final Application for Payment. This Application for Payment will not be approved without receipt of such materials.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01400-1 QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 01400

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Quality assurance and control of installation.

B. References and standards.

C. Tolerances.

D. Inspection and testing services.

E. Testing by Contractor.

F. Manufacturers’ field services and reports.



B. Section 01305 - SUBMITTALS

1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers’ instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

D. Should manufacturers’ instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

E. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

F. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

1.04. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids, except where a specific date is established by code.


B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

1.05. TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers’ tolerances. Should manufacturers’ tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.06. INSPECTION AND TESTING BY LABORATORY SERVICES

A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to perform tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents.

B. Independent testing laboratory shall:

1. Perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in the individual specification sections and as required by Owner.

2. Perform inspecting, testing, and source quality control which may occur on or off project site, as required by Owner.

3. Prepare and submit reports to the Owner, in duplicate indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. Owner will forward copy of report(s) to Contractor.

C. Contractor shall:

1. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials; furnish design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.

2. Notify Owner and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services.

3. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor’s own use.

D. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed, on instructions by the Owner, by the same independent firm which performed the initial tests and inspections.

E. Payment for retesting will be the Contractor’s cost with no change in the contract price.

1.07. TESTING BY CONTRACTOR

A. Contractor shall furnish required labor, facilities, tools, equipment, compressed air, water and electric power for tests, and:


1. Conduct hydrostatic and/or pressure tests on installed utilities, process piping, valves, and structures, in accordance with individual Sections of the Specifications.

2. Pay all costs associated with such tests.

1.08. MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations, site conditions, or instructions given to applicators or installers, that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers’ written instructions.

C. Submit report in duplicate within 10 work days of observation to Owner for review.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01501-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

SECTION 01501

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Continuity of Service.

B. Temporary Utilities.

C. Temporary Controls - Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and pollution controls.

D. Construction Facilities - Access roads, parking, maintenance of traffic, progress cleaning, and project signage.

1.02 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE

A. Provide temporary equipment including pumps, piping, valves, bulkheads, electrical equipment and all system components necessary to maintain the existing facilities in service during construction.

B. Provide temporary power, instrumentation, controls, and alarms necessary to assure continued facilities operation during the alterations of existing facilities components or installation of new equipment.

C. Maintain emergency backup power supply to all equipment. Provide temporary emergency generator and electrical connections, if necessary.

D. Construction may require the closing of various gates and valves to isolate tanks, channels, and equipment. The Owner does not guarantee that the gates and valves will be completely water tight. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to take whatever measures are necessary to proceed with construction in the event that valves or gates leak.

E. Provide temporary access required, including ladders, platforms, grating, walkways, and awaits which comply with OSHA laws, for necessary facilities operations as determined by County operations staff.

F. Provide all line stops and temporary bypass piping and valves required to connect new piping to existing piping, unless otherwise specified.

G. No extra payment shall be made for any labor, materials, tools, equipment or temporary facilities required during construction. All costs therefore shall be considered to have been included in the Bid.

1.03 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. No more than 50 feet of trench may be opened at any time.

B. Contractor is responsible for the protection of all existing inlets from sediment runoff. Approved sediment control measures shall be utilized, as required, for all inlets in the vicinity of the proposed construction. The failure of plans to indicate required measures shall not relieve Contractor of this responsibility. In the event sediment is carried into existing inlets, Contractor


is responsible for cleaning and restoring the entire drainage system affected at his own expense.

C. In case of repeated failures on the part of Contractor to control erosion or sediment, Engineer reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to use his own forces to provide the required corrective measures. Such incurred direct costs plus all other associated costs, including engineering cost, will be charged to the Contractor and appropriate deductions made from progress payments to Contractor.

D. All sediment control devices or procedures which are specified herein, shown on the Contract Drawings, or required to correct conditions that develop during construction will not be measured separately for payment. The cost of such erosion and sediment control measures shall be included in the prices of the other bid items in the Proposal. This includes seeding and mulching areas disturbed during the excavation and backfilling.

1.04 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Contractor shall pay for temporary electrical use. Contractor is responsible for temporary electrical power distribution around the Site at his own expense. Locations of temporary electrical connections to existing plant services shall be approved by Owner prior to connection.

1.05 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. Provide and maintain lighting for Contractor and pumping station operations to achieve:

1. A minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq.ft. for construction operations.

B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required, for Contractor’s operations.

C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

1.06 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for Contractor’s construction operations.

1.07 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. Provide and pay for cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for Contractor’s construction.

1.08 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases for Contractor’s operations.

1.09 CELLULAR PHONE

A. Contractor’s Project Manager and Superintendent shall be accessible by cell phone at all times. All associated costs shall be borne by Contractor.


1.10 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service required for Contractor’s construction operations.

1.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required sanitary facilities and enclosures for use by all persons employed at the Site. Provide at time of mobilization.

B. Remove temporary sanitary facilities from Site at end of construction.

C. Facilities shall be maintained in conformance with applicable State Regulations and Local ordinances. Contents shall be regularly removed and disposed of in satisfactory manner.

D. Enforce sanitary regulations amongst employees and take precautions against infectious diseases as deemed necessary. Isolate infected employee(s) and arrange for immediate removal of such person(s) from Site.

1.12 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. Maintain Owner access to all areas of pumping stations in continued operation.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way.

C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.

D. Protect vehicles, stored materials, Site and structures from damage.

E. Supplement barriers with suitable signs, railings and night lights, as necessary to conform with governing authorities and regulations.

1.13 FENCING

A. Provide temporary fence in kind at locations where construction activities may require the removal of the existing fence. Site must be maintained secure during construction activities.

B. Temporary fencing may tie into existing fencing as long as entire construction site is secure.

C. If temporary removal of fence gate is required, provide a temporary gate in kind with lock. Coordinate lock with Owner to allow equal access to site.

D. Construction - Commercial grade chain link fence.

1.14 WATER CONTROL

A. Grade Site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

B. Protect Site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect Site from soil erosion


1.15 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary, insulated, weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual Specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

1.16 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

1.17 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed Work from damage and deterioration due to construction activities, traffic, birds, pests, vermin, wild-life, pets, pedestrians, visitors, vandals, dust, vapors, floods, precipitation, driving rain, wind, snow storms, melting temperatures, or freezing temperatures; provide special protection where specified in individual Specification sections.

B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage.

C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

F. Prohibit traffic over landscaped areas. Provide adequate barriers, directional signs, and/or guards if necessary to provide adequate protection of landscaped areas.

G. Owner reserves right to order that additional protective measures be taken beyond those proposed by Contractor, to safeguard the existing facilities and Work at no additional cost to Owner.

1.18 SECURITY

A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, including existing facilities, and Owner’s operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

B. Coordinate security measures taken with Owner’s own security program.

1.19 ACCESS ROADS

A. Existing Site roads may be used for construction traffic. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining existing access road in a serviceable condition until completion of the project. Contractor shall restore existing access road to its original condition upon completion of the project.

B. Contractor must maintain vehicular access to the existing pumping stations at all times.


1.20 PARKING

A. Provide surface parking areas to accommodate all construction personnel involved with Project.

B. When Site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.

1.21 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

A. Maintain and regulate traffic within Contract Limits in accordance with applicable state, county, and local regulations.

B. Conduct operations so as to maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic to and from properties adjoining or adjacent to those streets and roads affected by construction activities, and to subject the public to a minimum of delay and inconvenience.

C. Erect suitable signs and barricades including warning lights at night, to alert traveling public. Provide watchmen and flagmen as necessary to maintain and regulate traffic.

D. Comply with requirements of Department of Transportation agencies having jurisdiction:

1. Where the Work is in or encroaches upon a public Right-of-Way, such as a road, Contractor shall perform the Work in strict compliance with the rules, regulations, requirements, and staff decisions of all applicable Department of Transportation agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Strict adherence to the latest edition of the Work Area Protection Manual and Land Use Permit Regulations (or equivalent documents in the Project area) is required.

3. Frequent inspections of Work conditions by staff of agencies having jurisdiction should be anticipated by Contractor.

4. Compliance with the requirements of the agencies having jurisdiction shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor with the determination of compliance at the sole discretion of the staff of agencies having jurisdiction.

5. Whenever charges are incurred, these charges will be invoiced to the Owner. The Owner will invoice the Contractor for these charges plus a 20% administrative fee. The Contractor shall pay these invoices no less frequently than monthly.

6. Contractor shall not be granted Substantial Completion until all of these invoices are paid by the Contractor to the Owner.

7. No additional claim for increased Cost or extension of time shall be allowed in the event these requirements are imposed by agencies having jurisdiction.

1.22 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain Site and structures in a clean and orderly condition, as follows:

1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawlspaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

2. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.


3. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from Site weekly and dispose off-site.

B. Store unused tools and equipment at its yard or base of operations.

1.23 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Dust Control

1. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

2. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

3. Wash down disturbed areas daily.

4. Implement best management practices in accordance with requirements of agencies have jurisdiction over dust control.

B. Noise Control

1. All construction equipment and tools exhibiting potential noise nuisance shall be provided with noise muffling devices.

2. Confine use of such equipment and tools during regular working hours.

3. Implement best management practices in accordance with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction over noise control.

C. Pollutants Control: Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

1.24 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, controls, and materials prior to Conditional Acceptance unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Remove temporary barriers, enclosures, etc. in concert with completion of those segments of Work which no longer require such measures.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01540-1 TEMPORARY PUMPING

SECTION 01540

TEMPORARY PUMPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Furnishing, installing, and testing temporary pumping systems.

1.02 GENERAL

A. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, power, maintenance, associated items, and superintendence to implement temporary pumping systems for diverting flow as required to maintain continuous operation of existing facilities prior to successful Startup of new facilities. Section 01010, Summary of Work, identifies specified facility outages that may require temporary pumping. Section 01501, Temporary Facilities, provides the flows associated with the various unit processes throughout the facility. Provide all additional temporary pumping systems needed to meet Contractor’s means and methods at no additional cost to Owner.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01305, Submittals as supplemented herein.

B. Submit a specific detailed description of each proposed temporary pumping system at least 30 days prior to intended use. The submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. At least five (5) references of projects of a similar size and complexity as this project performed within the past three (3) years.

2. A written description of the plan.

3. Quantity, capacity, and location of all pumping equipment.

4. Pump performance curves and head capacity curves demonstrating the capability to meet all required flows.

5. The size, type and routing of all suction and discharge piping and the means of connecting the system.

6. Description of controls and emergency power source.

C. Engineer’s review will be limited to verification of compliance with performance requirements only. Owner will review temporary pumping system submittals with respect to maintenance of plant operations.

1.04 TEMPORARY PUMPING COORDINATION MEETING

A. Prior to the development of any Temporary Pumping submittals, hold a pre-submittal coordination conference with Owner and Engineer to discuss requirements and schedule.

B. After Owner and Engineer review of temporary pumping system submittal(s), and at least 14 days prior to intended use, schedule a coordination meeting with the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, temporary pump Supplier, and associated Subcontractors.


C. No temporary pumping shall take place until after satisfactory completion of the associated coordination meeting.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design the installation and operation of temporary pumping systems in accordance with Laws and Regulations, including local noise and light ordinances.

B. Provide fuel supply for 48 hours of operation on Site and stored in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Assume responsibility for all spills and regulatory fines due to failure of the temporary pumping system.

C. Designed to pump required flow.

D. Provide a backup pump on-site and ready for operation of the same capacity as the largest temporary bypass pump. In addition, one of the following two conditions must be met:

1. The temporary pumping system must be manned continuously (24 hours per day, 7 days per week) during operation by a representative of the Contractor trained and certified by the pump Supplier. In the event of a pump failure, the Owner shall be notified within 15 minutes and the temporary backup pump shall be placed into service within one hour of the pump failure.

2. As an alternative, install, test, and maintain remote telemetry to monitor operation of the temporary pump(s) and the wet well level(s). Alarming shall also be tied to the County’s SCADA system. Notify Owner within 15 minutes of a pump and/or system failure. Report to Site within 30 minutes of a pump and/or system failure, and place the temporary backup pump in service within one hour of a pump and/or system failure.

3. For temporary pumping system with automatic backup pump operation, report to Site within 30 minutes of a pump failure to ensure the automatic backup system is operating properly.

E. Temporary pumping systems shall be equipped with noise reduction features that limit the noise output to 65 dbA within 50 feet of the equipment or to 60 dbA at the nearest residence property line, whichever is less.

F. Provide variable frequency drives where required to meet temporary pumping requirements.

G. See Section 01010, Summary of Work, for facility outage requirements and constraints.

1.06 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS

A. Contractor is responsible for fines levied on Owner by state, federal, and/or other agencies due to spills causes by failure of temporary pumping systems.

B. Provide Jersey barriers in all locations where temporary pumps, piping, and other accessories are located in roadways, driveways, and other vehicle-accessed areas.

C. Provide security fencing for all temporary pumps where not located within a secured area.

D. Contractor shall coordinate at least one week in advance for the bypass pumping system monitoring tie-ins to the County SCADA system.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PUMPS

A. The pumps shall be capable of pumping the required flow ranges without surging, cavitation, or vibration. Pumps shall be suitable for use with for the material being pumped. Pumps shall be a self contained units designed for temporary use.

B. Pumps shall be Godwin Dri-Prime pumps with sound attenuation enclosures as manufactured by Godwin Pumps of America, Inc. or Equal.

C. Pumps shall either have fully automatic self-priming units that do not require the use of foot-valves or vacuum pumps in the priming system, or they shall be submersible unless otherwise specified.

D. The pumps shall be diesel powered or powered by a diesel powered generator unless otherwise specified.

E. Provide the necessary start/stop and level controls for each pump.

F. Temporary pumps used for chemical service shall be approved by Engineer during Shop Drawing process prior to use.

2.02 PIPING

A. In order to prevent the accidental spillage, all temporary piping must be constructed of rigid or semi-rigid pipe with positive, leak proof connections. All pipe materials and joints for temporary piping systems must be accepted by Engineer prior to use.

B. Pipe 12 inches and larger shall be ductile iron or fused joint high density polyethylene pipe to provide a leak proof piping system. Flanged joints shall be used for exposed or submerged ductile iron pipe. Pipe joints shall be accepted by Engineer prior to use for temporary ductile iron pipe.

C. Provide heat tracing of temporary piping as required to prevent freezing.

2.03 TEMPORARY PLUGS

A. Provide temporary plugs, as required, for successful operation of the temporary pumping systems.

B. Plugs shall be inflatable and designed for the specific purpose of providing temporary plugging of active pipes.

C. All plugs shall be firmly attached to a stationary object at ground level by a steel cable in order to prevent loss of plugs in pipelines.

2.04 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Pipe supports shall be provided by the temporary piping Supplier for all piping that is elevated above the ground.

B. Pipe support design shall be by the temporary pipe Supplier and spacing shall be in requirements included in Contract Documents for permanent piping.


C. Pipe support type and location shall be indicated in the Shop Drawing submittals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install, operate and maintain temporary pumping systems and appurtenances, including but not limited to, associated piping, valves, instrumentation, controls, and accessories, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Provide all oil, fuel, grease, lubricants, tools, and spare parts required for operation and maintenance of the temporary pumping systems for the duration of use. Remove all temporary pumping systems and appurtenances equipment following the completion of temporary pumping.

B. Contractor is responsible for proper operation of complete temporary pumping systems.

C. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessory shall be maintained on the Site.

D. Provide hay bales and tarping systems to enclose all exterior pumps and engines to further reduce noise levels.

E. Demonstrate all temporary pumping systems to Owner and/or Engineer for conformance with the Contract Documents prior to use.

1. Measure the noise output during the demonstration phase and provide the results to Engineer.

F. Temporary pumping systems shall be placed in service a minimum of 72 hours before any work requiring use of the temporary pumping system may begin. Demonstrate continuous trouble-free operation for entire 72 hours period.

G. Temporary pumping systems shall remain operable until all components of new work requiring temporary pumping systems have successfully completed all required testing. Once activated, do not decommission without prior approval of the Owner and Engineer.

H. Once written permission is issued by the Engineer, remove all components of the temporary pumping systems. After removal of temporary pumping systems, perform all restoration work to the satisfaction of the Owner.

I. Take precautions to prevent spills when cutting pipelines or decommissioning existing piping.

J. Required Flow Rates: The following identifies some of the major flow rates required to maintain continuous operation of the plant. Contractor’s means and methods may require temporary pumping of these and other unit processes or flow paths, in order to construct new facilities. Contractor shall provide all temporary pumping required to maintain continuous operation of the plant at no additional cost to Owner. If contractor’s means and methods require temporary pumping of items not listed herein, coordinate with Engineer to determine required pumping ranges prior to submitting associated Shop Drawings.

LOCATION FLOW RATE1 TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD

Intersite Pump Station 250 gpm 99 ft

Hill Road Pump Station 510 gpm 37 ft

Swan Point Influent Pump Station 1000 gpm 56.2 ft


LOCATION FLOW RATE1 TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD

Swan Point Effluent Pump Station 1200 gpm 58 ft

Matthew’s Manor Influent2 28 gpm Notes: 1. Flow rate is on a per pump basis. 2. Matthew’s Manor is a STEP system where multiple pumps could be operating

simultaneously. Flow rate is approximate only.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01600-1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 01600

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Products.

B. Transportation and handling.

C. Storage and protection.

D. Substitutions.

1.02. GENERAL

A. This section supplements the requirements of General Provisions.




1.04. PRODUCTS

A. Products - Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

B. No product shall be unloaded, stored, or used at the site without approval of the shop drawing submittal by the Owner.

1.05. TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accordance with construction progress schedules. Allow time for inspection prior to installation.

B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work, conditions at site, and availability of personnel and handling equipment.

C. Transport Products by methods to avoid Product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer’s unopened containers or packaging, dry, with identifying labels intact and legible.

D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion and other damage.

E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged.


F. Provide Owner a copy of all delivery invoices.

1.06. STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to Product.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

D. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of Products.

E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

G. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

1.07. SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Owner will consider requests for Substitutes or “Or Equal” items after the Effective Date of the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. Furnish evidence that Product is unavailable.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents.

D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Will reimburse Owner the costs incurred by Owner for review and any subsequent redesign services by Owner, including Owner’s revisions to the Contract Documents, and Owner’s assistance in connection with review by authorities when re-approval is required, if owner determines that the item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is a substitute item.


E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or Product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

F. Substitution Submittal Procedure

1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution.

2. Submit shop drawings, Product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed Product equivalence.

3. The Owner will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01640-1 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

SECTION 01640

EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Performance affidavit.

B. Shop drawings.

C. Equipment design.

D. Spare parts.

E. Equipment identification.

F. Standardization of grease fittings.

G. Anchors and supports.

H. Shop tests.

I. Installation of equipment.

J. Field tests.

K. Services of manufacturer’s representative.

L. Operation and maintenance instructions.

M. Failure of equipment to perform.

N. Guarantee.

O. Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services.


A. Section 01305 - SUBMITTALS


C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

D. Section 01650 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS

E. Section 16620 – PACKAGED ENGINE GNERATOR SYSTEMS


1.03. PERFORMANCE AFFIDAVITS

A. Provide performance affidavits for products listed in the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services, included at the end of this Section, and as required in the individual technical sections.

B. Submit performance affidavits in conformance with Section 01300, Submittals.

C. By these affidavits, each manufacturer must certify to the Contractor and the Owner, jointly, that he has examined the Contract Documents and that the equipment, apparatus, process or system he offers to furnish will meet in every way the performance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents. Equipment design, manufacturing and assembly specifications are an integral part of the performance requirements.

D. Shop drawings will not be reviewed prior to receipt by the Owner of an acceptable performance affidavit.

E. The performance affidavit must be signed by an officer (vice president or higher) of the basic corporation, partnership or company manufacturing the equipment, and witnessed by a notary public.

F. The performance affidavits shall be in the following format:

Addressed to: (Contractor) and (Owner) Reference: Contract No.

(Project) Text: “(manufacturer’s name) has examined the Contract Documents and

verified that the (product) meets in every way the performance requirements and design specifications set forth in Section(s) of the Contract Documents.”

Signature: Corporate officers shall be vice president or higher (unless statement authorizing signature is attached).

Notary: Signature(s) must be notarized.

1.04. SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Provide shop drawing submittals as specified in Section 01305, Submittals.

B. Shop drawing submittals shall include all descriptive data, performance characteristics, material specifications, spare parts list, drawings, piping diagrams, wiring schematics, and shall be complete and accurate to indicate item-by-item compliance with the Contract Documents.

C. All catalog cuts, manufacturer’s specifications, drawings, and verbal descriptions shall be clearly marked to allow identification of the specific products used.

D. If the submittal deviates from the requirements of the Specifications in any way, it shall be clearly marked in the submittal with the justifying reason stated for evaluation by the Owner.

E. Electrical and control submittals shall include a verbal description of the functions, metering equipment, alarm points, alarm sequences, and any other specific features provided.

F. All electrical equipment submittals shall be in accordance with Division 16, Electrical Spe


1.05. EQUIPMENT DESIGN

A. Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with ANSI, ASME, IEEE, NEMA and other generally accepted applicable standards.

B. Equipment and appurtenances shall be of rugged construction and of sufficient strength to withstand all stresses which may occur during fabrication, testing, transportation, installation, all conditions of operation, or as required by Specifications.

C. All bearings and moving parts shall be adequately protected by bushings or other approved means against wear, and provision shall be made for adequate lubrication by readily accessible devices.

D. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding members, joints, corners, gear covers, etc., shall be finished in appearance. All exposed welds on machinery shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered.

E. Machinery parts shall conform within allowable tolerances to the dimensions shown on the working drawings. The corresponding parts of identical machines shall be made interchangeable.

F. All machinery and equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the safety codes of the ANSI and OSHA and the State Industrial Code. All rotating shafts, couplings or other moving pieces of equipment shall be provided with suitable protective guards of sheet metal or wire mesh neatly and rigidly supported. Guards shall be removable as necessary to provide access for repairs.

G. Details promoting maintenance, ease of replacing parts, and lubrication shall be a prime consideration in design.

H. Products shall be designed for corrosion resistance and shall not be constructed of materials which may prohibit ease of maintenance due to corrosion. All fasteners on areas requiring access for maintenance and lubrication shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise specified. Zinc or cadmium plated fasteners for these areas shall not be used.

1.06. SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Provide spare parts that are identical and interchangeable with original parts.

C. For each part (or group of small parts), provide a tag which shall carry the following information: Identity of the equipment the part is for; identity or name of the part itself; date and manufacturer’s name and identification number of the part.

1.07. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial brass or stainless steel nameplate, securely fastened in a conspicuous place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer’s name, year of manufacture, serial number and principal rating data.

1.08. ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS

A. Obtain and install all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, working drawings for installation, templates and all other appurtenances necessary for the installation


of the equipment specified. Subcontractors furnishing equipment shall also furnish anchors and templates to the General Contractor.

B. Anchor bolts shall be of size and strength suitable for purpose intended and shall be in accordance with Section 05500, Miscellaneous Fabrications, and the individual specification sections.

C. Pipe sleeves or other means of adjusting anchor bolts shall be provided where indicated or needed. Equipment shall be leveled by first using sitting nuts on the anchor bolts and then filling the space between the equipment base and concrete pedestal with grout. Where equipment bases (i.e., pumps) are installed with grout holes, subsequent to field testing, those bases shall be totally filled with grout.

D. Provide grout as required by Section 03001.

E. Provide concrete equipment pads or 4-inch high housekeeping pads for all mechanical and electrical equipment. Coordinate with other contractors before pad placement to confirm dimensions, location and anchor requirements.

1.09. SHOP TESTS

A. Arrange shop tests of the equipment indicated in the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services and individual equipment specification sections.

B. Arrange for the Owner to witness performance tests in the manufacturer’s shop, if required by the individual specification section.

C. Pump shop tests shall be conducted and reported in accordance with the Standards established by the Hydraulic Institute. Pump tolerances shall be within limits acceptable by these standards.

D. Demonstrate by the tests that the equipment characteristics, including any specified pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function or other special requirements, comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that it will operate in the manner specified.

E. Submit certified copies of the manufacturer’s test data and interpreted results as required by Section 01305, Submittals.

1.10. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Install all equipment strictly in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer.

B. Submit all installation instructions as required by Section 01305, Submittals.

C. Install equipment on the foundations as specified in this Section and at the locations and elevations shown on the Contract Drawings.

1.11. FIELD TESTS

A. Perform field tests as specified in this Section and in the individual specification sections.

B. Preliminary field tests - Furnish all labor, materials and instruments to perform all preliminary field tests of equipment. Make all changes, adjustments and replacements required to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Demonstrate that:


1. Equipment is installed in the location and orientation specified in Project Manual or shown on the Drawings.

2. Equipment is prepared for operation in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and with manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Final Acceptance Tests - Perform final tests prior to startup. Provide services of the manufacturer’s representative if required by the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services. Furnish labor, fuel, lubricants, energy, water and all other materials, equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests. Schedule final acceptance test to consist of the following checks as a minimum:

1. That the equipment is properly lubricated, adjusted and aligned.

2. That the equipment meets the specified performance requirements in every detail and performs its intended function without any unusual vibration, noise or other signs of possible malfunction.

3. Where equipment is capable of operation in more than one mode or equipment performs more than one function, each operational mode or function shall be checked for proper performance.

4. All controls, both mechanical and electrical, shall be checked individually for proper connection and operation.

1.12. SERVICE OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Arrange for the equipment manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative. The time period for the supervision and instructions is stated in the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services. Where no specific duration of visit is listed, the length of time shall be such to allow the equipment representative ample time to follow the requirements outlined in this Section and the individual technical section covering the particular equipment item.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional time required for the manufacturer’s representative to resolve equipment installation and/or operation problems due to a lack of coordination between the supplied equipment and the Contract Documents such as, but not limited to, dimensions, electrical problems or performance.

C. Arrange for the equipment representative to visit the plant on occasions after initial start-up and during the first year of operation if required by the individual Specification Sections. The purpose of these visits shall be to review equipment operation, assist the operators in correcting operational problems and basic inspection of the equipment.

D. Installation Service - Certify installation, recommend or make adjustments and supervise field testing of equipment.

E. Instructions - Instruct the Owner’s operating personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. A written report by the representative covering instructions given shall be sent to the Owner and Contractor.

F. Certification of Equipment Compliance - Submit written certification jointly to the Owner and the Contractor that the equipment supplied or manufactured by their organization has been installed and tested to their satisfaction, and that all final adjustments thereto have been made. Certification shall include date of final acceptance field test, as well as a listing of all persons present during tests.


1.13. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit operation and maintenance instructions as required by the Schedule of Equipment Testing and Manufacturer’s Services, including those instructions required by the applicable technical sections, in accordance with Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

B. Organize the instructions as follows:

All instructions shall be bound into a series of identical heavy-duty, three-ring binders. Information shall be organized by section, each section covering a specific equipment item. Section shall be listed in a Table of Contents at the front of each volume. Each section shall contain the following as a minimum:

1. Section Table of Contents.

2. Written instructions, including technical bulletins and diagrams.

3. Complete parts lists and parts diagrams for all equipment, including motors and drive units, showing manufacturer’s identification numbers for each part.

4. Copies of shop drawings, where required, to adequately describe interrelation of components within a system.

5. Complete electrical and control schematics with labeled terminations.

6. List of special tools required for operation and maintenance.

7. List of spare parts supplied with the equipment, identified by manufacturer’s part numbers.

8. Source of replacement parts and address and telephone number of the manufacturer’s service representative.

Separate sections shall be clearly marked with dividers. Folded drawings or small items shall be provided in heavy-duty, three-ring plastic pockets. Information not applicable to a specific piece of equipment installed on this project shall be removed from or crossed off on the submission. At the end of each section, the Contractor shall include a detailed maintenance and lubrication schedule for equipment covered in the section. Schedule shall include the following, as a minimum, for each equipment item:

1. List and frequency of maintenance activities, other than lubrication.

2. Lubrication frequency and application points.

3. Lubricant type (weight or grade and recommended manufacturers) and method of application.

Motors and drive units furnished as part of the equipment shall be included in the schedule. Schedule forms will be provided by the Engineer.


1.14. LUBRICATION

A. Retain the services of a qualified lubrication specialist, acceptable to the Owner, to review the lubrication and maintenance instructions and schedules provided by the various equipment manufacturers. The lubrication specialist shall represent a major oil company and shall have an office within a 40-mile radius of the project site.

B. Arrange for the lubrication specialist to prepare revised lubrication schedules for all equipment utilizing lubricants from as few companies as possible (preferably single source).

C. Include revised lubrication schedule(s) in the Operation and Maintenance Instructions.

1.15. FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT TO PERFORM

A. Promptly correct by replacement or otherwise any defects in the equipment, or failure to meet the guarantees or performance requirements.

B. If Contractor fails to make these correction, or if the improved equipment again fails to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding his having made partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacture of said equipment, may reject said equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at the Contractor’s expense.

1.16. GUARANTEE

A. Provide equipment guarantees in accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions. Guarantee requirements may be added to or modified in the individual Specification Sections.

B. By supplying a product under the contract, the manufacturer and Contractor jointly agree that all manufacturer’s warranties, expressed or implied, pass through the Contractor to Owner. This warranty obligation starts on the date of Final Acceptance and survives any inspection by, delivery to, acceptance by or payment by the Owner or Contractor for the goods furnished by the manufacturer. Further, this warrants that the equipment designed, manufactured and/or used meets all applicable federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations, including applicable OSHA standards. This requirement does not change or limit the requirements for performance affidavits described in Article 1.03.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

(continued)


SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT TESTING AND MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

SERVICES OF MFG. REP.

EQUIPMENT ITEM

SECTION

PERFOR- MANCE

AFFIDAVIT

SHOP TESTS

FIELD TESTS

INSTALLATION

VISITS

FINAL

ACCEPTANCE VISITS

TRAINING VISITS

Sump Pump 11317 Y Y Y 1 per installation

1 per installation

1

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01650-1 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

SECTION 01650

STARTING OF SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Starting systems.

B. Demonstration and instructions.

C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


A. Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL

B. Section 01640 - EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

C. Section 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

1.03. EQUIPMENT STARTUP

A. Coordinate schedule start-up of various equipment and systems with Owner.

B. Notify Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Prior to startup, the Contractor shall have completed the following:

1. Verification that final acceptance tests have been performed.

2. Certification of equipment compliance as required under Section 01640, Equipment - General.

3. Verification that all required lubrication equipment and materials are provided.

4. Verification that all piping and valves have been labeled, as indicated in the specifications.

5. Verification that all indicating and annunciating systems are installed and fully functional.

6. Verification all equipment O&M manuals have been provided to the Owner.

7. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage.

8. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

9. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01650-2 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

D. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer’s representative in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

E. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

F. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400, Quality Control, that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

G. All major equipment (as listed in Section 01640, Equipment - General) provided under this Contract shall be tested to demonstrate compliance with the specifications prior to decommissioning the existing pumping station. Any repairs, replacement of parts, adjustments or other corrections, including vendor field services required when conducting the testing of the equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Should the equipment fail to meet the performance specifications, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor with the vendor to correct the problem.

1.04. DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner’s personnel two weeks prior to date of startup of the system which shall be considered Final Acceptance for the Project.

B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner’s personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location.

D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

E. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in Section 01640, Equipment - General.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 01700-1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Closeout procedures.

B. Final cleaning.

C. Adjusting.

D. Project record documents.

E. Operation and maintenance data.

F. Warranties and bonds.

G. Spare parts and maintenance materials.



1.03. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Owner’s inspection.

B. Correct or replace defective work.

C. Provide submittals to Owner that are required by governing or other authorities and Contract Documents.

Before the Certificate of Final Acceptance is issued, submit to the Owner the following:

1. Test results of project components.

2. Performance affidavits for equipment.

3. Certification of equipment or materials in compliance with Contract Documents.

D. Conform to procedures established by Engineer, in concert with requirements of General Provisions and Special Provisions, for final payment application, certificate of Final Acceptance, final inspection, release of liens, and other related documentations or conditions required by Contract Documents.

1.04. FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.


B. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, sheds, tools and construction facilities from the site.

1.05. ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.06. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Contract Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract.

5. Approved shop drawings, product data.

B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

C. Record information concurrent with construction progress; make available for periodic examination by Owner.

D. Ensure that entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

E. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings - Legibly mark in red ink or pencil to show all changes in, or directly associated with, the work of this contract. Keep entire set of drawings current on day-to-day basis. Examples of types of changes which could occur and are to be recorded:

1. Change in location or elevation of structures.

2. Change in dimensions of structures.

3. Elimination of structures.

4. Unforeseen modifications to existing structures made necessary by work requirements.

5. Relocation of equipment.

6. Additions to or expansion of structures.

7. Changes in mechanical trades components.

8. Measured location of internal utilities or mechanical trade items, which are to be concealed from view, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.

9. Change in location or elevations of underground utilities installed under this Contract.

10. Change in materials, such as pipe materials.


11. Relocation of existing underground utilities made necessary because of interference with work under this contract.

12. Change in topographical contours of finished earth and paved surfaces.

13. Change in elevations of finished surfaces along route of installed underground utilities (sewer, water).

F. Affix Contractor’s identification stamp, together with the label “Record Documents,” as follows:

1. On each Contract Drawing, just above the Engineer’s title block.

2. On each shop drawing, just above the preparer’s title block.

3. On the front cover or front page of all other documents.

G. Submit documents to Owner with final Application for Payment.

1.07. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General and General Provisions.

1.08. WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Provide duplicate notarized copies of certifications for those items with extended transferable warranties beyond one year. Prepare separate submittal for each item.

B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover.

D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Final Acceptance, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.09. SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.

B. Deliver to project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.


PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02012

TEST PITS

02012.01 GENERAL A. Description

1. Test pits shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, excavation to determine the

exact location and/or elevation of underground structures, utilities, and other obstructions; the backfill and compaction of the excavation; and the stabilization of the surface in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide test pitting as required to establish

the location and/or elevation of existing underground facilities at points of crossing with new underground facilities.

B. Related Work Included Elsewhere

1. Maintenance of traffic; Division 1.

2. Protection of the environment; Section 01500.

3. Adjusting and replacing fences, shrubs, hedges, etc.; Section 02130.

4. Adjusting existing utilities and underground structures; Section 02140.

5. Removal of existing pavement, sidewalk, curb, and combination curb and gutter;

Section 02160.

6. Tamped fill; Section 02265.

7. Excavation support; Section 02400.

8. Dewatering; Section 02512.

9. Patching paving; Section 02680. C. Quality Assurance

1. Materials

It is intended that all materials removed from the test pit excavation, exclusive of paving materials, be used for backfill. The County Engineer will inspect all material

SPECIFICATIONS - MAY 1996

TEST PITS 02012-2

prior to its use as backfill to determine the material's suitability for use as backfill.

2. Field Tests

The County Engineer may, at the County Engineer's discretion, arrange for in-place moisture/density testing of the backfilled excavation. The Contractor shall be governed by the requirements of Section 02250.01, Article C.

D. Submittals

None.

02012.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials furnished by the County

None.

B. Contractor's Options

Not applicable.

C. Detailed Material Requirements

1. Use of Excavated Material

All suitable material excavated from test pits shall be used, as far as practicable, for backfill. The Contractor shall properly store or stockpile and protect all materials that are to be reused in the work. The Contractor shall replace, at the Contractor's own expense, material that was suitable when excavated, which has subsequently become unsuitable because of careless, neglectful, wasteful, or unprotected storage. The Contractor shall have no property right in any material taken from any excavation and no excavated material shall be wasted or otherwise removed from the project site without permission of the County Engineer. All unsuitable material shall be removed from the excavation and disposed of off-site by and at the expense of the Contractor.

2. Borrow

Borrow material for test pit backfill shall meet the requirements of Section 02240.02.

3. Graded Aggregate Subbase

Graded aggregate subbase for test pit backfill shall meet the gradation requirements specified in Section 02621.02.

02012.03 EXECUTION

A. General

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the location and/or elevation of underground structures and utilities by the use of test pit excavation prior to initiating


TEST PITS 02012-3

excavation operations for the installation of the proposed facility. Test pits shall be of the size, depth and location as approved by the County Engineer. Should the location and/or elevation thus determined be different from that shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall promptly furnish the correct information to the County Engineer so that the impact on the Project may be determined.

B. Test Pits

1. Surface preparation, excavation, backfill, compaction, and maintenance of the

backfilled excavation shall be as specified in Section 02250.03 for trenches except that the limits of the work shall be as approved by the County Engineer.

2. Restoration shall be as specified in Section 02250.03 unless otherwise specified or

directed by the County Engineer. 02012.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE

02012.05 BASIS OF PAYMENT



SECTION 02030

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Regulatory requirements.

B. Hazardous environmental conditions.

C. Sequencing.

D. Submittals.

E. Meetings.

F. Record Drawings.

G. Demolition preparation and requirements.

1.02. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, protection of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control, and disposal of materials.

B. Obtain required permits from authorities.

C. Notify affected utility companies before starting demolition operations and comply with their requirements.

D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, hydrants, parking areas, and egress width to exits without permission.

E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures if a hazardous environmental condition is encountered at the Site.

1.03. HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. If an unknown unforeseeable hazardous environmental condition is encountered at the Site, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a hazardous environmental condition, immediately:

1. Secure or otherwise isolate such condition;

2. Stop all work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby;

3. Immediately notify Owner and Engineer and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing.

B. Resume work in connection with such condition or in any affected area only after responsible party has obtained required permits related thereto and Owner delivers to Contractor a written notice specifying under what special conditions affected work may be resumed safely.

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 02030-1 DEMOLITION

1.04. SEQUENCING

A. Sequence demolition work to conform scheduling constraints identified in Section 01010, Summary of Work.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Provide demolition plans in accordance with the requirements of Section 01305, Submittals as supplemented herein. At a minimum, demolition plans shall include the following:

1. Protection of water quality.

2. Dust control.

3. Noise abatement.

4. Sequence of work

5. Removal of material.

6. Protection of existing equipment.

7. Access and egress of demolished and removed materials.

B. When demolition work involves items in service, the demolition plan shall be included as part of a Continuity of Service plan as specified in Section 01010, Summary of Work.

1.06. DEMOLITION MEETINGS

A. Thirty days prior to performing any demolition, coordinate a meeting with Owner and Engineer to discuss and finalize demolition procedures based on approved demolition plans

1.07. RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. Demolition work shall be in accordance with Sections 02150, Removal or Abandonment of Existing Utilities and Underground Structures; 02160, Removal of Existing Pavement, Sidewalk, Curb, and Combination Curb and Gutter; and as supplemented herein.

B. No demolition work shall begin prior to receipt of written approval from Owner.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers, signs, and security devices for demolition materials and equipment.


B. Protect existing structures, equipment, appurtenances, architectural features, and materials which are not to be demolished.

C. Notify Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of intended start of demolition operations in each affected area.

3.03. DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

1. The continuous operation of the facility shall be maintained during the entire Project unless specific facility outages are allowed by the Contract Documents. Provide all temporary facilities needed to maintain continuous operation during demolition.

2. All materials resulting from demolition shall become Contractor’s property unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents

3. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures, materials, or equipment. Repair all damaged facilities at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Prevent movement and/or settlement of adjacent structures. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Owner and Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed by Owner.

5. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain access and egress to the Site at all times.

6. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.

7. Provide dust control for all new and existing equipment. Cover all electrical equipment, control panels, and appurtenances and protect from dust. Suspended dust shall be kept to a minimum, and the Contractor shall clean up all dust at least once per day for the duration of all demolition and once after each demolition activity is complete.

8. Provide adequate ventilation in all areas of demolition work.

9. All new materials and equipment required for connections to existing facilities shall be on Site and ready for installation prior to commencing demolition required for connections.

10. Provide all required appurtenances to adequately support remaining piping, conduits, and duct banks after required portions are removed.

11. Completely remove all demolished materials from the Site.

12. Coordinate removal of demolished materials with Owner’s operating procedures.

13. Temporary staging of demolished materials on Site shall be in accordance with the approved demolition plan and shall be kept to a minimum.

14. Burning of debris on Site is not allowed.

15. Sale of removed materials at the Site is not allowed.


B. All conductors for both abandoned and demolished ductbanks shall be pulled completely.

C. Remove foundation walls and footings to a minimum of 2 feet below finished grade if additional removal is not required to construct new facilities.

D. Empty and clean buried tanks and associated piping scheduled for demolition.

E. Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in manner to prevent damage.

F. Backfill, compact, and rough grade excavated areas, including cavities created by removal of demolished items, in accordance with Section 02265, Tamped Fill.

G. Remove temporary barricades, partitions, signs, etc. upon completion of each area of demolition.

3.04. SCHEDULES

A. Site and Structural Demolition - Contractor shall demolish and remove all structures, portions of structures, pavement, fences and other items as required by the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02160

REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, SIDEWALK, CURB, AND COMBINATION

CURB AND GUTTER


Removal of existing pavement, sidewalk, curb, and combination curb and gutter shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the removal and disposal of pavement areas inclusive of pavement base courses, sidewalk, curb, combination curb and gutter, paved ditches, handicap ramps, driveway aprons, and other miscellaneous surfaces in accordance with the Contract Documents.



2. Excavation; Sections 02210, 02220, 02230, and 02250.

C. Quality Assurance

The County Engineer reserves the right to inspect all work to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

D. Submittals

None.

02160.02 MATERIALS

Not applicable.

02160.03 EXECUTION

A. Removal

1. Pavement, including base courses, sidewalk, curb, and combination curb and

gutter, and other miscellaneous surfaces shall be removed for the full depth thereof. The Contractor shall use suitable equipment, tools, and methods for cutting and trimming as well as removing the materials to the neat lines established by the County Engineer and shall not in any manner disturb or damage the sections of base or pavement to be salvaged or adjacent grass, sod, or other surfaces. Damage done by the Contractor's equipment or methods to those areas designated for salvaging shall be repaired and restored at the Contractor's expense. Where the


REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, SIDEWALK, CURB 02160-2 AND COMBINATION CURB AND GUTTER

old subgrade is satisfactory as to condition and elevation, special care shall be taken in the removal operation in order to avoid the disturbing of the old subgrade.

2. Concrete sidewalks, drive aprons, etc., shall be removed to the nearest joint,

provided the joint is more than 1 foot from the edge of any utility trench. Concrete curb and combination curb and gutter may be neatly saw-cut and a portion removed provided that the remaining section is 4 feet long or longer.

B. Disposition of Removed Materials

The materials removed in this operation shall be broken up and placed in the embankment or disposed of as excess or unsuitable material in accordance with the requirements of Section 02210.03.

02160.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. Within Limits of Excavation


B. Outside Limits of Excavation



A. Within Limits of Excavation


B. Outside Limits of Excavation



SECTION 02205

PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Location of Facilities.

B. Notification of Owners and Authorities.

C. Coordination and Preparation.

D. Protection of Facilities.

E. Relocation of Facilities.

F. Protection of Existing Facilities.

G. Restoration of Property Markers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. LOCATION OF FACILITIES

A. Prior to construction, verify location of existing underground facilities near or adjacent to Project.

1. Consult with Miss Utility and arrange for field stake-out or other markings to show locations.

2. Perform exploratory excavation at key junctures and other critical points to aid in ascertaining locations.

B. Report field stake-out findings and results of exploratory excavations to Engineer if possible changes to locations are required due to suspected interferences with existing facilities. Allow Engineer sufficient time to determine magnitude of changes and to formulate instructions in that regard.

C. If location of an existing underground facility is uncertain, apply careful excavation and probing techniques during construction to locate and avoid damage to same.

D. The existing record drawings show certain underground facilities at the Site. It is known that these drawings are not always representative of as-built conditions. As such, Contractor is responsible for performing exploratory excavations to aid in locating utilities or buried facilities at no additional cost to Owner.

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 02205-1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

3.02. NOTIFICATIONS OF OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES

A. Prior to construction, notify owners of existing facilities, including local Police and Fire Departments, of general scope, nature and planned progress of the Work.

B. Notify owners of nearby underground facilities when excavating is to take place in a particular area, allowing them reasonable time to institute precautionary procedures or preventive measures which they deem necessary for protection of their facilities.

C. When existing utilities, such as sewer, water, gas, telephone or electric power are damaged or disturbed during construction, immediately notify affected utility owner and Owner.

D. Notify Police and Fire Departments, including affected owners, immediately if hazardous conditions are created or have the potential for occurring as a result of damage to an existing facility or as a result of other activities at the Site. Hazardous conditions could be created from: fire, explosion, escape of gas, escape of fuel oil, gasoline or industrial fluids, downed electrical wires, and disrupted underground electrical cables.

3.03. COORDINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Discuss anticipated work schedule with local authorities and owners of utilities at preconstruction meetings, including procedures to be followed if one or more utilities are damaged or disrupted. Develop contingency plans to address Contractor’s role in repair of damaged utilities.

B. Make preparations beforehand to repair and restore damaged utilities, including arrangements for standby materials and equipment to be promptly assembled at the Site and utilized immediately.

C. Adjust work schedules and personnel assignments as necessary to conform with requirements of utility owner whose utility is to be temporarily interrupted during construction. Cooperate with utility owner in this regard to minimize the time of interruption.

D. Make preparations for and conform to applicable federal, state and local regulations regarding use of proper safeguards and procedures when excavation is to take place in close proximity to existing facilities and structures.

3.04. PROTECTION OF FACILITIES

A. Plan and conduct construction operations so that operation of existing facilities near or adjacent to the Work, including electric, telephone, sewer, water, gas or drainage utilities, are sustained insofar as the requirements of the Project will permit.

B. Protect existing facilities from damage or movement through installation of adequate support systems and use of proper equipment, including application of careful excavation and backfilling techniques in sensitive areas.

C. Existing utilities and other facilities that are damaged by the Contractor’s construction operations shall be promptly repaired by Contractor to the satisfaction of the affected owner or, if the affected owner so elects, that owner will perform the repairs with his own forces. Under either arrangement, such repair work shall be done at Contractor's expense.

D. When aboveground visible facilities such as poles, wires, cables, fences, signs or structures constitute an unavoidable interference, notify Engineer and consult with affected owner regarding temporary removal and later restoration of the interfering item. Arrange with that


owner to remove and later restore the interfering item to the satisfaction of the owner, subject to approval of the Project Owner; or, allow affected owner to perform such work with his own forces. Under either arrangement, such work shall be done at Contractor’s expense.

E. Take all necessary precautions to prevent fires at or adjacent to the Work, buildings, and other facilities. No burning of trash or debris is permitted. If permanent fire extinguishers are used, they shall be recharged and in “new” condition when turned over to Owner.

3.05. PROTECTION OF SEWERS AND STORM DRAINS

A. Where existing sanitary sewers or storm drain systems are being replaced or interrupted, provide temporary bypass pumping or piping to maintain flow around that segment of the Work such that no back-ups occur in existing systems.

B. Maintain existing manholes, catch basins, and other utility structures in their pre-work condition. Any material or debris entering same due to the Contractor’s operation shall be promptly removed.

3.06. PROTECTION OF WATER MAINS NEAR SEWERS

A. Where a minimum 10-foot horizontal separation or minimum 18-inch vertical separation (bottom of water pipe to top of sewer pipe) cannot be maintained between a water main and sewer line, one or more of the following remedies shall be incorporated in the work:

1. The sewer lines shall be encased in Mix “C” concrete for a length of 10 feet on either side of the water main.

2. Both the water main and sewer line shall be constructed of pressure type joints of ductile iron pipe, and shall be pressure tested to 100 psi to assure water tightness.

3. One full length of water main shall be centered over the sewer line, so that both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible.

4. Relocate water main to obtain 18-inches minimum vertical separation.

3.07. RESTORATION OF PROPERTY MARKERS

A. Property corner markers, boundary monuments, etc., disturbed or moved by the Contractor’s operation shall be restored, in conformance with the property deed description, by a licensed land surveyor. Restoration of the property corner markers or boundary monuments shall be certified by said surveyor on a map prepared by him which shows the work accomplished. One copy of the map shall be given to the property owner and one copy given to the Project Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02210

GENERAL EXCAVATION

02210.01 GENERAL

A. Description

1. General excavation shall include but not necessarily be limited to, excavation

and grading for general sitework, roadways, and rights-of-way to the lines and grades shown on the Plans, and in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. In addition to the requirements contained herein, all grading operations shall

be conducted in compliance with the Charles County "Grading Ordinance".

3. Excess materials removed in any excavation shall be removed from the project site and deposited in approved disposal sites.

4. Excavation Classifications

Work done under the above operations shall be designated as Class 1 Excavation, Class 1-A Excavation, or Class 2 Excavation. Note that as subsequently described the width, type, and position of the work shall determine the classification, i.e., whether Class 1, Class 1-A, or Class 2.

a. Class 1 - All excavation where the width of the bottom of the cut is 15

feet or more.

b. Class 1-a - All excavat ion of unsu i tab le mater ia l below the lowest excavation limits established.

c. Class 2 - All excavation where the width of the bottom of cut is less than 15 feet. Excavation for flumes, ditches, and stream and channel changes are included in this classification unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.

5. Excavation Items

General excavation shall include the following: a. Cut areas within the boundary faces of the typical cross section(s) shown

on the Plans, including ditches within the cut sections, and excavations for entrances, approach roads, streets, intersections, gutters, ditches, berm ditches, and flumes;

b. Cut areas within the limits of construction as shown by proposed contours

on the Plans;

c. Topsoil to be salvaged within the limits of the work in accordance with the provisions of Section 02811;

SPECIFICATIONS – MAY 1996

GENERAL EXCAVATION 02210-2

d. The removal and disposal of existing surfacing, sidewalks, curb, or curb and gutter, etc., in accordance with the provisions of Section 02160 when within the limits of construction;

e. The removal and disposal of all foundation walls, basement, or ground level

floors as well as timber, rubble, masonry, or pipe structures within the limits of construction and not otherwise provided for in the Proposal; refer to Section 02180.

If in the opinion of the County Engineer excavation is needed, removal shall be made of slides, material, breakages, and cave-ins. When slides or washouts occur in either cut or fill, the damage shall be repaired by the Contractor.

Excavation for streams and channel changes shall be done except where the excavations would be covered under Section 02230. The Plans and "Special Provisions" will indicate when this occurs.

When additional excavation is ordered by the County Engineer, rock, muck, root mat, and other unsuitable material shall be removed below the lowest normal limit of excavation shown on the Plans or below the natural ground line under embankments.

All suitable materials removed in excavation shall be used in embankments in accordance with the provisions of Section 02260 except that topsoil may be required to be salvaged and stored as specified.



2. Subsurface Investigation; Section 02011.

3. Clearing and grubbing; Section 02110.

4. Removal or abandonment of existing utilities and underground structures;

Section 02150.

5. Removal of existing pavement, sidewalk, curb, and combination curb and gutter; Section 02160.

6. Borrow excavation; Section 02240.

7. Salvaged topsoil; Section 02811.


All materials within the limits of construction that are to be incorporated in the work will be subject to test by the County Engineer to determine their suitability for portions of the work in which the materials are to be placed. The tests may determine organic content, mechanical properties, bearing capacity, density, stability, or any other properties pertinent to satisfactory performance of the work proposed.

D. Submittals



The Developer, for Developer Projects, shall submit copies of all permits, results of subsurface investigations, and the results of all compaction tests to the County.

02210.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials Furnished by the County



Not applicable.


1. Embankment Material

Material for embankments shall meet the requirements of Section 02260.02.

2. Use of Excavated Material

All suitable material removed from the excavation shall be used as far as practicable in the formation of embankment, subgrade shoulders, slopes, backfill for structures, and at such other places as directed by the County Engineer. No excavated material shall be wasted or otherwise removed from the project site without permission of the County Engineer. Borrow shall not be used until provisions have been made for utilizing in embankments all available suitable excavated material.

3. Broken Pavement Material

Old pavement materials from roadway excavation shall be broken and placed in embankments in accordance with the provisions of Section 02260.02, or disposed of as excess or unsuitable material as previously specified.

4. Frozen Material

Material which is otherwise acceptable but is excavated when frozen shall not be placed in embankments. It shall be stockpiled outside of construction limits and reserved for future use at a time when its condition is satisfactory for incorporation in embankment as determined by the County Engineer. The cost of rehandling the excavation by this method shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Any such material which is wasted shall be replaced by the Contractor with other acceptable material at no expense to the County.

02210.03 EXECUTION

A. General

The site or roadway shall be cut accurately to cross section and grade as shown on the Plans. No excavation from a ditch or channel change shall be deposited or left within 3 feet of the edge of the ditch or channel or be permitted to obstruct normal surface drainage to the ditch or channel. The Contractor shall maintain and keep ditches and gutters open and free from leaves and other debris until final acceptance of the work. Excavation for these appurtenances will only be measured once.



B. Drainage

1. During construction, the grading operations shall be performed in a manner such

that the excavation will be well drained at all times. When necessary, excavations shall be drained to sumps which shall be pumped continuously, if required, to an approved sediment control device. The Contractor shall maintain and keep all ditches open and free from soil and debris while in service or until final acceptance of the work, and all grading shall be done on neat, regular lines conforming to the sections and contours shown on the Plans. All work shall be done in proper sequence with all other associated operations. Before any slab or surfacing is placed, all drainage facilities shall be installed which are required to permit free and uninterrupted flow of the surface and underground water from the site or to pumping sumps, etc.

2. During roadway construction, the roadbed shall be maintained in a well drained

condition at all times. Side and berm ditches or gutters draining from cuts to embankments or otherwise shall be so constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by erosion. All drainage necessary to provide free and uninterrupted flow of the surface and underground water shall be installed before surfacing is placed. When stabilized, side and outlet ditches provide the principal means for drainage, the cutting and stabilization of such ditches for the disposition of surface water shall be the first step in the grading operation.

C. Slopes

1. Earth Slopes

All earth slopes shall be finished in accordance with the contours, elevations, or to the lines on the typical section. The work shall be done in proper sequence with other operations involved.

2. Serrated Slopes

Serrated cut slopes are defined as slopes having continuously benched faces. Slopes which are to be serrated will be shown on the Plans or so designated by the County Engineer. The width of the benches will be designated by the County Engineer. The ratio of bench width to bench height shall be the same as the slope ratio of the slope being excavated. The benches shall be constructed parallel to each other, and they shall be level, not graded to drain. The benches shall be cut during the excavation of the slope face. They shall be placed so that the normal slope line will bisect both the horizontal and vertical face of each bench. The horizontal face of each bench shall intercept the vertical face of the bench below.

3. Temporary Slope Construction

Slopes excavated or constructed for the convenience of the Contractor, such as for haul roads or temporary drainage, shall meet the design slope shown on the cross sections for that area. Exceptions will require approval of the County Engineer prior to construction of the slope.

Berm ditches, when required, shall be constructed before or at the time cuts are started.



D. Excavation Beyond Specified Limits

RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE E. Unsuitable Material

1. Class 1-A Excavation

Unstable or other unsuitable material encountered at or below the lowest normal excavation limit or the subgrade for embankments as shown on the Plans for cuts and fills, which in the judgment of the County Engineer should be removed, shall be removed to the extent directed by the County Engineer. Removal shall be classified as Class 1-A Excavation.

2. Removal of Unsuitable Material and Backfilling

All spaces created by the removal of unsuitable material shall be backfilled to the lines and grades indicated. Backfill material shall be as specified in the "Special Provisions," and the construction methods shall meet the applicable requirements of Section 02260.03.

The contractor shall utilize or dispose of unsuitable material. It shall be the contractors responsibility to obtain any and all necessary approvals or permits to dispose of such unsuitable material on site or off site.

F. Widening Existing Pavement

In the case of excavation for base and/or surface widening, no more area shall be opened than can be paved the following day.

Where it is necessary to maintain traffic adjacent to a trench opened for widening, the Contractor shall provide signs, barricades, lights, flaggers, etc., in accordance with Sections GP-7.06, GP-7.07, and the Division 1 Specifications. The existing road surfaces shall at all times be kept clean.


A. General


B. Excavation Classification


C. Measurement


D. Recomputation of Quantities





A. General


B. General Excavation



SECTION 02240

BORROW EXCAVATION


Borrow excavation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing, excavating, hauling, and depositing of approved materials for embankments and backfills as directed, when sufficient quantities of suitable materials are not available from other onsite excavations, and shall include all work prescribed for backfills, embankments, subgrade and earth shoulders in accordance with the Contract Documents.




3. Trench excavation, backfill, and compaction; Section 02250.

4. Embankment; Section 02260.

5. Turf establishment; Section 02820.


All borrow materials will be subject to test by the County Engineer to determine compliance with these Specifications. When specific materials tests are called for in the referenced standards and specifications, the County Engineer will have the option of requiring that any or all of these tests be performed for materials furnished for a specific project.

D. Submittals

1. Materials Tests

Materials test results shall be submitted for all materials furnished from other than a licensed commercial operating supplier. The tests shall demonstrate that the material meets all the requirements specified herein.

2. Certificates of Compliance

Certificates of compliance shall be submitted in accordance with the "General Provisions" for materials furnished from a licensed commercial operating supplier.

SPECIFICATIONS -MAY 1996

BORROW EXCAVATION 02240-2

The certificate shall state that the material meets the requirements specified herein. 02240.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any borrow material.


The Contractor may furnish borrow material by one of the following methods:

1. Acquire material from a licensed commercial operating supplier;

2. Make application to the Department of Natural Resources under the Maryland

Annotated Code, Article 7, Subtitle 6A, entitled "Surface Mining";

3. Make application to the County to operate under the standard adopted in accordance with the Maryland Annotated Code, Article 7, Subtitle 6A31, entitled "Exemptions" and approved by the Maryland Department of Natural Resources.

A Contractor who elects the use of Option 3 above must submit an application to the County. An exemption under Option 3 will require approval of a reclamation and excavating plan along with the drainage patterns and methods of attaining satisfactory drainage and soil conservation as the work progresses. The plan shall also provide for surface restoration suitable for the proposed subsequent land use after reclamation is completed and the proposed method of accomplishment. Additional information may be deemed necessary which the applicant shall furnish upon request.

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any other state or local permits which may be required in connection with furnishing borrow material.


1. Type 1 Borrow Excavation shall be in accordance with all the requirements of

Section 02260.02.

2. Type II Borrow Excavation shall comply with AASHTO M 145, groups A-3, A-2, A-2- 4 or A-2-6. A-3 material shall only be used when the backfill can be contained. (e.g. trench backfill).

3. Type III Borrow Excavation shall be a material which has a minimum 25% retained

on the No. 10 sieve and a maximum 10% passing the #200 sieve, a liquid limit determined by AASHTO T 89 no greater than 30 and a plasticity index determined by AASHTO T 90 not greater than 9. The maximum dry density shall not be less than 115 pounds per cubic foot.

02240.03 EXECUTION

A. General

Borrow material shall not be used until provisions have been made for utilization of all



available suitable material meeting the requirements specified herein obtained from on-site excavations.

B. Borrow Pits

1. Clearing and Grubbing

Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 02110.03.

2. Overburden Material

Unsuitable materials and overburden, meeting the requirements of Section 02813.02, shall be disposed of and shall be placed, trimmed, shaped, or sloped as directed by the County Engineer.

3. Approved Materials

Approved materials provided under this item shall be incorporated in the work in accordance with the requirements of Sections 02250.03, 02260.03, and 02280.03 for the completion of embankment, backfill, sub-grade, and earth shoulders.

C. Borrow Excavation Beyond Specified Limits

If, after the Contractor has substantially completed the excavations on site, the County Engineer directs the Contractor to excavate beyond the limits of the Project as originally proposed, then all material removed beyond the limits of the typical cross section, or as indicated by contours or elevations, shall be classified as borrow excavation.

D. Blending Materials

The Contractor will be permitted to mix or blend two or more appropriate materials so as to produce a finished in-place product meeting the specified physical characteristics.

E. Compaction of Borrow Excavation Material



Compaction requirements and the method of determining densities for the above types of borrow excavation shall be in accordance with Sections 02260.01 and 02260.03.


A. Original Position Method


B. Contingent Borrow


C. Delivery Ticket Method


D. In-Place Method for Utility Trench Backfill



A. General


B. Borrow



SECTION 02245

SELECTED BACKFILL


Selected backfill shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing and placing satisfactory foundation bedding and backfill materials for box culverts, pipes, pipe endwalls, retaining walls, inlets, manholes, steps, concrete gutters, and other structures in accordance with the Contract Documents.





All selected backfill material will be subject to test by the County Engineer to determine the material's compliance with these Specifications.

D. Submittals

Certificates of compliance shall be submitted in accordance with the "General Provisions" for all selected backfill material furnished. The certificate shall state that the material meets the requirements specified herein.

02245.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any selected backfill material.


The Contractor may furnish either stone or slag meeting the material and gradation requirements specified herein, unless otherwise noted and subject to the restrictions indicated in Paragraph 02245.02.C.

C. Restrictions

0nly Type II Borrow as specified in Section 02240.02 or ASTM D 2940 designation GA S/B and Maryland designation BRG S/B materials as specified in Section 02621.02 shall be


SELECTED BACKFILL 02245-2

placed within 1.5 feet of the exterior wall of polyethylene or poly-vinyl chloride pipes. D. Detailed Material Requirements

Material for selected backfill shall meet the requirements of Maryland designation BRG S/B, ASTM D 2940 designation GA S/B, or AASHT0 M 43, size number 57 as specified in Section 02621.02, except as limited in Paragraph 02245.02.B.2 for PVC pipe.

02245.03 EXECUTION

When portions of foundations are lower than the planned bottom of the structure, the bottom shall, if called for by the Contract Documents or directed by the County Engineer, be raised by the placement of selected backfill material. It may be placed with mechanical equipment or manually, depending upon the volume of material involved.

If areas of the foundation are soft, composed of mud, or are in the County Engineer's judgment unfit to receive the pipe, conduit, structure, concrete, or masonry, then such unacceptable material shall be removed and replaced with selected backfill material. No separate measurement or payment of selected backfill will be provided under these conditions.

The County Engineer will be the sole judge as to the use of selected backfill for foundation stabilization.


RESERVED F0R FUTURE USE


A. General


B. Selected Backfill



SECTION 02250

TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION


Trench excavation, backfill, and compaction shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the excavation, backfill, and compaction of trenches for storm drains, water mains, sanitary sewers, and other underground utility systems shown on the Plans, and restoration in accordance with the Contract Documents.




3. Test pits; Section 02012.


5. Adjusting existing utilities to finished grade; Section 02140.

6. Removal or abandonment of existing utilities and underground structures; Section

02150.

7. Removal of existing pavement, sidewalk, curb, and combination curb and gutter; Section 02160.

8. Tamped fill; Section 02265.

9. Excavation support; Section 02400.


11. Patching pavement; Section 02680.

12. Salvaged topsoil; Section 02811.

13. Field Test Reports, GP- 6.11.


1. Materials

All materials removed from trench excavations and used for backfill will be subject to test by a Geotechnical Engineer obtained by the Contractor to determine the material's suitability for use as backfill. The material may be tested to determine organic content, mechanical properties, density, or any other properties pertinent

TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION 02250-2

to the satisfactory completion of trench backfilling.

2. Soil Laboratory and Field Density Tests

a. The Contractor shall retain a Geotechnical Engineer, a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Maryland for all soil laboratory and field density testing for the Project. The Geotechnical Engineer, with the concurrence of the County Engineer, shall determine the number of samples to be taken, the location of samples, and the frequency of tests required to confirm compliance with the Specifications. The Contractor shall assist the Geotechnical Engineer in obtaining samples and shall provide a smooth surface for conducting field density tests. The Contractor will not be entitled to any claim for additional compensation due to the testing requirements specified herein.

b. At the start of the trenching operation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to

the Geotechnical Engineer, with the concurrence of the County Engineer, that the compaction density specified in Section 02250.03 can be attained by the compaction equipment and methods the Contractor intends to use. Once the method and equipment has been approved, no substitutions will be permitted without written approval from the County Engineer. Additional demonstration of the suitability of the compaction equipment and methods will be required whenever there is a change in trench conditions.

c. Should testing determine that the required density is not being met, or the

material is outside the specified moisture range, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation, reexcavate, rework, and/or recompact the particular layer or section until the required density and/or moisture is attained.

D. Submittals

The Contractor shall submit for approval a list of compaction equipment the Contractor intends to use on the project, the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer as to the maximum lift thickness which can be placed, and the method of compaction to be used with this equipment to achieve the required compaction. No additional compensation and/or extensions of Contract Time will be provided based on the approved maximum lift thickness for backfill.

02250.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for trench backfill other than those materials which are available from the trench excavation limits as shown on the Standard Details.


Not applicable.




1. Use and Ownership of Excavated Material

a. All suitable material excavated from utility trenches shall be used, as far as

practicable, for backfill in trenches.

b. When specifically noted in the contract documents, the Contractor shall properly store, stockpile and protect all materials that are to be reused in the work. The Contractor shall replace, at the Contractor's own expense, material that was suitable when excavated, which has subsequently become unsuitable because of careless, neglectful, wasteful, or unprotected storage. All unsuitable and surplus suitable material, as determined by the County Engineer, shall be removed from the excavation and disposed of off-site by and at the expense of the Contractor.

2. Borrow

Borrow material for trench backfill shall meet the requirements of Section 02240.02.

3. Selected Backfill

Selected backfill for pipe foundation and bedding shall meet the requirements of Section 02245.02.

4. Graded Aggregate Subbase

Graded aggregate subbase for trench backfill shall meet the gradation requirements specified in Section 02621.02.

5. Bituminous Concrete

Bituminous concrete for temporary surfacing material shall meet the requirements specified in Section 02641.02.

02250.03 EXECUTION

A. Surface Preparation

1. Clearing and Grubbing

a. The Contractor shall clear and grub the surface over the line of the trench

in accordance with the requirements of Section 02110.03.

b. To protect against accidental clogging, sanitary sewer channels in existing manholes shall be covered, as directed by the County or Geotechnical Engineer, with the concurrence of the County Engineer, prior to any grubbing or grading operations.

2. Removing Pavement, Sidewalk, Curb, etc.

a. The Contractor shall remove pavement, sidewalk, curb, etc. over the line

of the trench in accordance with the requirements of Section 02160.03.



b. The Contractor shall remove paving only to the width shown on the Standard

Details, noted in the Special Provisions, or as directed by the County or Geotechnical Engineer, with the concurrence of the County Engineer,. When the Contractor removes paving for a greater width than is deemed necessary or disturbs paving, sidewalk, curbs, etc. due to settlement, slides, or cave-ins, or in making excavation outside the limits of the trench without written order of the County or Geotechnical Engineer, the County will require the Contractor to replace the excess damaged area. The Contractor shall be responsible for repaving or surfacing roadbeds or sidewalk, curbs, etc. that have failed, settled, or have been damaged at any time before expiration of the Contract maintenance period due to work or any other activities by the Contractor, the Contractor's subcontractors, or suppliers.

3. Removing Street Signs, Fences, Shrubs, Trees, and Other

Improvements

a. The Contractor shall remove improvements from the working strip in accordance with the requirements of Section 02130.03.

b. In addition to the requirements contained in Sections GP-7.15 and GP-7.17

the following shall apply:

1) Existing fences shall be carefully removed to the extent required to permit construction operations and as directed by the County Engineer. The Contractor shall safely store all elements during the time that they are down.

2) Shrubs, hedges, and trees shall be transplanted with sufficient

earth to insure that no damage to the root system occurs. General reference is made to Section 02860.03 for acceptable planting methods. After transplanting has been accomplished, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to water all plants. The transplanting of trees will only be required when indicated on the Plans.

4. Maintaining Traffic

The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment, and materials specified in the Division 1 Specifications for the maintenance of traffic during construction.

B. Trench Excavation

1. General

a. Excavation for the installation of utilities shall be unclassified and shall

consist of the excavation of all material encountered to the lines, grades, and sections shown on the Plans and/or the Standard Details, as specified, or as directed by the County Engineer.

b. Trenches may be excavated and backfilled either by hand or by machinery

as the Contractor may elect. The Contractor shall have no claims, nor will



extra compensation be allowed, for hand excavation or backfill which may be required by these Specifications or by the County Engineer for protection of existing utilities or structures.

c. Ground profiles shown on the Plans represent the elevations along the

centerline of the street for all work in streets and along the centerline of the trench for work not in streets.

2. Protection of Property and Structures

The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's own expense, sustain in place and protect from direct or indirect injury all existing facilities in the vicinity of the excavation, whether above or below the ground, or that may appear in the trench. The Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of protective measures associated with the presence or proximity of pipes, poles, tracks, walls, buildings, property markers, and other structures and property of every kind and description in or over the Contractor's trenches or in the vicinity of the Contractor's work whether above or below the surface of the ground. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage and assume all expense for direct or indirect injury caused by the Contractor's work, to above ground facilities or below ground facilities shown on the Plans.

3. Utility Adjustments

a. All adjustments to utilities other than those owned by the County, shall be

performed by the utility owner.

b. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to perform all adjustments to existing water/sewer utilities at their expense. Adjustments to water services between the property line and the water main shall be performed by qualified Utility Contractors. Adjustments between the property line and the house shall be performed under the supervision of a Registered Master Plumber.

c. Adjustments to sanitary sewers within the County right-of-way may be accomplished by either a qualified Utility Contractor or registered Master Plumber. Adjustments to sanitary sewers outside the County right-of-way shall be performed under the supervision of a Registered Master Plumber.

d. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to obtain all permits necessary for

the performance of this work, along with obtaining all County approvals.

4. Obstructions Shown on Plans

a. Certain information regarding the reputed presence, size, character, and location of existing underground utilities and structures has been shown on the Plans based upon available records. There is no certainty of the accuracy of this information, and it shall be considered by the Contractor in this light. If test pit data is not shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall excavate test pits in advance of the Contractor's work in accordance with Section 02012 to locate existing utilities. The Contractor shall hereby distinctly understand that the County is not responsible for the correctness



or sufficiency of the information given. The Contractor shall have no claim for delay or extra compensation on account of incorrectness of information given, or on account of the insufficiency or absence of information regarding obstructions. The Contractor shall have no claim for relief from any obligation or responsibility under the Contract in case the location, size, or character of any underground facility is encountered that is not shown on the Plans.

b. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify "MISS UTILITIES," all

municipal utilities, all pipe line owners, and any other parties affected prior to the beginning of work.

5. Removing Obstruction

a. Should the position of any pipe, conduit, or other structure above or below

ground be such as, in the opinion of the County Engineer, to require its removal, realignment, or change due to the work to be done under the Contract, the work of removal, realignment, or change will be done as extra work, or will be done by the owner of the obstructions without cost to the Contractor; but the Contractor shall uncover and support the structures in the limits of the Contractor's trench at the Contractor's own expense before such removal, and before and after such realignment or change. Whether the obstruction is shown on the Plans or not, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for damage or extra compensation on account of the presence of said structure or on account of any delay in the removal or rearrangement of the same.

b. The Contractor shall break through and reconstruct if necessary, the invert

or arch of any sewer, culvert, or conduit that may be encountered if said structure is in such position in the judgment of the County Engineer as not to require its removal, realignment, or complete reconstruction. The reconstruction shall not interfere with the flow through the conduit.

c. In the event that obstructions would delay the work of pipe installation, the

Contractor will be permitted to leave a gap in the work and return to fill the gap after the obstructions have been removed. The installation shall be completed by laying full pipe lengths and appropriate closure pieces.

d. The Contractor shall not interfere with any persons, firms, or corporations

or with the County in protecting, removing, changing, or replacing pipes, conduits, poles, or other structures.

e. In the event that the County has entered into any agreement with an

affected utility owner or owners which will have an effect on operations or financial responsibilities of the Contractor, the requirements of these agreements will be included in the Special Provisions of the Contract.

6. Change of Trench Location


7. Width and Depth Trenches



a. Trenches shall be excavated to the necessary width and depth as may be

shown on the Plans or Standard Details, as specified in the Special Provisions, or as directed. The trench subgrade shall be such as to provide a uniform and continuous bearing and support for the pipe on solid undisturbed earth for the full length of each pipe, except for that portion at the bell hole. Any part of the bottom of the trench excavated below subgrade shall be backfilled with approved material, thoroughly compacted.

b. Subgrade, in the case of pipe lines, shall be the underside of the barrel of

the pipe, where the pipe is laid on a natural foundation, or the bottom of granular bedding or concrete foundation, where indicated on the Plans or Standard Details, and the underside of ribs or sills where the pipe is installed on a timber foundation. For appurtenant concrete or masonry structures, subgrade shall be termed the underside of the masonry, or gravel base, or fill material as shown on the Plans or Standard Details.

c. Trench sides shall be vertical to a distance of at least 1 foot above the top

of the pipe. Above this point, the remainder of the trench shall be practically plumb when located in paved roadway rights-of-way. In easement areas, the side of the trench from 1 foot above the top of the pipe to the existing ground surface may be sloped or cut-back, subject to the approval of the County Engineer.

d. Bell holes shall be excavated in the bottom of the trench whenever

necessary to permit the proper making of joints.

e. When a pipe, structural plate pipe, or pipe arch is to be installed on existing ground on or under fill, the embankment shall be constructed to a height of at least 9 inches above but not more than 3 feet above the top of pipe and then a trench excavated to receive the pipe.

f. Excavations for concrete encased electric duct banks shall be sufficiently

wide to allow placement of ducts and spacers and to allow placement offorms for the concrete encasement on the sides of the duct banks, if required by site conditions.

g. Where sheeting or trench boxes are used, the maximum width below the top

of the pipe, as prescribed above, shall be measured between the interior faces of the sheeting as driven, or inside face of trench box, but in no case shall stringers or nailing strips be so placed as to interfere with the proper ramming of earth under and around the pipe. In case the sheeting, or trench box does not extend below a point 6 inches above the pipe as installed, the maximum width allowed shall be measured between the faces of the excavation below the bottom of the sheeting or box.

8. Length of Open Trench

The Contractor shall not excavate more trench in any day than can be completed (facility installed and trench backfilled) in the same day, unless by written permission of the County Engineer. The County Engineer shall be empowered at any time to require the backfilling of open trenches over completed pipe lines if,



in the County Engineer's judgment, such action is necessary; and the Contractor shall thereby have no claim for extra compensation, even though to accomplish said backfilling, the Contractor is compelled temporarily to stop excavation or other work at any place.

If work is stopped on any trench for any reason except by order of the County Engineer, and the excavation is left open for 48 hours in advance of construction, the Contractor shall, if so directed, backfill such trench at the Contractor's own cost, and shall not again open said trench until the Contractor is ready to complete the structure therein. If the Contractor shall refuse or fail to backfill such trench completely within 48 hours after said notice, the County Engineer is authorized to have the trench backfilled; and the County will charge the expense thereof to the Contractor and retain the same of any monies due or to become due to the Contractor under the Contract.

The excavation of all trenches shall be fully completed at least one full pipe length in advance of pipe installation, unless otherwise authorized.

9. Responsibility for Condition of Excavation

The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all excavations made by the Contractor. All slides and caves shall be removed without extra compensation.

10. Trench Support

a. The Contractor shall support the sides and ends of all excavations wherever

necessary with braces, sheeting, shoring or stringers, trench boxes, or other acceptable excavation support systems. All timbering shall be installed by men skilled in such work and shall be so arranged that it may be withdrawn as backfilling proceeds, without injury to the utility or structure constructed or to any roadbed or adjacent structure or property.

b. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest OSHA

requirements.

c. All timbering in excavations, trench boxes, or excavation support systems shall be withdrawn as the backfilling is being done, except where and to such extent as the County Engineer shall order in writing that said timbering or excavation support system be left in place or where the County Engineer permits the trench support to be left in place at the Contractor's expense and upon the Contractor's request. The Contractor shall cut off any sheeting left in place 2 feet below finished grade and shall remove the material cut off without compensation therefore.

d. Wherever necessary, in running sand, or soft ground, or for the protection

of any structure or property, sheeting shall be driven without extra compensation to such a depth below the bottom of the trench as may be required or directed.

e. The support of the trench shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

11. Drainage and Dewatering



a. The Contractor shall grade the site as necessary to prevent surface water

from flowing into the trench or other utility excavations and shall provide all necessary temporary surface drainage and keep the same operating to the satisfaction of the County Engineer until permanent drainage or finished grading and permanent surface stabilization has been completed. Damming or ponding of water in gutters or storm drains will not be permitted.

b. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to adequately control water that

may be present in the excavation. The Contractor shall provide for the disposal of water removed from excavations in such a manner not to cause damage to public or private property or to any portion of the work completed or in progress or cause any impediment to the use of any area by the public; nor shall the Contractor discharge any flushing or ground water or any material of any nature into existing sanitary sewer system during the construction of the facilities. All water shall be discharged through an approved sediment control device. The costs of dewatering trench excavations will not be paid for directly, but will be included in the total base bid price.

12. Tunneling and Jacking

a. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut, except that

short sections of a trench may be tunneled, or the pipeline jacked, if, in the opinion of the County Engineer, the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and properly installed.

b. In addition to the requirements contained in Section 02920.03, the following

shall apply:

Tunnels for installing pipelines or other utilities shall be of sufficient size to allow, at all points, the proper joining of pipes and the proper compacting of the refill around them. Tunnels shall be timbered or lined where and to such extent as may be necessary to support the tunnel in accordance with accepted methods. All methods of tunneling used shall be subject to the approval of the County Engineer, however, the safety of the tunnel construction and the protection, repair, or replacement of the tunneled obstruction shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

c. Jacking or boring pipe shall be in accordance with the requirements of

Section 02910.03.

d. No extra payment beyond that made for trench excavation and backfill will be made for tunnels or jacking pipe under trees, sidewalks, curbs, pipelines, or similar obstructions.

C. Foundation Preparation

1. General

The Contractor shall complete the excavation as far as practicable to the neat lines



shown on the Standard Details or Plans or as directed by the County Engineer.

2. Excavation Below Subgrade

a. The Contractor shall, without additional compensation, before any pipe or appurtenance is installed, fill all unauthorized depressions or irregularities in the bottom of the trench or tunnel with firmly compacted embankment or other approved material.

b. Where the bottom of the trench, at subgrade, is in unstable or unsuitable

material, excavation shall be carried to such depth as recommended by the County Engineer. The trench bottom shall be restored to subgrade with Selected Backfill.

D. Class 3A Excavation

Class 3A Excavation shall include removal of unsuitable material when encountered at or below trench subgrade. It shall also include increases or decreases in the limits or amounts of excavation resulting from changes in pipe grade or location as previously described.

E. Backfill, Compaction, and Maintenance of Backfilled Trench

1. Backfill

a. The Contractor shall backfill all trenches as rapidly as practicable after the

installation of the utility therein, or after the excavation has served its purpose.

b. Backfill material around and over pipelines for a distance of 2 feet above

the top of pipe shall consist of clean unfrozen earth, free of ash, putrescible refuse, large stones, or other material of an unsatisfactory character as may be determined by the County Engineer. Backfilling shall commence by depositing and then compacting by hand operated mechanical tampers suitable material in layers not more than 6 inches thick, measured loose, under, around, and over the pipe to a point not less than 1 foot in depth over the top thereof.

c. The remainder of the trench may be backfilled in layers not exceeding the

maximum limits determined by equipment and methods demonstrated in compliance with Paragraph 02250.01.C.2. However, if the demonstration lift thickness is followed and the specified compaction is not obtained based on the County or Geotechnical Engineer's testing during backfilling, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's own expense, remove, replace, and retest as many times as is required to obtain the specified compactions. In backfilling the remainder of the trench, stones of not more than 6 inches in largest dimension which have been taken out in excavating may be mixed with earth in an amount not exceeding 25% of the backfill volume. Stones of larger size or in greater quantities shall not be used, unless directed by the County Engineer. The Contractor shall not permit excavations to be used for the disposal of refuse.



d. In paved areas, the Contractor shall furnish and backfill the top foot of trench below the pavement base course with graded aggregate subbase.

e. Backfill over arches and pipe arches shall be placed uniformly on both sides

of the arch so as to load the arch uniformly and symmetrically. For structures without headwalls, backfill shall be commenced in the center of the structure. If the structure includes headwalls or spandrel walls, backfilling operation may commence at one wall and extend toward the opposite side, care being taken in all cases to bring embankment or sections thereof up evenly on each side to a height of not less than 18 inches above top of structural plate pipe structures.

f. The Contractor, without extra compensation, shall take whatever special

precautions are necessary in the placing and tamping of backfill around the sides of non-rigid pipe to insure that allowable deflections will not be exceeded.

g. Should additional material be required for backfilling in excess of that

obtained from excavation, the Contractor shall obtain Borrow material from off-site sources, to complete the trench backfill. Borrow material for this purpose shall be included in the total base bid price.

2. Compaction

a. The Contractor shall, in unimproved areas outside the public rights-of-way,

compact each trench backfill layer in such a manner as to obtain a dense backfill free of voids and not susceptible to undue settlement or depression. Trench backfill extending to not less than I foot in depth above the top of pipe shall be compacted to at least 92% of maximum density at a moisture content within 3% of the optimum in accordance with AASHTO T 180.

b. Trench backfill within all public rights-of-way and improved, or paved

areas shall be compacted to at least 92% of maximum density at a moisture content within 2% of the optimum moisture in accordance with AASHTO T 180. The final 1 foot of trench backfill to pavement subgrade shall be compacted to at least 97% of maximum density at a moisture content within 2% of the optimum in accordance with AASHTO T-180.

c. The County Engineer will arrange for compaction density testing as

specified in Section 02250.01.

d. In-place soil density tests shall be performed horizontally every 150 linear feet, or fraction thereof, and vertically every other 8 inch lift with the compacted thickness not to exceed 16 inches.

e. Trench backfill for water and sewer laterals shall be tested for in-place soil

density with a minimum of one density test per each lateral. Backfill around manholes, valves, or other structures shall be tested for in-place soil density with a minimum of one test every 3 vertical feet. The test locations for manholes shall be within 3 feet of the structure. For water and sewer valve clusters, the tests shall be conducted in the center of the cluster.



3. Maintenance of Backfilled Trench

a. The Contractor shall maintain, at the Contractor's own expense, all backfilled trenches in acceptable condition.

b. If the Contractor fails to fill depressions in the backfilled trench within 24

hours after the receipt of written notice from the County Engineer, the County Engineer may refill said depressions and the cost thereof shall be retained from any monies due the Contractor, under the Contract. In case of emergency, the County Engineer may refill any dangerous depression or protect with lights wherever necessary without giving previous notice to the Contractor; and the cost of so doing shall be retained from any monies due or to become due the Contractor under the Contract.

c. The contractor shall be responsible for any injury or damage that may result

from lack of maintenance of any refilled excavation at any time prior to acceptance of the Project.

d. The Contractor shall furnish the County Engineer with names, addresses,

and telephone numbers of at least 2 members of the Contractor's organization that may be contacted in an emergency.

F. Restoration

1. General

After the completion of backfilling, all materials not used therein shall be removed and disposed of in such a manner and at such point or points as shall be approved or directed by the County Engineer; and all roads, sidewalks, and other places on the line of the work shall be left free of debris, clean, and in good order. Said cleaning-up shall be done by the Contractor without extra compensation; and if the Contractor shall fail to do such work within 1 week after receipt of notice, the County Engineer may arrange to have the cleaning-up done by others; and the cost shall be retained out of the monies due or to become due to the Contractor under the Contract.

2. Paved Areas

a. Immediately upon completion of the trench backfill and compaction as

previously specified, the Contractor shall temporarily fill the trench to within 2 inches of finished grade with graded aggregate subbase. The remaining 2 inches of trench shall be filled with a temporary surfacing material in accordance with Sections 02621 and 02641. Temporary surfacing material shall be either graded aggregate subbase or bituminous concrete as specified by the County Engineer.

b. For graded aggregate subbase temporary surfacing, weather permitting, the

Contractor shall remove and dispose of the temporary surfacing materials, cut-back the edge of the existing pavement as shown on the Standard Details, and patch-pave the area as specified in Section 02680.03 within 30 calendar days after the backfilling and compacting the trench.



3. Concrete Improvements

Sidewalks, curbs, combination curb and gutter, driveway aprons, and other concrete improvements removed or damaged by the Contractors activities shall be replaced by the Contractor in accordance with Sections 02651.03, 02660.03, 02670.03, or as directed by the County Engineer.

4. Non-paved Areas

a. Immediately upon completion of the trench backfill and compaction as

previously specified, the Contractor shall temporarily stabilize the area in accordance with the requirements of Section 01500.

b. Weather permitting, within 14 days after the completion of trench backfill

and compaction, the Contractor shall permanently stabilize the area with seeding and mulching or sodding, as appropriate, as specified in Sections 02812.03 through 02850.03.

5. Street Signs, Fences, Shrubs, Trees, and Other Improvements

In addition to the requirements contained in Section GP-7.15, the following shall apply:

a. Existing street signs and traffic control devices stored or relocated by the

Contractor shall be reset by the Contractor after construction in the area is complete and the work accepted by the County Engineer.

b. Fences shall be re-erected by the Contractor at locations designated by the

County Engineer. Materials not capable of being reerected through no fault of the Contractor shall be replaced on a force account basis as provided for the "General Provisions" for materials only.


A. Trench Excavation


B. Class 3A Excavation



A. General


B. Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction




SECTION 02260

EMBANKMENT


1. Embankment shall be formed of suitable material obtained from General, Structure,

Borrow, Trench, and other excavations included in the Project, and it shall be placed, processed and compacted to the lines and grades shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. In addition to the requirements contained herein, all embankment construction shall

be in compliance with the latest version of the Charles County "Grading Ordinance". B. Related Work Included Elsewhere

1. Protection of the Environment; Section 01500.

2. General Excavation; Section 02210. 3. Borrow Excavation; Section 02240.

4. Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction; Section 02250.

5. Tamped Fill; Section 02265.


1. Materials

All embankment materials will be subject to test by a Geotechnical Engineer, a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Maryland, retained by the Contractor, to determine the material's compliance with these Specifications. When specific material tests are called for in the referenced standards and specifications, the County Engineer will have the option of requiring that any or all of these tests be performed for materials furnished for a specific project. When testing is required, it will be specified herein or in the "Special Provisions."

2. Field Tests

a. The Contractor shall retain a Geotechnical Engineer for all in-place

moisture/density testing on the Project. The Geotechnical Engineer shall determine the number of samples to be taken and the frequency of tests


EMBANKMENT 02260-2

required to confirm compliance with the Specifications with concurrence of the County Engineer. The Contractor shall assist the Geotechnical Engineer in obtaining samples and shall provide smooth surface for conducting moisture/density tests.

The method for testing materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO T 180, Method C or D or as determined by the County Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide a cement concrete compaction block having dimensions 18 x 18 x 9 inches and weighing not less than 200 pounds. One 18 x 18-inch working face shall have a level broomed surface.

b. At the start of embankment construction, the Contractor shall demonstrate

to the Geotechnical Engineer and the County Engineer that the compaction density specified in Section 02260.03 can be attained by the compaction equipment and methods the Contractor intends to use. Once the method and equipment has been approved, no substitutions will be permitted without the County Engineer's approval.


material is outside the specified moisture range, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation reexcavate, re-work, and/or recompact the particular layer or section until the required density and moisture are attained.

D. Submittals

1. Materials Tests

Material test results shall be submitted for all materials furnished from other than a licensed commercial operating supplier. The tests shall demonstrate that the material meets all the requirements specified herein.


Certificates of compliance shall be submitted in accordance with the "General Provisions" for materials furnished from a licensed commercial operating supplier. The certificates shall state that the material meets the requirements specified herein.

3. Test Results

The Contractor shall have the Geotechnical Engineer submit copies of all laboratory and field soil related test results to the County prior to Final Inspection.

02260.02 MATERIALS

A. Material Furnished by the County

The County will not furnish any materials for embankment construction except as is available on the site within the limits as designated on the Plans by sections, gradelines,

EMBANKMENT 02260-3


and/or contour lines. B. Contractor's Options

The Contractor may use suitable materials obtained from general, structure, borrow, trench, and other excavations for the construction of embankments.


Material for fills or backfills may be from on-site excavations (if of proper quality) or from borrow sources. The material shall be free from vegetable matter, organic material, sludge, grit, trash, muck, roots, logs, stumps or frozen material and other deleterious substances. Except as otherwise specified or approved, the material shall not contain rocks or lumps larger than six inches in greatest dimension. The material shall not contain mica in quantities which, in the judgment of County Engineer are sufficient to affect compaction characteristics. Materials having a maximum dry density of less than 100 pounds per cubic foot (AASHTO T 180) shall not be used unless specifically approved in writing by the County Engineer. Cinders, ashes, rubble and construction debris shall not be used in the work.

Fill material for embankment construction shall be bentonite clay with the following characteristics: CRITERIA VALUE Gradation (% Passing) – ASTM D422 1-Inch No. 4 No. 200

100

85-100 > 30

Atterberg Limits – ASTM D4318 Liquid Limit (LL) Plasticity Index (PI)

> 30

10-25 Maximum Permeability Coefficient 10-8 cm/s

The limits of bentonite clay shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

Suitable material is any material meeting the quality requirements specified above and which is not frozen and which has a suitable moisture content. Embankment material shall be placed at a moisture content between the optimum moisture content (OMC) determined by ASTM 698 and OMC+5% and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density. Quality assurance testing to verify acceptable compaction and moisture content shall be performed on each lift of material at 50-foot intervals in accordance with ASTM D2922 and D3017.

Unsuitable material is any material not meeting all the requirements for suitable material.

02260.03 EXECUTION

A. General

1. Embankment Foundation

EMBANKMENT 02260-4


Prior to the construction of any embankment, the foundation upon which it is to be built shall be properly prepared. Debris, root mat, muck, and other material, which in the judgment of the County Engineer will not adequately support the embankment, shall be removed to the depth specified by the concurrence of the County Engineer. Sod and topsoil may also be ordered to be removed by the the County Engineer.

2. Embankment Over Existing Road

When the embankment is to be superimposed upon any type of existing road, the existing surface, regardless of depth of embankment to be placed thereon, shall be scarified, thoroughly broken up, or removed as shown on the Plans, to a degree as will provide ample bond between the old and new material.

3. Test Rolling

When test rolling is specified or before any embankment material is placed, the County Engineer may also require that the foundation be tested by being rolled with a pneumatic tired compactor.

4. Frozen Material

No frozen material shall be placed in embankments. Any material which freezes after being placed in the embankment shall be reworked or removed before the next layer is placed. Any frozen material removed from embankments shall be stockpiled outside of construction limits and reserved for future use at a time when its condition is satisfactory to the County Engineer at no expense to the County. Any suitable material which is wasted shall be replaced by the Contractor with other acceptable material at no expense to the County.

B. Placing and Spreading

1. Placing and Spreading

The material shall be placed in horizontal layers of uniform thickness as outlined in the "Grading Ordinance" or as determined by the County Engineer. Each layer shall be carried across the full width of the embankment repair area. In order to obtain the required density, blending of variable soils may be necessary.

2. Placement Across Water or Unstable Ground

When embankment is to be constructed across open water, liquefied areas or across low swampy ground which will not support the weight of the construction equipment, the first layer of the fill may be constructed by depositing material in a layer no thicker than that required to support the equipment or as determined by the County Engineer. Subsequent layers shall be placed and processed in accordance with the requirements noted herein for the type of material being placed.

3. Earth Embankments

In earth embankments no layer shall exceed 8 inches in uncompacted thickness, except as noted in the above paragraph.

EMBANKMENT 02260-5


4. Rock Embankments

In rock embankment the thickness of layers shall be determined by the size of the rock but in no case shall layers exceed 24 inches in thickness. The portion of the embankment less than 6 feet below the subgrade at the profile grade line shall be placed in layers of more than 8 inches in loose thickness, and these layers shall be filled solid and fully choked with spalls, rock dust, or earth so as to reduce voids to a minimum. Each layer shall be filled and compacted before the next layer is placed.

The top of the rock material in any embankment shall be of a uniform surface, determined by connecting with straight lines the points on the typical cross section which are 9 inches below any median ditch invert and 9 inches below the bottom of each pavement edge (not including foundation layers or subbase) and thence sloping downward and outward under the shoulder at the rate of 3/4 inch per foot to the outer slope of the embankment. The remaining upper portion of the

embankment, unless otherwise specified, shall be constructed of suitable earth, free from stones that would be retained on a 3 inch sieve, and it shall be processed as described herein.

5. Drainage

A smooth grade having an adequate crown shall be maintained so as to provide drainage at all times.

6. Side Slopes

Side slopes shall be uniformly constructed and maintained at the specified slope ratio throughout the progress of the work.

7. Benching

When the embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment is to be compacted against existing embankments, the slopes on which the embankment is to be placed shall be continuously benched where they are steeper than 4:1 when measured at right angles to the roadway or as determined by the County Engineer. The benching operation shall be done as the embankment is brought up in layers. Benching shall be of sufficient width to permit operations of placing and compacting equipment but shall have a minimum width of 5 feet. Each horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the original ground and the vertical sides of the previous cut. Material meeting embankment requirements cut from the benches shall be recompacted along with the new embankment material at the Contractor's expense.

Side-hill benching and embankment construction shall be a continuous operation. Interruption of operation due to unforeseen circumstances shall not be for more than 48 hours. Construction of side-hill fill benches and recompaction of material cut from benches will not be a separate pay item but will be considered incidental to and included in the prices bid for the various excavation items.

C. Moisture Control

EMBANKMENT 02260-6


When necessary, each layer before being compacted shall be processed as required in order to bring its moisture content sufficiently close to optimum to make possible its compaction to the required density. The material may be wetted by the application of water or dried by plowing, discing, and aerating. Either process may be carried out either on the embankment or at the source of the material. The moisture content of the soil being compacted shall be considered as being too high to insure compaction when, if after repeated aeration and rolling, the roller picks up excessive material, causes deep rutting, or displaces rather than compacts the material. The resultant moisture content of embankment material, when finally compacted to required density, shall not be in excess of two percentage points from optimum or as determined by the County Engineer.

D. Compaction

1. General

Each layer shall be uniformly compacted to the specified density before the new layer is placed and processed. The specified density shall be obtained by rolling with pneumatic tired compaction equipment, grid rollers, three-wheeled power rollers, vibratory, sheepsfoot or tamping rollers, or other approved types of rollers or compaction equipment. Any one or more of these types of equipment shall be used if needed in order to obtain the specified density.

Dumping and rolling areas shall be kept separate, and no lift shall be covered by another until density complying with the requirements of this subsection is secured. Hauling and leveling equipment shall be so routed and distributed over each layer of the fill in a manner as to make use of compaction effort afforded thereby.

Rolling shall be done in a longitudinal direction along the embankment and shall generally begin at the outer edges and progress toward the center. The travel paths of traffic and construction equipment shall be kept dispersed over the entire width of the embankment so as to aid in obtaining uniform compaction.

2. Density Requirements

a. Optimum moisture and maximum density will be determined in accordance

with AASHTO T 180, Method C or D as directed by the County Engineer.

b. In-place density will be determined in accordance with MSMT 350 or 352.

c. Roadway and Paved Areas

Material one (1) foot below the top of subgrade shall be compacted to not less than 92 percent of the maximum dry density. Material in the top one (1) foot shall be compacted to not less than 97 percent of the maximum dry density. The resultant moisture content of embankment material, when finally compacted to the required density, shall be within two (2) percentage points of optimum.

d. Non Roadway Areas

Embankment material shall be compacted to not less than 90% of the

EMBANKMENT 02260-7


maximum dry density unless otherwise specified by the County Engineer.

3. Protection of Structures and Utilities During Compaction

Adjacent to structures or utilities and in locations where working space is too restricted to permit the use of rollers, compaction may be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or vibratory compactors as described under and in accordance with the terms of Section 02265.03. The material to be compacted shall be selected to meet the requirements of this Section except that rock shall not be used. It shall be spread in layers having a loose depth not in excess of 6 inches and shall be compacted to the specified density.

The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all structures and utilities from any damage which might be caused by the type of equipment used or its method

of operation in the handling, processing, or compacting of embankment or backfill material. Particular care shall be exercised in the vicinity of arches, retaining walls, foundation walls, culverts, and utility trenches to assure that no undue strain or movement is produced.

E. Stability of Embankments

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments in the Contract. The Contractor shall remove and replace with acceptable material any embankment or portion thereof which has been constructed with unapproved material. The Contractor shall bear the expense of removing and replacing unstable material as well as removing and replacing portions of the embankment which become unstable or displaced as the result of carelessness or negligence on the Contractor's part.

Embankment material which may be lost or displaced as a result of natural causes such as storms, cloudbursts, etc., or as a result of unavoidable movement or settlement of the ground or foundation upon which the embankment is constructed shall be replaced by the Contractor with acceptable material from excavation or borrow, etc.

F. Roadway Subgrade

The roadway and paved area subgrade shall be constructed and carefully shaped to the specified cross section after all embankment and backfilling have been substantially completed. Material is to be reserved for use from the sources from which the embankment material is being supplied or may be furnished from borrow if so directed by the County Engineer.

After the subgrade in cuts and fills has been finally shaped and brought to the specified cross section, it shall be carefully and thoroughly proof rolled by the use of a 35 ton pneumatic tire roller or County approved equal.

In locations where rolling is not feasible, compaction by mechanical tampers or vibratory compactors, in accordance with Section 02265.03, may be required.

The compacting shall cover the entire width of the roadway or paved area. The travel paths of any traffic or construction equipment which is permitted on the subgrade shall be kept dispersed so as to aid in obtaining uniform compaction and avoid the displacement of

EMBANKMENT 02260-8


material or formation of ruts. If ruts 2 inches or more in depth are formed, they shall be removed by scarifying, reshaping, and recompacting the affected subgrade area.

The Contractor shall at all times maintain ditches and drains along the subgrade which are adequate to keep it thoroughly drained.

No subsequent cover or resurfacing material shall be deposited upon a subgrade when it is frozen nor until it has been checked and approved by the County Engineer.





SECTION 02265

TAMPED FILL


Tamped fill shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, compacting embankment and backfill materials by means of mechanical tampers or vibratory compactors as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with the Contract Documents. This method of compaction shall be used wherever embankment and backfill materials cannot be adequately compacted by other approved methods. This item does not include the furnishing of the embankment or backfill material.





1. Materials

All tamped fill materials will be subject to test by the Geotechnical Engineer, a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Maryland, to determine the material's compliance with these Specifications. When specific materials tests are called for in the referenced standards and specifications, the County Engineer will have the option of requiring that any or all of these tests be performed for materials furnished for a specific project.

2. Field Test

a. The Contractor shall retain a Geotechnical Engineer for all in-place

moisture/density testing on the Project. The Contractor shall assist the Geotechnical Engineer in obtaining samples and shall provide a smooth surface for conducting moisture/density tests. The Contractor will not be entitled to any claim for additional compensation due to the testing requirements specified herein.

b. At the start of tamped fill construction, the Contractor shall demonstrate to

the Geotechnical Engineer with the concurrence of the County Engineer that the compaction density specified in Section 02260.03 can be attained by the compaction equipment and methods the Contractor intends to use. Once the method and equipment has been approved, no substitutions will be permitted without the County Engineer's approval.


material is outside the specified moisture range, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation, reexcavate, rework, and/or recompact the particular layer or section until the required density and moisture are


TAMPED FILL 02265-2

attained. C. Detailed Material Requirements

Embankment and backfill material used for tamped fill shall meet the requirements of Section 02260.02.

D. Submittals

The Contractor shall have the Geotechnical Engineer submit copies of all laboratory and field soil related test data to the County prior to Final Inspection.

02265.02 MATERIALS

A. Material Furnished by the County

The County will not furnish any materials for tamped fill.


The Contractor may use suitable materials obtained from general, structure, borrow, trench, and other excavations for the construction of tamped fill.

02265.03 EXECUTION

A. General

After permission has been given by the County Engineer to backfill, the areas to be tamped shall be filled with approved materials furnished from excavation and supplemented by additional approved material, if directed, from borrow excavation. This material shall be placed in horizontal layers not over 6 inches in loose depth or as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer with the concurrence of the County Engineer over the entire area to be tamped and uniformly compacted by means of mechanical tampers or vibratory compactors so as to meet the requirements of Section 02260.03. If the material is too dry for proper compaction, it shall be moistened as necessary to achieve optimum compaction density.

B. Backfilling Around Structures

In backfilling abutments, retaining walls, culverts, foundations, or other structures, special care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action against the structure by the material being compacted; and existing slopes to be filled against shall be benched or stepped. The backfill shall then be built up in horizontal layers as described above and wide enough that there shall be a horizontal berm of thoroughly compacted material being the structure at all times for a distance at least equal to the height of the structure remaining to be backfilled, except insofar as undisturbed material cannot be adequately compacted by other methods. In the case of structures installed below subgrade in embankments, the tamped fill shall be placed to a depth of 1 foot over the top of the structure, while in excavation sections the tamped fill shall extend to the surface of the finished earthwork.




TAMPED FILL 02265-3





SECTION 02400

EXCAVATION SUPPORT

024001.01 GENERAL

A. Description

1. Excavation support shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the designing,

furnishing, and placing of timber or steel sheeting or other systems for excavation support in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. All work shall comply with Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 26, Subpart

P (and other applicable sections) of Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction and the requirement of MOSHA, Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.


1. Trench excavation, backfill and compaction; Section 02250.



1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to select materials, methods, and

equipment, and design an excavation support system which will:

a. Support earth pressures, utility loads, equipment, applicable traffic and construction loads, and other surcharge loads in such a manner as will allow the safe and expeditious construction of the permanent facilities without movement or settlement of the ground and will prevent damage to or movement of adjacent buildings, structures, and utilities.

b. Support the maximum loads that can occur during construction. For the

purpose of this section, the design load means the maximum load the support member will have to carry in actual practice, and the proof load means a specified test load greater than the design load.

c. Carry bottom of support system to a depth below the main excavation

adequate to prevent lateral and vertical movement. Where additional excavation is carried below the main excavation, provide means to prevent movement of the main excavation supports.

d. Allow the required open excavated space.

e. Allow for staged removal to conform to construction and backfill sequence,


EXCAVATION SUPPORT 02400-2

or as shown on the Plans.

f. Provide diagonal bracing where needed for stability of the system. Arrange wales, struts, posts, and braces in such a manner as will minimize interference with compaction of the backfill.

D. Submittals

Prior to the installation of excavation support systems, submit the following in accordance with Section 01305, Submittals:

1. Submit working drawings showing proposed excavation support system including

details, arrangement, and methods of construction for the proposed system and details illustrating the method for preloading the bracing. Show level of streets, struts, and shores, as applicable, and permissible depth to which excavation may be carried before such supports are installed and preloaded. Show full excavation depth load to be carried by various members of the support system; and, if required, the preloads. Submit appropriate design calculation including maximum theoretical deflections of support members.

2. Revised working drawing as required to show the actual locations of existing utilities

in relation to the excavation support system. Show design and methods to overcome interference with such existing utilities and the excavation support system.

3. Proposed sequence of strut and shore removal as applicable and as related to

concrete placement and backfilling operations.

4. Proposed method of installing sheet piling, including the sequence of driving, template, and driving equipment description.

MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for excavation support.


The Contractor may utilize the excavation support system of the Contractor's choosing unless otherwise noted.


1. Steel Sheet Piling



Continuous interlocking type, ASTM A 328, provided with at least one 2-1/2 inch diameter handling hole on the centerline of the web located at least 6 inches from each end of the sheet pile.

2. Timber

Structural grade with a minimum working stress of 1100 pounds per square inch. Timber to be left in place; creosote or creosote-coal tar solution treated in accordance with AASHTO M 133.

EXECUTION

A. General

1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to support the sides and ends of

excavations. All excavation support systems shall be designed and arranged so that it may be withdrawn as backfilling proceeds, without injury to the facility built under the Contract or to any adjacent facility.

2. All excavation support systems, unless otherwise noted, shall be withdrawn as the

backfilling of the excavation proceeds.

3. Sheeting or other materials left in place shall be cut off by the Contractor at least 12 inches below finished grade.

4. When the depth of the excavation requires 2 lengths of sheeting, one above the

other, the lower length shall be set inside the box stringers or wales of the upper length and driver down and braced as the excavation continues.

5. Driving heads and cushions for temporary sheet piling shall be used at the option

of the Contractor. Driving heads and cushions used on permanent sheet piling shall be of proper configuration and construction to prevent damage to the piling.

B. Timber Sheeting

Timber sheeting shall be drift sharpened or leveled at the bottom so as to wedge adjacent boards in tight contact to prevent the loss of material from behind the sheeting.

C. Steel Sheet Piling

Steel sheet piping shall be driven in plumb position with each pile interlocked with adjoining piles for its entire length so as to form a continuous diaphragm throughout the length of each run of wall, bearing tightly against original ground. Drive to depth indicated on the Plans or to a firm seat against or into bedrock. Exercise care in driving so that interlocking members can be extracted, if required, without injury to adjacent fills. Do not drive piles within 100 feet of concrete less than seven days old. The methods of driving, cutting, and splicing shall conform to the approved working drawings.

D. Internal Bracing Support System

1. The internal bracing support system includes wales, struts, and shores.



2. Install and maintain all bracing support members in tight contact with each other and with the surface being supported.

3. When required, preload bracing members by jacking struts and shores at 50% of

the allowable design load. Preload bracing members in accordance with methods, procedures, and sequence as described on the approved working drawings. Coordinate excavation work with installation of bracing and preloading. Use steel shims and steel wedges welded or bolted in place to maintain the preloading force in the bracing after release of the jacking equipment pressure.

4. Excavate to a depth no more than 2 feet below the point of support about be to

placed. Install the support and preload immediately after installation and prior to continuing excavation.

E. Removal

1. Unless otherwise noted or directed by the County Engineer, the Contractor shall

remove the excavation support system once it has served its purpose.

2. The excavation support system shall be removed in such a manner that will not disturb or damage the installed facility or any adjacent land, facility, or improvement. Supports shall not be removed until the backfill within has been compacted to the required density.

3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the removal of the excavation support

system and shall repair all damage resulting from the support system's removal at no additional cost to the County.

4. The Contractor may, with the approval of the County Engineer, leave the excavation

support system in place provided that no portion of the system extends above 12 inches below finished grade.

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT


BASIS OF PAYMENT


SECTION 02512

DEWATERING


1. Dewatering shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, designing, furnishing,

installing, maintaining, operating, and removing temporary dewatering systems as required to lower and control water levels and hydrostatic pressures during construction; and disposing of pumped water in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Dewatering includes lowering the water table and intersecting seepage which would

otherwise emerge from the slopes, trench sidewalls, or bottom of the trench or excavation; increasing the stability of excavated slopes; preventing loss of material from beneath the slopes or bottom of the excavation; reducing lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improving the excavating and hauling characteristics of sandy soil; and preventing rupture or heaving of the bottom of an excavation.

3. Contractor shall provide test pitting as required to establish groundwater elevation at points of excavation in accordance with Section 02012, Test Pits. Contractor shall provide dewatering equipment as necessary to conduct the Work.



2. General excavation; Section 02210.

3. Borrow excavation; Section 02240.



1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to select materials, methods, and

equipment, and design a dewatering system which will:

a. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure and lower the groundwater levels below the excavation;

Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for the prosecution of prosecution of subsequent operations;

c. Not result in damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities,

private and public water wells, and other work;

d. Assure that after 12 hours of initial pumping, no soil particles will be present SPECIFICATIONS - MAY 1996

DEWATERING 02512-2

in the discharge.

2. Methods may include sump pumping, single or multiple stage well point systems, eductor and ejector type systems, deep wells, and combinations thereof.

3. Locate dewatering facilities only where they will not interfere with utilities and

construction work to be done by others. If observation wells are used, they shall be placed both perpendicularly and longitudinally along the excavation to demonstrate the effectiveness of the dewatering system and its impact on the surrounding unexcavated areas.

4. Modify dewatering procedures which cause, or threaten to cause, damage to new

or existing facilities, so as to prevent further damage. The Contractor is responsible for determining the modifications to be made, which shall be implemented at no additional cost to the County.

D. Submittals

The Contractor shall, at the preconstruction meeting or a minimum of fourteen days prior to installation of the dewatering system, submit to the County Engineer a letter report, including working drawings and/or design data that is required to detail any or all of the following:

1. The proposed type of dewatering system, including relief of hydrostatic head and

maintenance of the excavation in a dewatered and in a hydrostatically relieved condition;

2. Arrangement, location, and depths of the components of the system;

3. A complete description of equipment to be used, with installation, operation, and

maintenance procedures;

4. Standby equipment and power supply;

5. Location and size of berms, dikes, sumps, and discharge lines, including the relation to water disposal ditches;

6. Types and sizes of filters;

7. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of the selected system and

equipment. 02512.02 MATERIALS

Not used.

02512.03 EXECUTION

A. General

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to adequately control both surface drainage and drainage of excavated areas as follows:

1. Surface Drainage: Intercept and divert precipitation, surface water, and groundwater


DEWATERING 02512-3

away from excavation through the use of dikes, curb walls, ditches, pipes, sumps, or other means.

2. Drainage of Excavated Areas: Provide and maintain ditches of adequate size to

collect surface and seepage water which may enter the excavations. Divert the water into sumps and drain or pump into drainage channels or storm drains. The discharge of flushing or ground water into existing sanitary sewers is strictly prohibited. Discharge all water to a settling basin or other sediment control device with approval of the Charles County Soil Conservation District to reduce the amount of fine particles which may be carried into the drain. If a storm drain becomes blocked or its capacity restricted due to dewatering operations, the Contractor shall clean the drain at no additional cost to the County.

B. Dewatering

1. Organize dewatering operations to lower the groundwater level in excavations as

required for prosecution of the work, and to provide a stable, dry subgrade for the prosecution of subsequent operations.

2. Maintain the water level at such lowered elevations until no danger to the structure

or facility can occur because of buildup of excessive hydrostatic pressure, and in any event maintain the water level a minimum of 2 feet below the subgrade, unless otherwise permitted by the County Engineer.

3. If approved by the County Engineer, the extent of dewatering may be reduced, for

structures designed to withstand uplift pressure, to maintain the water level a minimum of 5 feet below the prevailing level of backfill as it is being placed, provided such water level does not result in uplift pressures in excess of 80% of the downward pressure produced by the weight of the structure and backfill in place.







SECTION 02551

WATER MAINS

02551.01 GENERAL

A. DESCRIPTION

Water main installation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing and installing water pipe, fittings, and appurtenances of the size and type shown on the Plans, installed on a firm foundation true to line and grade in accordance with the Contract Documents.




3. Water valves and appurtenances; Section 02552.

4. Cast-in-place concrete structures; Section 03300.


1. Materials

a. The County Engineer will inspect all materials before and after installation to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. When specific tests of materials are called for in the referenced standards and specifications, the County Engineer has the option of requiring that any or all of these tests be performed for materials furnished for a specific project. When testing is required, it will be specified herein or in the "Special Provisions."

b. Cast iron fittings and ductile iron pipe (DIP) and fittings shall be sound and without defects that might impair its service. Defective areas shall not exceed the maximum allowable minus wall thickness tolerance specified in AWWA C110 or C151. Repair of defects by welding or other methods will not be allowed. Defective or damaged lining areas may be repaired by cutting out the defective or damaged lining to the metal so that the edges of the lining not removed are perpendicular or slightly undercut. The cut-out area and the adjoining lining shall be thoroughly wetted, and a stiff mortar applied and troweled smooth with the adjoining lining. After any surface water has evaporated, but while the patch is still moist, it shall be cured by the application of a seal coat.

DIP material shall be used for all potable water mains and all raw water mains located on the treatment site. It is the Contractors option to utilize this material for all raw water mains. If utilized for raw water the words "RAW WELL WATER" must be stencilled on the pipe in 2 inch block letters every 10 feet.

REVISED DECEMBER 2004

c. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and couplings shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, bubbles, blisters, holes, foreign inclusions, cuts, or scrapes on inside or outside surfaces, or other imperfections which may impair the performance or life of the pipe. Each pipe shall be straight-to-within 1 1/4 inch per 20-foot length of pipe when uniformly supported along its entire length, and shall have a true circular cross-section to within ± 1/64 inch. This pipe shall only be allowed in special applications of non potable/treated lines with prior County approval.

Bedding shall be done in accordance with the Standard Details. Tracer wire and marker tape shall be installed with this pipe material in accordance with Section 02551.02.C.7 and Section 02551.02.C.8.

2. Chlorination and Field Tests

a. General

1) The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment necessary to perform the tests specified and to chlorinate the water mains.

2) The Contractor shall schedule all tests with the County Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of the test, and shall conduct all acceptance testing in the presence of the County Engineer. The County will witness one test and perform one Substantial Completion Inspection and one Final Inspection at no cost to the Contractor. If the project is released for service following Substantial Completion acceptance tests, the County will perform a final inspection if required at no cost to the Contractor. Should the pipeline fail the first County witnessed test, the Contractor shall reimburse the County for all costs resulting from such additional tests so required until the pipeline passes the test(s). The Contractor shall also reimburse the County for the cost of inspection if the Contractor is not prepared for any test, additional retests, and additional Substantial Completions including Partial Substantial Completion Inspections or additional Final Inspections. Reimbursement shall be made prior to the next Substantial Completion or Final Inspection.

3) The section of water main shall be filled by a metered connection from such existing fire hydrant or main as may be designated by the County Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish a backflow preventer ahead of the new water main. When charging and testing water mains which are not sufficiently close to existing water mains carrying County water to permit connection direct by pipe or hose lines, County approved tank wagons shall be used to haul water and serve as suction wells.

4) Any defective work which shows up while conducting tests or before substantial completion acceptance, and any leaks occurring after substantial completion acceptance but before final acceptance due to either blown joints or cracked pipe or fittings shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Should the work be done by the County in the case of an emergency, the Contractor shall reimburse the County for the actual cost of replacing such materials and making such installations.

b. Hydrostatic Testing

1) Water mains and appurtenances shall be hydrostatically tested by the Contractor in accordance with AWWA C600 and as specified herein.


2) The pressure in the water main shall be increased to 150 psi at the highest point of the section of main under test, provided the static pressure is under 100 psi. Where static pressure is over 100 psi, it shall be noted in the "Special Provisions" and the test pressure shall then be 50 psi above static pressure. The test shall be a 3-hour duration. Allowable leakage shall be calculated using the following formula:

L =SD√P

133,200

L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour

S = Length of pipe tested, in feet

D = Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches

P = Average test pressure, in pounds per square inch

Should the hydrostatic test show the water main is defective, the Contractor shall remedy such defects and retest the water main as specified above. This procedure shall be repeated until the test requirements are met.

3) Submittals, records, coordination and reporting shall be in accordance with Section 02567, Testing of Process Pipe.

c. Continuity Testing for PVC Pipe

1) After backfilling, the Contractor shall test the tracer wire to demonstrate electrical continuity between fire hydrants and through the length of the PVC pipeline installed. Any discontinuity shall be located, repaired, and retested at the Contractor's expense until continuity is achieved. Repairs shall be made utilizing the Scotch 3M82A kit with a mechanical splice union.

d. Intersite Pump Station Overflow Testing

1) Operate Hill Road Pumping Station with two pumps operational while Intersite Pump Station Pumps are off and allow overflow of wet well to Breeze Farm Lagoon for a period of 10 minutes. Provide non-potable water at Hill Road Pumping Station to allow operation of pumps for 10 minutes.

D. Submittals

1. Shop Drawings

a. Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for the following materials, and shall include the following information:

1) Cast iron fittings and ductile iron pipe (DIP) and fittings: product information and dimensions; pressure rating or class; storage, handling, and installation recommendations.

2) Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and couplings: product information and dimensions; pressure rating; storage, handling, and installation recommendations.


3) Tie rods, retainer glands, and associated hardware: product information and dimensions; pressure rating; installation recommendations.


Certificate of compliance shall be submitted in accordance with the "General Provisions" for the following materials stating that item supplied is in accordance with the requirements specified herein:

a. Cast iron fittings and ductile iron pipe and fittings

b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe

3. Certified Test Results

Certified test results shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for the following:

a. Cast iron fittings and ductile iron pipe and fittings.

b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe

1) Prior to approval of finished pipe, the manufacturer shall submit Certified Material Test Reports for the following materials: aggregates, cement, admixtures, wire mesh, reinforcing rod, prestress wire, steel sheet, plate and shapes, joint rings, bolts, lugs and gaskets. Water for mortar and concrete mix shall be certified to have met the requirements of ASTM C-94. Certified Reports shall show the actual results of all required chemical analyses, physical tests, examinations and heat treatments, including times and temperatures.

2) The manufacturer's control number or work order number pertaining to any given section of pipe shall be stamped on the spigot joint ring when production has begun and legibly and indelibly marked on the concrete interior of the pipe following curing. All inspection reports and production records shall show the work control number.

02551.02 Materials


1. The County will not furnish any materials for water main construction.

2. The Contractor may obtain potable water from the County's potable water system for testing water mains. The Contractor shall contact the Department of Fiscal Services, Billing Section, for requirements. A backflow prevention device must be placed in accordance with the Standard Details prior to drawing County water.


1. The Contractor may furnish any specified pipe material and compatible specified fittings of the Contractor's choice, for the uses noted in this specification, unless otherwise specified in the "SPECIAL PROVISIONS."



1. Portland cement concrete for pipe fitting buttresses and anchorages shall be Mix No. 1 as specified in Section 03310.02.

2. Pipe 4 inches or larger shall be ANSI/AWWA C900 PVC pressure pipe material conforming to ASTM D1784, minimum Class 150, (DR18) push-on joint conforming to ASTM D3139 with elastomeric gaskets conforming to ASTM F477.

3. Mechanical joints for fittings shall be supplied with rubber gasket joints in conformance with ANSI 21.11/AWWA C111.

4. PVC pipe less than 4 inches shall be ASTM D1785, Type 1, Grade 1, (PVC 1120) PVC pressure pipe material conforming to ASTM D1784 Schedule 80. Solvent cement socket weld type joints shall be used on pipe runs and fittings to be PVC.

5. Joint sockets for belled PVC pressure pipe to conform to ASTM 2672 and ASTM D2564 (solvent cements).

6. Cast Iron Fittings

a. All fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C110. Fittings shall be designed and constructed to withstand a pressure not less than that for the adjacent pipe or as follows, whichever is greater: fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi.

b. All fittings shall be cement-lined in accordance with AWWA C104, double thickness. This lining shall be sealed with bituminous seal coat. The outside surface shall be bituminous coated.

7. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

a. Pipe

1) Pipe shall restrained joint pipe manufactured in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C151/ANSI A21.51. Pipe nominal lengths may be 16 through 20 feet. All pipe and fittings shall be designed and constructed to withstand all external pressure caused by overburden as indicated on the profile and traffic loads to which the pipe may be subjected.

2) All ductile iron pipe will be designed for 350 psi working pressure and Type 1 laying condition. The minimum thickness shall be Class 50 or as shown on the Plans or specified in the "Special Provisions".

3) Restrained joint pipe shall be TR Flex as manufactured by US Pipe and Foundry or Fast Grip Joint Pipe as manufactured by American Ductile Iron Pipe Company, or equal.

b. Joints

1) Joints shall be restrained push-on type in accordance with AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11.

c. Fittings

1) All fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10 for compact fittings sizes 3 inch through 16 inch. Fittings shall be designed and constructed to withstand a pressure not less than that for the adjacent pipe.


2) Fittings shall be designed and constructed to withstand a pressure not less than that for the adjacent pipe or as follows, whichever is greater: fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi.

d. Restrained Mechanical Transition Couplings

1) Provide couplings within 2 feet of wet well structure.

2) Adapters shall be restrained to process piping by the use of stainless steel tie rods.

3) Couplings and/or adapters shall be provided for the alignment of similar types of pipe or connecting dissimilar pipe materials as required.

4) All connections shall be restrained.

5) Sleeve shall be ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. Ends shall have smooth inside taper for uniform gasket seating.

6) Gaskets shall be nitrile (BUNA N) certified to NSF®/ANSI 61-G compounded to produce superior storage and performance characteristics while resisting water, acids, alkalis, most (aliphatic) hydrocarbons and many other chemicals. Nominal temperature range: -20 °F to 180 °F.

7) Follower flanges shall be ductile iron ASTM A536 designed for high strength/weight ratio.

8) All hardware shall be 316 stainless steel.

9) Finish shall be Flexi-Coat®, fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213.

10) Mechanical joint transition couplings shall be Smith-Blair 471 for ductile iron to ductile iron pipe and Smith-Blair 473 for PVC to ductile iron pipe, or equal.

e. Lining and Coating

1) All pipe and fittings shall be cement-lined in accordance with AWWA C104, double thickness. This lining shall be sealed with a bituminous seal coat. The outside surface shall be bituminous coated.

8. Joint Restraint

a. Joints shall combine a continuous rubber gasket, beveled ductile iron welded-on retainer rings, and split ring ductile iron locking segments to provide a means of restraining the pipe against thrust due to internal water working pressure or external forces.

b. Ductile iron locking segments shall be inserted through a slot in the bell face to provide a positive axial lock between bell interior surface and the retainer weldment on the spigot end of the pipe.

c. As an alternative, for field cut pipe or other applications, a split ductile iron or steel locking ring with twin stainless steel bolts may be used in place of the ductile iron locking segments in restrained joint pipe. Split locking rings (when used) shall be TR Flex Gripper Rings by US Pipe and Foundry, or equal.


d. Rod for tie rod assemblies shall meet the material requirements of ASTM A 193, Grade B7, and shall be threaded for at least 8 inches on both ends. Rod shall be 3/4 inch diameter unless otherwise noted. Nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 194. Manufactured tie rod and accessories shall result in the completed restrained joint assembly having a minimum working pressure rating of 200 psi.

9. Quick Couplings

a. Provide “Quick-Connect” adapters as shown on the Contract Drawings. “Quick-Connect” dust caps and chains shall be attached to adapters. Adapters, dust caps, and chains shall be stainless steel, as manufactured by Kamloc, or equal.

10. Protective Coating

a. Field applied protective coating for under ground applications shall be a bituminous coating meeting the requirements of Section 09900.02, Article C, Paragraph 8.

11. Tracer Wire for Non-Metallic Pipelines

a. Tracer Wire shall be AWG No. 4 insulated stranded Copper.

b. Provide tracer wire access box as indicated in the Contract Drawings. Access box shall be gray iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30, as manufactured by Drainage & Water Solutions, Inc., or equal.

12. Marker Tape for Non-Metallic Pipelines

a. Marker Tape shall be minimum 2-inches wide green plastic tape with metallic lining or coating lettered "WASTEWATER" in black graphics.

b. Marker tape shall be placed 6 inches above the pipe and shall not be in contact with pipe.

13. Polyethylene Encasement

a. Ductile iron pipe shall be wrapped with a minimum of 8-mil thick polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248. Material and installation shall be in accordance with AWWA C105.

14. Pipe Penetration Seals

a. The space between the opening on wet well wall and pipe shall be sealed with a mechanical seal, model S-316 (stainless steel type, EPDM seal element, 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts) as manufactured by Link-Seal or equal. Double seal shall be provided.

02551.03 Execution

A. Preparation

1. Trench excavation, backfill, and compaction, and pipe bedding and haunching shall be as specified in Section 02250.03.

2. The pipeline trench excavation shall be dewatered sufficiently to allow pipe joints to be made under dry conditions. No joint shall be made under water.


3. No pipe shall be laid upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated, nor at any time when there is danger of ice formation or frost penetration at the bottom of the excavation. In freezing weather, open trench length shall be kept to a minimum and the excavation promptly backfilled after the pipe has been installed.

4. Each pipe shall be bedded on a solid foundation acceptable to the County Engineer. Bell holes shall be dug sufficiently large to insure that joints are properly made and the pipe is firmly bedded for the full length of the barrel.

B. Pipe Installation

1. All pipe shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer and as specified herein. These recommendations shall include maximum trench width, if more restrictive than that shown in the Standard Details; bedding requirements; backfill material and compaction, where applicable. In addition, the following shall apply unless otherwise noted:

a. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall be installed in accordance with Charles County Standard Detail M2.04 “Bedding, Embedment and Maximum Cover PVC Pipe”.

b. Cast iron fittings and ductile iron pipe (DIP) and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the Charles County Standard Detail M2.02 “Bedding and Trench Widths for Ductile Iron Sanitary Pipe”.

2. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for safe and convenient handling and joining of pipes and fittings shall be used. Slings shall not damage the exteriors and/or coating of the pipe, and shall be wide canvas or rubber-coated belts.

3. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully handled and lowered into the trench. Pipe shall be installed with special care to insure that each length abut against the next to produce no shoulder or unevenness of any kind along the inside bottom half of the pipeline. No wedging or blocking will be permitted in installing any pipe unless directed by written order or permission in writing is obtained from the County Engineer.

4. No pipe shall be brought into position until the preceding length has been thoroughly bedded and secured in place. Care shall be used to secure watertightness and prevent damage to, or disturbing of, the joints during the refilling process. After pipes have been installed and joints have been made, there shall be no walking on or working over the pipe, except as may be necessary in tamping the backfill material, until the backfill is at least 2 feet over the top of the pipe.

5. The pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned before being installed and shall be kept clean until acceptance of the completed work. Open ends of all pipelines shall be provided with a stopper carefully fitted to keep dirt and other substances from entering. This stopper shall be kept in the end of the pipeline at all times when installation is not in progress.

6. Whenever a pipe requires cutting, to fit into the line or bring it to the required location, the work shall be done in a manner that leaves a smooth, square end.

a. Cut PVC pipe ends shall have burrs removed and the end beveled to match factory bevel. Field spigots shall be stop-marked with a felt tip marker or wax crayon for the proper length of assembly insertion.

b. Any lining damaged due to field cutting shall be repaired by the Contractor as specified herein.


7. In addition to the other requirements specified herein, when installing PVC water mains, the Contractor shall also furnish and install the following:

a. A copper tracer wire located on the left side, looking up station, and in the gravel bedding for the pipe. The wire shall be continuous in length with no breaks. The wire shall be laid with all mainline piping including stubs and fire hydrant laterals and shall be attached to the pipe at the most remote valve locations at all ends of the main. Connections to existing tracer wire or splicing of wire shall be accomplished via wire nuts rated for the gauge wire used and wrapped in electrical tape.

b. A minimum 2-inch wide blue marker tape shall be located in the trench, two (2) feet, _+0.5 feet, above the pipe along the length of all mainline piping including all stubs and fire hydrant laterals.

8. Minimum Pipe Cover and Clearances

a. Water mains shall have no less than 42 inches of cover measured from the existing and/or established grade to the top of the pipe whichever is lower, except as noted on the Plans. When crossing sub-surface obstructions, 12 inch minimum clearance shall be maintained between the pipe and the obstruction.

b. When crossing sanitary sewers, water pipe sections shall be centered over the sewer so that joints on both sides are the maximum distance from the sewer.

9. Jointing Pipe

a. General

1) Before any joints are made in the trench, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the County Engineer by making a sample joint that methods the Contractor will employ conform with the Specifications, will secure a watertight joint, and that the workmen whom the Contractor intends to use for this work are familiar with the requirements for making proper joints.

b. Push-On Gasketed Joints

1) Prior to making gasketed joints, both mating pipe ends and the gasket shall be cleaned of all foreign material. The gasket shall then be inserted in or stretched over the cleaned gasket seat and lubricant applied to the gasket and the mating pipe end. The pipe ends shall be carefully aligned and then driven home. The driving method shall be approved by the County Engineer.

c. Mechanical Joints

1) A cast iron gland shall be positioned on the spigot end of the pipe, followed by a rubber gasket thoroughly lubricated with its tapered side facing the bell. The spigot shall then be inserted fully into the bell. The rubber gasket shall then be moved into position by hand until it is flush with the face of the bell. The gland shall then be placed against the face of the rubber gasket and the bolts inserted and made finger tight. Bolts shall be drawn up evenly on alternate sides beginning at the top, keeping the gland parallel to the face of the bell at all times. All nuts shall be tightened uniformly with a torque in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

d. Other methods of jointing pipe will be given consideration by the County Engineer, provided the Contractor furnishes evidence that the proposed method is equal to or better than the specified methods, and further, provided that the proposed


method has been successfully used and that the joint has previously been manufactured by the company from whom the Contractor proposes to purchase pipe.

10. Restrained joints and joint restraint systems shall be assembled in accordance with the system manufacturer's recommendations. Tie rod nuts shall be tightened by hand and then tightened one additional turn by wrench. Joint restraint systems shall be field protective coated with two coats of a bituminous coating after assembly.

11. Connections to existing work shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the County Engineer at such a time and in such manner as directed and approved by the County Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the County Engineer, for review and approval, a schedule for any proposed system disruption along with a draft letter of notice to the effected customers. Upon approval by the County Engineer, the Contractor shall notify, in writing, the customers in the area to be effected by the shut-off. All valves necessary for making connections will be operated by the County. The Contractor shall complete the connections with the greatest possible speed and all work will proceed without interruption until the existing system is returned to operation, so that the public will be inconvenienced as little as possible. When specified in the "Special Provisions," the Contractor shall make connections at night. When a tapping sleeve and valve is to be used for making the connection, the Contractor shall not proceed with the installation until directed to do so by the County Engineer. The tapping sleeve and valve shall be prepared in accordance with Section 02552.03. Where it is necessary to remove an existing buttress to make a connection, the removal shall be done by the Contractor without additional compensation therefore.

12. Bracing and Blocking

a. All bends, tees, crosses, plugs, etc. in non-restrained joint piping systems shall be braced and blocked with wood and then anchored with concrete thrust blocks so that there will be no movement of the pipe in the joints due to the internal or external pressures.

b. The concrete shall be placed around the fittings and completely fill the space between the fittings and walls of the trench, from 6 inches below the fittings of pipe to 12 inches above the fittings and in accordance with the dimensions and details shown on the Contract Drawings.

c. Anchor concrete shall be placed so that the bell and spigot joints or other joints may be tightened, if necessary.

d. Prior to installation of the concrete anchor, Contractor shall wrap all fittings with polyethylene in accordance with Section 02551.02.C.13.

e. Blocking and bracing is not required for restrained joint piping.

13. All buried metal pipe and/or appurtenance that do not have factory applied protective coating or whose coatings have been damaged shall be field coated with two coats of a bituminous coating after installation.

02551.04 Method Of Measurement

A. Water Mains


B. Fire Hydrant Connections



02551.05 Basis Of Payment

A. General


B. Water Mains


C. Fire Hydrant Connections


D. Valves And Fire Hydrants



SECTION 02552

WATER VALVES AND APPURTENANCES

02552.01 General

A. Description

Water valve and appurtenance installation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing and installing gate, butterfly, and air release and vacuum valves or assemblies with appurtenant valve vaults or roadway valve boxes and accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents.



2. Water mains; Section 02551.


4. Precast concrete utility structures; Section 03400.


1. Materials

a. The Engineer will inspect all materials before and after installation to insure compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Field Tests

a. Water valves and appurtenances installed at the same time as a new water main shall be tested, after installation, by the Contractor along with the water main in accordance with Section 02551.01.

b. Water valves and appurtenances installed in an existing water main will be visually inspected for leakage by the County Engineer at the existing water main line pressure before the excavation is backfilled. The valve and joints shall be leak free under line pressure.

c. Tapping sleeves and valves shall be tested after assembly on the existing water main but prior to making the tap. The Contractor shall pressurize the complete assembly to 150 psi, unless otherwise noted. The County Engineer will visually inspect the tapping sleeve and valve for leakage. No leakage will be permitted.

D. Submittals

1. Shop Drawings

a. Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for all valves furnished, and shall include the following information: product description;

WATER VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 02552-2


b. pressure, torque, or other operating ratings when specified; parts and materials list; detailed assembly drawings; direction of opening; and maintenance requirements and procedures.


a. Certificates of compliance shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for all gate and butterfly valves stating the valve and all materials used in its construction conform to the applicable requirements of the following AWWA standards as modified herein:

1) Gate valves 3-inch through 16-inch diameter nominal pipe size, resilient wedge type AWWA C509. Valves exceeding 16-inch diameter shall be submitted to the county engineer for review and approval.

2) Butterfly valves over 16-inch diameter nominal pipe size - AWWA C504.

3) Interior coatings for resilient seated gate valves - AWWA C550.

02552.02 Materials


1. The County will not furnish any water valve or appurtenances.


1. None.


1. Washed gravel for dewatering and air release and vacuum valve manhole fill shall meet the gradation requirements of ASTM C33, Size number 67, as specified in Section 02621.02.

2. Ductile iron and concrete pressure fittings, shall be as specified in Section 02551.02.

3. Tapping saddles and corporation stops shall be as specified in Section 02553.02.

4. Portland cement concrete for miscellaneous valve appurtenances and cast-in-place vaults shall be the Mix Number indicated on the Standard Details and as specified in Section 03310.02.

5. Precast concrete vault and manhole sections and grade rings shall be as specified in Section 03400.02.

6. Brick for valve support and miscellaneous valve appurtenances shall be sewer brick as specified in Section 04200.02.

7. Mortar for brickwork shall be as specified in Section 04100.02.

8. Frames, covers, and steps shall be as specified in Section 05500.02. Covers shall be labeled "WATER".



9. Gate Valves

a. General

Resilient Seated Gate Valves shall be manufactured and tested to the requirements of AWWA Standard C-509-87 and C-500-86 as applicable for a design working pressure of 250 P.S.I. This pressure rating shall be cast on the outside of the valve and resilient wedge type gate.

In addition to the requirements of the AWWA Standards, the valve shall meet the following specification:

1) Valve body, bonnet and rubber encapsulated gate shall be Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A-536. Shell thickness of body and bonnet components shall conform to Table 2 Sec. 4.4 AWWA C-509. Valves shall have a non-rising stem, 2-inch square operating nut which shall turn left (counter-clockwise) to open. Valves shall be furnished with mechanical joint ends. Valves shall be vertical type unless otherwise approved, with o-ring stem seals without gearing or bypass valves. Foot-pound torques shall not exceed TABLE I shown on the next page. So-called "Thinwall" valves, not included in this Standard, are not allowed.

2) Valve body and bonnet shall be coated on all exterior and interior surface with a fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the requirements of AWWA Standard for Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants; C-550-90. Manufacturer shall certify that the coating will conform to

Section 4-Testing and Inspection. (Relating to qualification and production testing).

3) The valve shall be designed so that during operation, or cycling of the valve, there is no friction or abrasion or rubbing together of the gate and body that can wear away any rubber or epoxy and expose bare iron. Valve manufacturer shall provide evidence from an independent testing laboratory that its valve can operate through 1000 cycles or operation at 250 P.S.I. unbalanced closing pressure and flow to open discharge without causing damage to the epoxy coating in body and gate and/or rubber coating on gate.

4) Gate shall be covered with rubber over all interior and exterior ferrous surfaces. The rubber shall be securely bonded to the gate body, including the part which houses the stem nut. The stem hole through the gate shall be full opening top to bottom, and shall also be covered with rubber.

5) "O" ring stem seal shall be replaceable with the valve under pressure in the full-open position.



TABLE I

RESILIENT SEAT VALVE OPERATING TORQUES TORQUES SHOWN ARE VALVES BEFORE AND AFTER 1000 OPERATING CYCLES

4” Resilient Seat Valve 6” Resilient Seat Valve 8” Resilient Seat Valve

TORQUE-FT LBS TORQUE-FT LBS TORQUE-FT LBS BEFORE AFTER BEFORE AFTER BEFORE AFTER

PSI OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOST OPEN CLOSE 50 5 13 7 13 20 25 17 48 15 37 100 10 15 10 20 30 32 23 57 18 47 150 10 22 15 25 37 48 27 77 22 58 200 10 30 20 37 47 73 30 80 22 62 250 15 37 27 47 58 90 28 82 20 62

10” Resilient Seat Valve 12” Resilient Seat Valve 16” Resilient Seat Valve TORQUE-FT LBS TORQUE-FT LBS TORQUE-FT LBS

BEFORE AFTER BEFORE AFTER BEFORE AFTER PSI OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOST OPEN CLOSE 50 10 32 10 27 17 62 20 67 30 63 50 107 100 12 43 10 37 20 82 28 97 57 103 67 130 150 15 47 10 38 27 123 30 127 60 107 80 147 200 18 50 12 47 32 147 35 162 67 130 103 173 250 22 62 15 57 30 155 38 177 73 147 137 197


02552-5


6) Resilient seated tapping valves shall be furnished with the tapping flange having a raised face or lip designed to engage the correspondence recess in the tapping sleeve flange in accordance with MSS-SP60. Tapping valves without the raised face on the tapping flange are not permitted since they do not assure the proper alignment requirement to prevent damage by a misaligned shell cutter. The interior of the waterway in the body shall be a full opening and capable of passing a full sized shell cutter equal to the nominal diameter of the valve.

7) In order to assure compliance with AWWA and other applicable standards, and access to manufacturing facilities for inspection purposes, and assure timely shipment and delivery, all valves must be manufactured, assembled and tested in plant located within the continental United States.

8) Valves, 4 inch to 16 inch, shall be U.S. Pipe Metroseal 250 or County approved equal.

9) Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, buried gate valves shall be provided with position indicators compatible with the precast valve boxes per Charles County Standard Detail W3.01 “Adjustable Valve Box Round Head Sliding Type”.

i. Position indicators shall be as model Diviner manufactured by Pratt, or equal.

b. Tapping Valves and Sleeves

1) Valves for tapping service shall meet all the requirements for gate valves. In addition the body seat rings shall have clear inside openings sufficient to pass a cutter of full diameter and equal to the nominal size of the tapping valve. Tapping sleeves shall be iron body mechanical joint type. Tapping valves for ductile iron pipe shall have flange by mechanical type ends unless otherwise shown on the Plans. All tapping sleeves shall be furnished with an outlet for testing.

2) Stainless steel type tapping sleeve shall be Romac Stainless Steel tapping sleeve Model SST-III or county approved equal.

c. All buried valves shall be provided with extended operators manufactured of cold-rolled steel supported by bronze bushed guide brackets at intervals not to exceed 10 feet.

d. Extended operators shall be provided with position indicators and shall be of sufficient length to allow operation of valve from finished grade.

e. Valve boxes shall be provided for all buried valves. Valve boxes shall be in accordance with Charles County Standard Detail W3.01 “Adjustable Valve Box Round Head Sliding Type”.

1) All valve box lids shall read “Sewer”.


02552-6


2) Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, valve boxes shall be provided with cast iron H20 rated locking lids, model Mark V as manufactured by Bingham & Taylor, or equal.

f. Vavles shall be wrapped with a minimum of 8-mil thick polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248. Material and installation shall be in accordance with AWWA C105.

g. All hardware shall be 304 stainless steel.

10. Butterfly Valves

a. Butterfly valves shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C504 as modified herein. Valves shall be Class 150B, suitable for direct burial, and designed for a differential pressure across the valve of 150 psi., and a minimum flow of 15 feet per second for opening and closing.

b. Valves shall be furnished with mechanical joint ends unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. When flanged ends are specified, valves shall be of the short lay length configuration.

c. Valves shall be furnished with a rubber seat, either in the body or on the disc, and a seat mating surface of alloy cast iron conforming to ASTM A 436, Type I, or 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. Valves 24-inch diameter and larger shall have adjustable seats of a design that permits replacement in the field without removal of the valve from the line.

d. Valve shafts shall be stainless steel or monel, and shall be horizontal when the valve is installed in the water main.

e. Valve operators may be worm gear or traveling nut type with a 2-inch square operating nut which shall turn left (counterclockwise) to open. Operators shall be fully enclosed in a gasketed grease-filled enclosure suitable for direct burial, and shall withstand an input of 350 foot pounds to the nut at extreme operator position without damage.

f. Buried valves shall be furnished with an extension stem terminating four (4) feet below finished grade in accordance with the Standard Water and Sewer Details. The operating nut shall be located in a standard valve box and shall include a sealed valve position indicator which shows valve position, and direction and number of turns to open or close the valve.

11. Air/Vacuum Release Valve

a. The air/vacuum valve shall be of the type that automatically releases to atmosphere large amounts of air found in pipe lines during filling cycle and allows air into a line when it is being drained or when a vacuum occurs.

b. The air/vacuum valve shall have a cast iron body and cast iron cover. The internal compound lever mechanism shall be stainless steel and all other internals including float shall be stainless steel to avoid galvanic action. The stainless steel float shall withstand a minimum pressure of 1,000 psi.


02552-7


c. All materials of construction shall be certified in writing to conform to ASTM specifications as follows:

PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

Body and Cover Cast Iron ASTM A48, Class 30

Internal Linkage Stainless Steel Series 300

Float & Internals Stainless Steel Series 300

Seat Buna-N

Exterior Paint Phenolic Primer Red Oxide

FDA approved for potable water

d. All internals shall be easily removed through the top cover without removing the main valve from the lines.

e. An isolating valve shall be installed between force main and air/vacuum release valve for maintenance.

f. Air/Vacuum release valve shall be installed in an easily accessible vault. Vault shall be adequately vented to meet air/vacuum release valve requirement.

g. The valve manufacturer shall furnish installation and maintenance instruction manuals with each valve.

h. Valve shall be APCO series 400 as manufactured by Valve Primer Corporation, Schaumburg, IL, Val-Matic Series #100 as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corp. or County approved equal.

12. Sliding type roadway valve boxes and covers shall be made of gray iron conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30 B and shall meet the dimensional and marking requirements indicated on the Standard Details.

13. Miscellaneous Small Pipe and Appurtenances

a. When indicated on the Standard Details or the Plans, the following materials shall meet the material requirements of the referenced standards or specifications:

1) Galvanized steel pipe - ASTM A 120, Schedule 40.

2) Standard malleable iron fittings, galvanized - ASTM A 153, A 197.

3) Brass pipe - ASTM B 43.

4) Bronze gate valves - FSS WW-V-54c.

14. Valve extension stems shall be manufactured of cold-rolled steel and furnished with a 2-inch square nut.


02552-8


02552.03 Execution

A. General

1. Excavation, foundation preparation, backfill, and compaction shall be as specified in Section 02250.03.

2. Construction methods shall be in accordance with Section 02251.03.

3. Valves shall be restrained, supported, and strapped to tees, crosses, dead ends, stubs, or outlets in accordance with the Standard Details.

B. Buried Gate And Butterfly Valves

1. Buried gate and butterfly valves shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details and at the locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

2. All gate valves 16-inch diameter and smaller and all butterfly valves shall be supported as shown in the Standard Details, and shall be installed with an adjustable roadway valve box.

3. Roadway valve boxes shall be set at right angles to the water main, centered and plumb over the valve operating nut. Backfill shall be compacted under and around valve boxes to insure that no vertical loads are transmitted to the valve operators. Valves box sections shall overlap a minimum of 6 inches.

C. Valves In Vaults Or Manholes

1. Dewatering and air release and vacuum valves shall be installed in manholes in accordance with the Standard Details.

02552.04 Method Of Measurement


02552.05 Basis Of Payment

A. General


B. Water Valves



SECTION 02562

SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES

02562.01 GENERAL

A. Description

Sanitary sewer manhole installation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing and installing County approved precast sanitary sewer manholes and miscellaneous structures of concrete or brick masonry built to the shapes and dimensions shown and in accordance with the Contract Documents.



2. Sanitary sewer force mains; Section 02563.



5. Non-shrink grouts and mortars; Section 03600.

6. Mortar; Section 04100.


1. Materials

The County Engineer will inspect all materials before and after installation to ensure compliance with the Contract Drawings.

2. Field Tests

a. Manholes and other structures will be air vacuum tested for watertightness.

Testing is customarily done before backfilling but may be done after backfilling at the contractors own risk. Visual inspection after backfilling is also required. Vacuum testing shall be witnessed by the County Engineer.

b. Manholes and other structures may be visually inspected by the County

Engineer for leakage. Any visible leak shall be sealed or resealed until all leakage into the unit is satisfactorily eliminated. Infiltration testing shall be conducted only when the sewers attached to the manholes or other


SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES 02562-2

structures are tested in that manner. Testing shall be in accordance with Section 02561.

c. All sanitary sewer manholes or other related structures shall be required to pass a vacuum test that is witnessed by the County Engineer. Sanitary sewer manholes/structures shall have ten (10) inches of mercury applied to the manhole and the time measured for the vacuum to drop from ten (10) inches to nine (9) inches of mercury.

All Sanitary Sewer Manhole/Structure Vacuum tests shall be performed by the contractor/developer. The contractor/developer shall provide all equipment and personnel to perform the required testing. All Sanitary Sewer Manhole/Structure Vacuum testing equipment shall be approved by the Charles County Water and Sewer County Engineer prior to its use. Vacuum testing is recommended to be performed prior to backfilling around the manhole/structure.

Vacuum testing times for sanitary sewer structures other than manholes (e.g., grease interceptors, septic/holding tanks, etc.) shall be based on the times nearest to the equivalent manhole volume or as directed by the County Engineer.

The following are minimum allowable test times for manhole/structure acceptance at the specified vacuum drop:

Depth of Manhole Time Lapse (Seconds) Per (feet) Manhole Diameter (inches)

8

48"

14

60"

18

72"

23 10 17 23 28 12 21 28 34 14 25 32 40 16 28 37 45 18 32 41 51 20 35 46 57 22 39 51 62 24 42 55 68 26 46 60 74 28 49 64 80 30 53 69 85

D. Submittals

1. Shop Drawings

Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for the following materials, and shall include the following information:

a. Manhole-to-pipeline connectors: product description, materials identification,

installation instructions including torque requirements where applicable.



b. Flexible plastic gaskets: product description; handling, storage, installation and use information.


Certificates of compliance shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for the following:

a. Banded-boot and compression type manhole-to-pipe connectors: stating

they meet test requirements of ASTM C 923.

b. Flexible plastic gaskets installed beneath manhole frames: stating the gasket meets test requirements of AASHTO M 198.

3. Submit a copy of the structural calculations for the anti-floatation collar, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Maryland.

02562.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for sanitary sewer manholes.


1. The Contractor may furnish aluminum or plastic-coated steel for manhole steps.

2. The Contractor may furnish precast, cast-in-place, or masonry construction for

miscellaneous sanitary sewer structures, unless otherwise noted.

3. The Contractor may furnish mechanically wedged-in-place, cast-in-place banded- boot, or cast-in-place compression type connectors for manhole-to-pipeline connections, where slope of the pipeline is 10% or less.


1. Granular bedding beneath manhole bases shall meet the gradation requirements

of ASTM-C33/#67 crushed stone or wash gravel, as specified in the Standard Details.

2. Portland cement concrete for cast-in-place structures shall be as specified in

Section 03310.02, Mix Number as indicated on the Standard Details or the Plans.

3. Precast manhole bases, risers, cone sections, grade rings, and precast utility structures shall be as specified in Section 03400.

4. Joints shall be "0" ring compression type meeting the requirements of ASTM C-443

or County approved equal.

5. Quick-setting non-shrink grout shall be as specified in Section 03600.

6. Mortar for brickwork and grade rings shall be as specified in Section 04100.



7. Brick for manhole inverts and miscellaneous structures shall be sewer brick as


8. Curing compound shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type 2, white pigmented and shall be Scotch Kure resin base, Type II, Class B, or County approved equal.

9. Frames, covers, and steps shall be as specified in Section 05500. Covers shall be

labeled in accordance with the Standard Details. Frames and covers shall be factory coated with a coal tar paint meeting the requirements of Federal Military Specification MIL-C-18480A. Steps shall be as dimensioned in the Standard Details.

10. Waterproofing for exterior of manholes and miscellaneous structures shall be as


11. Interior manhole amined-cured high solids epoxy coating shall be Series 61 Tneme- liner by Tnemec Co., Inc. or County approved equal.

12. Manhole-to-Pipeline Connectors

a. Water-stop type connectors shall be only used when slope of the connecting

pipeline is greater than 10%. Water-stop type connections shall be the Water-Stop Ring as manufactured by Certain Teed; Type CMA Adapter as manufactured by Fernco, Inc.; or County approved equal.

b. Mechanically wedge-in-place type connectors shall be Link-Seal as

manufactured by the Thunderline Corp; Z-Lok XP as manufactured by A-Lok Products, Inc.; Kor-N-Seal as manufactured by National Pollution Control Systems, Inc.; or County approved equal.

c. Cast-in-place type connectors shall be:

1) Banded-boot type: Z-Lok as manufactured by A-Lok Products, Inc.;

the L. J. Flexible Sleeve as manufactured by GHA Lock Joint, Inc.; or County approved equal.

2) Compression type: A-Lok as manufactured by A-Lok Products, Inc.;

or County approved equal.

13. Flexible plastic gaskets between the manhole or grade rings and the manhole frame shall be extruded rope, type B, 3/4 inch minimum diameter, butyl based, meeting requirements of AASHTO M 198 as manufactured by Hamilton Kent Mfg. Kent Co., Seal No. 2; Concrete Products Supply Company, E-2 Stik; ADCO Products, ST-30 Flex-Lok; or County approved equal.

14. Bentonite shall be in granular form as specified in Section 07130.02 for

waterproofing at pipe penetrations.

15. Provide anti-floatation collars as shown in the drawings. 02562.03 EXECUTION

A. General



1. Excavation, foundation preparation, backfill, and compaction shall be as specified

in Section 02250.

2. Manholes and drop connections shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details and as specified herein.

3. Miscellaneous structures shall be constructed where shown and as indicated on the

Plans or as directed by the County Engineer.

a. Cast-in-place concrete construction shall be as specified in Section 03300.03.

b. Brick construction shall be as specified in Section 04200.03.

4. Reinforced concrete, ductile iron and cast iron pipelines connected to manholes and

other structures shall have a pipe joint not more than 2 feet from the exterior wall of the structure.

B. Manhole Installation

1. Manholes shall be installed and frames and covers set as pipeline installation

progresses. The manhole vertical axis shall be plumb and directly over the centerline of the pipeline unless otherwise shown or directed.

2. Manholes shall be watertight. Exteriors shall be coated with waterproofing in

accordance with Section 07100.03 and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Channels for receiving and passing water shall be formed in the bottom of

manholes as shown or directed. All such channels shall be lined with brick, brick and split vitrified pipe, or precast concrete channels as manufactured by Atlantic Concrete Products, Inc. Channels shall slope smoothly and evenly and a channel bench constructed to the height of the crown of the highest pipe. Channels and a 2 foot length of pipe with a watertight plug shall be installed in the manhole for future extensions where shown on the Plans or directed by the County Engineer.

4. Pipes shall be cut flush with the inside wall of the manhole. Exterior of pipe

penetration shall be waterproofed in accordance with 07130.03.

5. The frame and cover shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Details.

a. Obtain proper grade by using a minimum of one 2 or 3 inch thick solid precast grade ring and a maximum combination of 4 rings. The precast grade rings shall be set in full beds of mortar not less than 1/4 nor more than 1 1/4-inches thick. Anchor bolt holes shall be packed tight with mortar, with the mortar in the holes of the top ring finished flush with the ring surface. All horizontal, circumferential, and vertical mortar joints inside and outside of the structure shall be pointed for their full width. Depth of pointing shall not exceed 3/8 inch. Mortar mix shall include a bonding agent in accordance with Section 04100 of these specifications.

b. Place two rings of flexible gasket on the precast concrete adjustment ring

below the manhole frame so one ring will be under and near the inside and



the other under and near the outside of the frame flange. There shall be a minimum overlap of 2-inches of the ends of the flexible gaskets.

c. Install frame and cover set flush with existing surfaces, to new elevations

shown on the Plans or as directed by the County Engineer, all in accordance with Standard Details. For existing manholes, provide anchor bolts by drilling into the existing manhole wall and provide a neoprene gasket between the frame and manhole structure.

d. Water tight bolt down manhole frames and covers shall be used in all non-

paved utility rights of ways, easements where inflow may present a problem, and where indicated on the approved plans. Vented bolt down manhole frames and covers shall be used in all non-paved utility rights of ways, easements, and where indicated on the approved plans.

In non-paved and non-maintained areas the top of the pre-cast manhole shall extend twenty four inches above the proposed finished grade or the 100-year flood plain elevation, which ever is higher. The frame and cover shall be painted with two coats of safety yellow lead free industrial enamel paint as manufactured by Duron or County approved equal.

6. All manholes (existing and new) receiving flows from sewage force mains or low

pressure sewers shall receive an interior coating system of amine-cured high solids epoxy. Application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified below.

a. Surface preparation - Provide brush-off abrasive blast cleaning to remove

loose surface concrete and contaminants and provide "tooth" for good coating adhesion. Repair all interior surface imperfections with epoxy mortar in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Remove all dust from surface to receive the interior coating. All concrete surfaces shall be dry.

b. First coat - Amine-cured high solids epoxy. Thin a maximum of 10% using

only thinners specified by the coating manufacturer and apply to prepared surface via brush, air spray, airless spray, or as allowed by the coating manufacturer. Apply at a rate which results in a thickness of 8.0 to 12.0 dry mils.

c. Second coat - Amine-cured high solids epoxy. Apply un-thinned coating at

a rate which results in a thickness of 8.0 to 12.0 dry mils. Observe the manufacturer's recommended recoat time. The first coat shall be a lighter color than the second coat. The total dry film thickness shall be 16.0 to 24.0 mils. All manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed.


A. Sanitary Sewer Manholes


B. Drop Connections



RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE C. Miscellaneous Structures



A. General


B. Sanitary Sewer Manholes


C. Manhole Drop Connections


D. Miscellaneous Structures


E. Waterproofing


SPECIFICATIONS-MAY 1996

SECTION 02563

SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS

02551.01 GENERAL

A. Description

Sanitary sewer force main installation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing and installing pressure rated pipe, fittings, and appurtenances of size and type shown on the Plans, installed on firm foundation true to line and grade and in accordance with the Contract Documents.






1. Materials

a. The County Engineer will inspect all materials before and after installation to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Field Tests

a. General

1) After installation, force mains will be initially inspected by the County Engineer and shall be Contractor tested for compliance with these Specifications. Initial inspections and tests will not be conducted until at least 48 hours after all concrete thrust blocks and anchors have been constructed and backfilling completed on the section of force main being tested. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment necessary to perform the specified tests.

2) The force main and appurtenances shall be tested in accordance with Section 02551.01, Article C except as modified herein.

3) Chlorination will not be required.

4) The Contractor shall schedule all tests with the County Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of the test, and shall conduct all acceptance testing in the presence of the County Engineer. The County will witness one test and perform one Substantial Completion Inspection and one Final Inspection at no cost to the Contractor. If the project is released for service following Substantial Completion acceptance tests, the County will perform a final inspection if required at no cost to the Contractor. Should the pipeline fail the first County witnessed test, the Contractor shall reimburse the County for all costs resulting from such additional tests so required until the pipeline passes the test(s). The Contractor shall also reimburse the County for the cost of inspection if the Contractor is not prepared for any test, additional retests, and additional Substantial Completions including Partial

SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS 02563-2


Substantial Completion Inspections or additional Final Inspections. Reimbursement shall be made prior to the next Substantial Completion or Final Inspection.

5) Force mains will be tested from end to end to a maximum of 1500 feet unless otherwise approved by the County Engineer. Pressure and leakage tests shall be performed.

6) If the force main or any section or component thereof fails the tests and/or inspection, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's own expense, repair or replace any defective component and retest the entire force main until all requirements are met. Should the work be done by the County in the case of an emergency, the Contractor shall reimburse the County for the actual cost of replacing such materials and making such installations.

7) Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be required in accordance with Section 02551.01.C.2.c.

D. Submittals

1. Shop Drawings

a. Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for the following materials, and include the following information:

1) Plug valves and appurtenances: product description, pressure rating, parts list, detailed assembly drawings, and maintenance requirements and procedures.

2) Sewage air release and combination air/vacuum valves and appurtenances: product description, pressure rating, parts list, detailed assembly drawings, and maintenance requirements and procedures.


a. Certificates of compliance shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for pipe and fittings stating the item supplied is in accordance with requirements specified in Section 02551, "Water Mains."

02563.02 MATERIALS


1. The County will not furnish any materials for sanitary sewer force mains.

2. The Contractor may obtain potable water from the County's potable water system for testing the low pressure sewer system. The Contractor shall contact the Department of Fiscal Services, Billing Section, for requirements. A backflow prevention device must be placed in accordance with the Standard Details prior to drawing County water.





1. Washed gravel for air release and vacuum valve manhole fill shall meet the gradation requirements of ASTM C33, size number 67, as specified in Section 02621.02.

2. Portland cement concrete for pipe buttresses and anchorages shall be Mix No. 1 as specified in Section 03310.02.

3. Ductile iron and PVC pipe and fittings shall be as specified in Section 02551.02. Pressure rating or class shall be as noted in the Contract Documents. Cement lining and coatings shall be required on ductile iron pipe (DIP) and fittings. PVC pipe and fittings shall be as specified in Section 02551, “Water Mains”.

4. Valves

a. Resilient Seat Gate Valves

1) Utilize Resilient Seat Gate Valves per material requirements in Section 02552.02. Approved valve shall be U.S. Pipe Metroseal 250 or County approved equal.

5. Valve boxes shall be as specified in Section 02552.02 except the covers shall be labeled "SEWER."

6. Sewage Air-Vacuum Valves

a. Sewage Air-Vacuum Valves shall allow unrestricted venting or re-entry of air through the valve body during filling or draining of the forcemain. The valve shall automatically open to prevent the formation of a vacuum within the pipeline.

b. Sewage Air-Vacuum Valves shall have an elongated cast iron body and cover. The valve shall incorporate two stainless steel floats connected by a stainless steel float guide, guide bushing, baffle, and Buna-N seal.



Body & cover & baffle Cast Iron ASTM A126 GR.B

Upper Float Stainless Steel ASTM A240

Lower Float Stainless Steel ASTM A240 T304

Stem, Guide Bushing Stainless Steel Series T300

Seat Buna-N Nitrile Rubber


FDA Approved for Potable Water



d. An isolating valve shall be installed between the forcemain and air release valve. The valve shall be a plug valve meeting the requirements of paragraph C.4 of Section 02563.02.

Plug isolation valves shall be equipped with gear actuators and adapters for 2-inch operating nuts. The valve shall also be equipped with an extension stem bringing the operating nut to within 12-inches of the ground surface. The installation shall meet the requirements of paragraph C.4 of Section 02563.02.

e. Sewage air vacuum valves shall be installed in easily accessible pre-cast manhole vaults. The vault shall be sized to properly house the valve assembly as well as providing sufficient lateral and vertical clearances to facilitate valve removal and maintenance.

Where possible, the vault shall be drained to an adjacent sanitary manhole. Vaults shall be adequately vented to meet air release valve requirements.

f. All internals shall be easily removed through the top cover without removing the valve body from the forcemain.

g. Valve shall be Sewage Air Vacuum Valve APCO Series 400 SAVV as manufactured by Valve Primer Corporation; Val-Matic Series 300 as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation; or approved equal.

7. Sewage Air Release Valves

a. Sewage air release valves shall be of the type designed to operate while the pipeline is in service (under pressure) and shall automatically release pressurized air, gas, or vapor through the orifice without spillage or spurt.

b. Sewage air release valves shall have an elongated cast iron body and cover. The internal linkage, float and stem shall be constructed of stainless steel. The valve body and float shall withstand a minimum shell test pressure of 500 psi.



Body & cover Cast Iron ASTM A126 GR.B

Internals Stainless Steel Series T300

Float Stainless Steel ASTM A240 T304

Seat Buna-N Nitrile Rubber



d. The valve manufacturer shall furnish installation and maintenance manuals with each valve.



e. An isolating valve shall be installed between the forcemain and air release valve. The valve shall be a plug valve meeting the requirements of paragraph C.4 of Section 02563.02.

f. Sewage air release valves shall be installed in easily accessible pre-cast manhole vaults. The vault shall be sized to properly house the valve assembly as well as providing sufficient lateral and vertical clearances to facilitate valve removal and maintenance.


g. All internals shall be easily removed through the top cover without removing the valve body from the forcemain.

h. Valve shall be Sewage Air Release Valve APCO Series 400 SARV as manufactured by Valve Primer Corporation; Val-Matic Series 48 as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation; or approved equal.

8. Combination Sewage Air Valves

a. Combination sewage air valves shall be of the single body, double orifice design. The combination valve shall allow large volumes of air to escape or re-enter the force main through the large orifice during filling or draining of the line. While the main is under pressure, the combination valve shall automatically release pressurized air, gas or vapor through the small orifice without spillage. The small and large orifices shall act independently of each other.

b. The sewage combination air valve shall have an elongated cast iron body and cover. The float and internal stem shall be stainless steel supported by a Delrin or cast iron leverage frame. All internals shall be easily removed through the top cover without removing the valve body from the force main.



Body & Cover Cast Iron ASTM A126 GR.B

Float Stainless Steel ASTM A240 T304

Stem Stainless Steel Series T300

Seat Burna N Nitrile Rubber

Plug Brass or Stainless Steel ASTM A240 T304

Leverage Frame Delrin or Cast Iron ASTM D1233,

ASTM A126 GR.B





d. The valve manufacturer shall furnish installation and maintenance manuals with each valve.

e. An isolating valve shall be installed between the force main and combination sewage air valve. The valve shall be a plug valve meeting the requirements of paragraph C.4 of Section 02563.02.

Plug isolation valves shall be equipped with gear actuators and adapters for 2-inch operating nuts. The valve shall also be equipped with an extension stem bringing the operating nut to within 12-inches of the ground surface. The installation shall meet the requirements of paragraph C.4 of Section 02563.02.

f. Combination sewage air valves shall be installed in easily accessible precast manhole in accordance with Charles County Standard Detail W3.08 “2-inch Air Valve in Manhole for 24-inch and Smaller Pipe”. The vault shall be sized to properly house the valve assembly as well as providing sufficient lateral and vertical clearances to facilitate valve removal and maintenance.


g. Valve shall be combination sewage air valve D-025 Combination Air Valve – Short Version; or approved equal.

02563.03 EXECUTION

A. Trench excavation, foundation preparation, backfill, and compaction shall be as specified in section 02250.

B. Force main installation shall be as specified in section 02551, "Water Mains," except chlorination is not required.

C. Pipe bedding, thrust and anchor blocks, and force main appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the standard details for water.

D. Valves

1. Plug valve installation shall be as specified in Section 02552.03, B. for water valves and the following:

a. The valve shall be installed so that the plug tends to seat when closed against the normal direction of flow.

b. Under no circumstances shall the valve be installed such that the plug is in the lower portion of the valve body when the valve is in the open position.

2. Resilient Seat Gate Valves installation shall be as specified in Section 02552.03.

E. Sewage air release and combination air release/vacuum valves shall be installed in accordance with the standard details for sewage.




A. Force Main


B. Isolation, Sewage Air Release and Combination Air/Vacuum Valves



A. General


B. Force Main


C. Isolation, Sewage Air Release and Combination Air/Vacuum Valves


END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 02567-1 TESTING OF PROCESS PIPE

SECTION 02567

TESTING OF PROCESS PIPE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pressure testing of force mains and pressure piping systems.

B. Test requirements.

C. Required replacement or repair if test fails.

D. Project Records.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02551 - WATER MAINS

B. Section 02552 - WATER VALVES AND APPURTENANCES

C. Section 02563 - SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AWWA C-600 - Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

1.04 TEST REQUIREMENTS

A. All piping systems shall be tested in accordance with AWWA Standard C-600 unless specified otherwise in the piping schedules.

B. One of the following procedures shall be used, as required by the pipe schedule:

1. Procedure A - Shall consist of a 2 hour test at 100 psi.

2. Procedure B - Shall consist of a 2 hour test at 150 psi.

3. Procedure C - Shall consist of a 2 hour test at 50 psi.

4. Procedure D - Shall consist of an exfiltration test where the pipe is filled with clear water to provide a head of at least 5 feet above the top of the pipe at the highest point of the pipeline under test, or 1.5 times the maximum working pressure as determined by the Engineer, whichever is higher, and then by measuring the loss of water from the line by the amount which must be added to maintain the original level.

a. In this test, the test period (for taking measurements) shall not be less than four hours.

5. Procedure E – Shall consist of a pressure test using air only. All piping shall be tested at a pressure of at least 1.5 times the working pressure for a period of not less than two hours.


6. Procedure F - In the case of double walled piping systems, the secondary containment pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to not less than 10 psi at the highest point of the system.

a. This test shall be maintained for a sufficient time to soap and complete visual inspection of all joints and connections, but for at least 6 hours.

b. No loss in pressure will be allowed.

c. The Contractor is advised that there are no pneumatic pressure test limitations on non-metallic piping systems.

d. Consult piping manufacturer prior to testing.

7. When no test method for inside process pressure piping is specified in the Pipe Schedule, the following procedure shall be used.

a. All newly installed pipe or any valved section thereof shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure 50 percent in excess of the working pressure at the point of testing, but in no case less than 50 psi in any section of the pipe being tested, for a period of two hours.

8. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. The section tested shall be driptight with no signs of leakage.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. For each test, submit completed GHD Form 31 (see form at end of this section).

1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit record documents in accordance with General Provisions and Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

B. Contractor to complete and submit for each test the GHD Form 31 for recording data for flushing and testing pressure pipe (see form at end of this Section).

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit proof of testing as required by local, county or state agencies and this section.

1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Measure length of test section.

B. Measure quantity of water used to maintain test pressure during test period.

C. Measurements required to complete GHD Form 31.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Provide 48 hour notice to local water department (Owner) when water for flushing and testing is required.

B. Owner of existing water system to operate all valves and hydrants unless Contractor has been authorized by Owner to operate water systems valves and hydrants.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WATER SUPPLY

A. Water supplied for flushing and testing shall be clean, clear and from sources acceptable to the Engineer.

B. All water for flushing and testing shall be furnished and disposed of by the Contractor at his expense.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall supply all plugs, pumps, weirs, gauges, etc., necessary to conduct the tests, including means to accurately measure the quantity of water used to maintain test pressure during the test period.

B. Contractor shall provide temporary restraint of all piping segments including unrestrained adapters, coupling, and expansion joints during pressure and leakage testing.

C. Flush all piping systems with water prior to testing.

3.02 TESTING

A. Pressure and leakage tests shall be conducted on all force main and pressure pipe.

B. The Engineer shall witness all tests.

C. All test results shall be recorded on GHD Form 31 supplied by the Engineer.

D. Pressurization - Each valved section of pipe shall be slowly filled with water. The specified test pressure, based on the elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge, shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe.

E. Air Removal - Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe and valves.

F. Examination - Any exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and joints shall be examined carefully during the test. Any damaged or defective pipe, fittings, or valves that are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated.

G. All visible leaks, regardless of the amount, shall be repaired.

H. If the section being tested fails to pass the pressure or leakage test, the Contractor shall determine, at his own expense, the source or sources of leakage, and he shall permanently repair or replace all defective materials and/or workmanship.

1. The extent and type of repair as well as results shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

2. The completed pipe installation shall then be retested and required to meet the pressure and leakage requirements of this test.


I. Testing and retesting shall be completed prior to final paving.

J. The use of sealants, applied from outside or inside of pipe, is not acceptable.

K. Pressure gauges shall read in 1 psi increments for pressure tests >25 psi and 0.5 psi increments for pressure tests <25 psi.

L. Pumps or devices for makeup water to calculate the leakage shall be provided with calibration containers.

M. All test water must be removed from the interior of all stainless steel pipe by draining, blowing, mopping, etc. Water must not be allowed to stand for long periods of time within stainless steel pipe.

(continued)


FLUSHING AND TESTING OF PRESSURIZED PIPES TABULATION SHEET

Job No. ________ Location ______________________________________ Contract No. ___ Contractor ____________________________________ Project _________________________________________________________ Contractor’s Representative _______________ Observed by _________ FLUSHING Date __________ Weather ______________ Temperature _____________ Section Flushed __________________ ft. of ____-inch diameter pipe Line Flushed ______________ hrs. ________ min. @ _________gal/min Line Flushed Through _________________ Manhole # ________________ PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING Date __________ Weather ______________ Temperature _____________ Section Tested __________________________________________________ ___ ft. of ___-inch diameter _____ pipe in ___-ft. laying lengths Time Started ______ Time Finished _______ Elapsed Time __________ Test Pressure: Start _______ psi Finish _____ psi Water to Make up Initial Pressure _______________________ gallons Allowable leakage, as calculated _____ gallons

_____ gallons (allowable leakage from AWWA C600 or Technical Provisions Section _______)

Pass ____ Fail ____

L = SD P0.5 133,200*

L = Allowable leakage in gallons/hour S = Length of pipe tested (linear feet) D = Nominal diameter of pipe (inches) P = Average pressure during test, psi

*Refer to C600 for additional allowance leakage against closed metal-seated valves.

END OF SECTION

SPECIFICATIONS - MAY 1996 REVISED MARCH 2001

SECTION 02610

SUBGRADE PREPARATION

02610.01 GENERAL

A. Description

Subgrade preparation shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, preparation, protection, and maintenance of the subgrade before construction of any succeeding courses in accordance with the Contract Documents.


1. Construction Stakeout; Section 01300.

2. General excavation; Section 02210.


4. Spring control; Section 02511.


6. Field Test Reports, GP- 6.11.


1. The County Engineer reserves the right to inspect all materials and work to ensure

compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Quality assurance for related earthwork shall be as specified in Sections 02210.01 and 02260.01.

D. Submittals

1. Shop Drawings

Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in Section 01305 (Submittals) for all soil stabilization fabric furnished. The shop drawings shall include general product information and a tabulation of the physical properties of the fabric.


Certificates of compliance shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for the soil stabilization fabric stating that the soil stabilization fabric meets the materials requirements specified in Section 02610.02.

3. Submittals for earthwork materials for subgrade preparation shall be as specified in Section

02260.01.


SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02610-2

02610.02 MATERIALS A. Material Furnished by the County

None.


The Contractor m ay use suitable materials obtained from General, Structure, Borrow, Trench, and other excavations for subgrade preparation.


1. Soil Stabilization Fabric

a. The soil stabilization fabric shall be a fabric consisting of long chain polymeric

filaments or yarns, such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polyamide, or polyvinylidene-chloride, formed into a stable network.

b. The fabric shall be inert to chemicals com m only encountered in soil and to

hydrocarbons.

c. The fabric shall be resistant to mildew, rot, and ultraviolet light exposure.

d. The fabric shall conform to the following test criteria:

Test and M ethod Specification Lim its

Grab Tensile Strength AST M D 1682 lbs. min. 115 Tensile Elongation ASTM D 1682 % m in. 50 Burst Strength AST M D 3786 psi min. 190 Trapezoidal Tear Strength ASTM D 1117 lbs. min. 45

2. Earth Materials

The earth materials to be used in the subgrade shall be acceptable soils encountered in the various classifications of excavation on the Project, including borrow excavation, or other specially designated materials which may be specified.

02610.03 EXECUTION

A. General

After roadway and site excavations and embankments have been completed and the requirements for rough subgrading as described in Section 02210.03 have been met, the subgrade shall be fine graded and compacted to a density not less than 97 percent of the maximum dry density as specified in T180. In-place soil density tests shall be performed horizontally every 500 linear feet, or fraction thereof, for each lane. Test locations shall be staggered.

1. In accordance with Article V, Section 5.6.B of the Road Ordinance, the subgrade on which

pavement for a public road is planned must have a minimum California Bearing Ratio (C.B.R.) value of 7. W here the subgrade is less than a C.B.R. of 7, a redesign of the pavement section by a geotechnical engineer, a professional engineer, registered in the State



of Maryland shall be required and submitted to the County for review and approval prior to the placement of subbase material. The appropriate number of bulk soil samples shall be obtained from the subgrade soils to conduct a C.B.R. test for a minimum of one test per subdivision or for each change in soil type encountered.

2. In accordance with Detail # R/2.47 for Pedestrian Travel Ways of the Charles County

Standard Detail Manual, the subgrade soils must be compacted to a density not less than 95% of the maximum dry density . In-place soil density tests shall be performed horizontally every 1,000 linear feet, or fraction thereof for asphalt and concrete pathways.

B. Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material

All soft and unstable material and any other portions of subgrade which will not properly compact, or serve the purpose intended, shall be removed, disposed of, and replaced with specified material. The replacement material shall be compacted to a density of not less than 97%, under paved areas and roadway shoulders, and not less than 90%, under areas not intended to support vehicles, of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method C or D as applicable. No separate measurement and payment will be made for removal and replacement of unsuitable subgrade materials.

C. Soil Stabilization Fabric

1. W here shown on the Plans, or directed by the County Engineer, soil stabilization fabric shall

be installed in conjunction with subgrade preparation.

2. The subsoil shall be prepared to the lines and grades shown on the Plans. All protruding sharp objects shall be removed from the subsoil prior to placing the fabric. W here sections of the fabric adjoin one another, the sections shall be overlapped 3 feet in the direction in which the overlay material will be spread.

3. Embankment or borrow material shall be backdumped onto the fabric and spread and

compacted in lifts in accordance with Section 02260.03. D. Subgrade Control

The subgrade surface shall be brought to line and grade and shaped to the cross section indicated on the Plans. A string line and grade stakes shall be set in accordance with Section 01300.03.C.3. The finished subgrade under paved areas shall not deviate more than 1/2 inch from grade thus established, and shall be compacted and smoothed over its full width by use of an approved smooth- faced, steel-wheeled roller. In locations where rolling is not feasible, compaction by mechanical tampers or vibratory compactors will be required.

E. Bleeder Ditches

The Contractor shall at all times maintain adequate open bleeder ditches along the subgrade to keep it thoroughly drained. Bleeder ditches will not be measured or paid for separately but will be considered as incidental to the subgrade preparation.

F. Subgrade Maintenance

Maintenance of subgrade shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor will be required to take precautionary measures to prevent dam age by heavy loads or equipment. Any defects or dam age shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense before placement of any succeeding courses.

1. Subgrade Restoration

Should an extended period of time expire between original preparation and final covering, all restoration shall be at the Contractor's expense.



2. Subgrade Approval

No subsequent cover or surfacing material shall be deposited upon a frozen subgrade nor until the subgrade has been accepted by the County Engineer.

G. Permanent Subgrade Underdrains

1. W here shown on the Plans, or directed, permanent subgrade underdrains shall be

constructed under paved areas. Subgrade underdrains shall be constructed as specified in Section 02510.03 and shall extend through the shoulder or median from the edges of the road pavement to a side ditch, embankment slope, or other approved outlet.

2. Locations, unless otherwise specified, shall be at low points and spaced at 25 foot intervals

for a distance of 125 feet on each side of the low points; then at intervals of 100 feet to within 125 feet of the summit.

3. After placing of pavement courses and before completion of the shoulder or median areas,

trenches shall be cut and shaped 24 inches wide, backfilled to the underside of shoulder material and to the underside of specified topsoil thickness in the median or graded areas using selected backfill as specified in Section 02245.02. The bottom of the trench at the end adjacent to the paved area shall be at least 2 inches below subgrade wherever it is possible to provide a proper gradient and outlet for a drain at that elevation.


A. Subgrade Preparation


B. Soil Stabilization Fabric


C. Subgrade Underdrains



A. General


B. Subgrade Preparation


C. Soil Stabilization Fabric


D. Subgrade Underdrains

RESERVED FOR FUTURE


SECTION 02730

GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK

02730.01 GENERAL

A. Description

General electrical work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing, installing, and testing for all electrical items.


1. Electrical conduit and fittings; Section 02731

2. Electrical pull and junction boxes; Section 02733

3. Concrete foundations; Section 02734.

4. Electrical cable, wire, and connectors; Section 02735.

5. All Sections of Division 16.


1. Inspection

The County Engineer will inspect all materials and work to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Testing

a. General

The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all personnel and equipment required to successfully perform the following tests and shall furnish six certified copies of complete test reports to the County Engineer.

Not less than 30 days prior to the commencement of each required test, the Contractor shall submit to the County Engineer the types, styles, or catalog numbers of all testing equipment to be used for the tests. A written certification shall be included stating when the testing equipment was last calibrated by a MSHA approved testing agency not more than 120 days prior to the date when the tests are to be performed. All tests are to be performed in the presence of the County Engineer. The Contractor shall provide 72 hours notice prior to testing.

GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK 02730-2


Any defect found in the completed installation, in materials, specified equipment performance, and/or workmanship, as a result of these tests, shall be repaired and/or replaced promptly without any additional cost to the county.

b. Ground Resistance Testing

The ground resistance testing shall use a megger ground tester using the null balance Fall of Potential Method. No corrected reading greater than 25 ohms will be accepted. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the County Engineer a list of readings itemized and identified for all items for which grounding systems are required.

The Contractor shall test cable installed and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the County Engineer that all conductors are continuous and free from short circuits and unspecified grounds and that all circuits are properly connected in accordance with the Plans.

c. Circuit Testing

A circuit test to determine the insulation resistance shall be made for all cables of every circuit except those installed in lighting structures. The testing shall conform to the MSHA testing requirements. Units of measurements for reporting shall be expressed in megohms. The cable insulation resistance shall exceed 10 megohms at 500 volts D.C. Except loop detector wire and loop detector lead-in shall have a minimum of 100 megohms at 500 volts D.C.

d. Performance Test

When specified or otherwise required, the Contractor shall furnish the services of the equipment manufacturer's factory-trained servicemen or technicians to start up and/or test the equipment.

A performance test using the design power source shall be conducted prior to Substantial Completion Acceptance. The Contractor shall operate the lighting system, including automatic control equipment and other specified apparatus, or equipment for 30 consecutive days without interruption or failure. If any component fails, it shall be immediately replaced, and the test shall be continued. The contractor shall record each fault, the method and date of correction of each, and the beginning and ending of the 30 day test period. If more than 5% of any system components under test fail, the component shall be replaced and then the 30 day test period shall commence again for the entire system.

e. Illumination Testing

An illumination test shall be conducted by the Contractor for all lighting systems to determine the ground-level illumination characteristics of the



lighting installation. The test shall conform to procedures approved by MSHA.

Cost for power necessary to conduct tests will be borne by the Contractor.

D. Submittals

1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01305, Submittals and as specified herein.

2. Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall submit to the County Engineer for approval all necessary documents such as detail plans, drawings, photographs, photometric data, schematics, templates, make, model number and specifications of all apparatus and equipment the Contractor proposes to furnish. They shall show clearly the design, construction dimensions, quantities, and any other information as may be necessary or desirable for a proper understanding of the equipment offered. All material sheets, curves, etc. defining the above shall identify the specific project to which the material applies; and if more than one catalog number, style, or type is listed on one sheet, the item to be furnished shall be clearly marked.

The Contractor shall not order electrical material until written approval of the submission is received from the County Engineer. Approval by the County Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for erroneous or inconsistent dimensions, notations, omissions, or other errors, or the proper functioning of the complete installation.

3. Certificates

The Contractor shall, upon completion of the work, deliver to the County Engineer a final certificate of approval from the Charles County Permits Department, prior to final payment or Final Acceptance. The Contractor shall apply and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspection fees required. Four copies of certificates of compliance shall be delivered to the County Engineer upon completion of the work.

02730.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for general electrical work.


Not applicable.




All materials and equipment installed as part of the permanent installation shall be new, UL(Underwriters' Laboratories) listed, or labeled, and shall conform to NFPA 70 (NEC), NESC, MEMA, ISC, and that of all applicable Charles County codes. Insofar as practical, all major items of electrical materials and equipment, such as lamps and luminaries, different parts of lighting standards, etc., shall be produced by the same manufacturer.

02730.03 EXECUTION

A. General

All installations shall conform to NFPA 70 (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code, and all applicable State and Charles County Codes governing the work, and to the rules and regulations of the electrical utility serving the facility. All work shall be performed by or under the direction of a licensed Master Electrician.

B. Grounding System

1. Grounding systems shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, latest edition of the National Electric Safety Code (NESC) and as hereinafter specified and/or indicated on the Plans.

2. For ground wire and rod materials, refer to Section 950.06.04 of the "MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, (1993)".

3. For installation of grounding systems, refer to Section 804.03 of the "MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, (1993)".

4. For testing of grounding systems, refer to Section 02730.01.C.2.

C. Operation of Equipment

1. The Contractor shall lubricate, clean, adjust, and test all equipment and systems in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction prior to initial operation. Equipment shall not be operated unless proper safety devices and controls are operational. The Contractor shall furnish all maintenance and service for equipment which is operated during construction and protect the equipment.

2. Where specified or otherwise required the Contractor shall furnish the services of the manufacturer's factory-trained servicemen or technicians to start up the equipment.

3. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean and restore all equipment to new conditions.

D. Damage to Other Work

1. Damage

All cutting or damage to existing structures, surfaces or installations shall be repaired at the expense of the Contractor. All such repairs or patching shall be



done by mechanics of the appropriate trade and shall be neatly done and in such fashion as to leave no readily apparent joint or change in appearance, and to leave no structural or other weakness.

2. Waterproofed Surfaces

No electrical work shall pierce any waterproofed or dampproofed surface without the permission of the County Engineer and where such condition occurs, the work shall be waterproofed or dampproofed to meet the standards of the original specifications to the satisfaction of the County Engineer.




SECTION 02731

ELECTRICAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

02731.01 GENERAL

A. Description

Electrical conduit and fittings shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing conduit and fittings of the types and sizes shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Contract Document or as directed by the County Engineer.



2. General electrical work; Section 02730.

3. Electrical pull and junction boxes; Section 02733.



D. Submittals

Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for all conduit and fittings supplied. The shop drawings shall include general material information and working drawings giving all conduit sizes and layouts, the overall diameters and cross sectional areas of the actual conductors to be installed, and the sum of the areas of the conductors in each conduit.

02731.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for electrical conduit and fittings.


Not applicable.


1. Metallic Conduit and Fittings

Refer to Section 921.07.01 of the "MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, (1993)".

ELECTRICAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 02731-2


2. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS


3. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS


4. PVC COATED METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS


02731.03 EXECUTION

A. General

All materials and workmanship shall conform to the rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and that of all applicable Charles County codes.

B. Bends

Bends shall be of long sweep, free from kinks and of such easy curvature as to permit the drawing in of conductors without damage to the conductors. The radius of curvature of the inner edge of bends shall not be less than 10 times the inside diameter of the conduit, except as may be otherwise noted on the Plans or in the "Special Provisions." Conduits shall not be flattened or distorted. The total angle of all bends between any two boxes or fittings shall not exceed two quarter bends. Bends in conduit shall not damage the protective coating.

C. Exposed Conduits

Exposed conduit runs shall be parallel to or at right angles to walls, slabs, girders, etc. and in locations giving greatest accessibility for painting and least accumulation of dirt. All exposed conduit runs shall be attached to steel, masonry, concrete, or timber by stainless steel straps, clamps, or hangers of an approved type, held at not less than two points by stainless steel bolts or lag screws. The runs shall be supported at not greater than 10 feet centers on horizontal runs unless otherwise specified and not less than 2 inches clear of the supporting members. Conduits mounted on structural steel members shall be securely clamped to prevent rattling and wear. Exposed conduits shall be installed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls and ceilings with right angle turns consisting of symmetrical bends or cast steel fittings. Offsets shall be avoided where possible, but when required an approved hickey or conduit bending machine shall be used.

D. Capping Conduit Ends



During construction, all ends of conduits shall be capped by a manufactured cap or pipe to prevent introduction of foreign material into conduit. All open ends of conduit provided for future use shall also be capped. All conduits shall be installed so that they will drain, and necessary holes and drains for this purpose shall be made as directed. Prior to the installation of wiring, manufactured caps or plugs shall be removed and an insulated bonding bushing for GRC, or bell-end fittings for PVC conduit installed.

E. Conduit Encasement

All conduits, boxes, etc. to be encased in concrete must be accurately placed and rigidly held in position so that no variation from line or grade occurs when concrete is placed.

Conduits, fittings, and boxes shall be stored under cover and above ground.

Immediately after the encasement of the conduit, each conduit run and all fittings shall be cleared by a pull-through mandrel type device inserted in the presence of the County Engineer to remove spilled concrete and/or debris. Immediately prior to the installation of conductors in any run, the conduits comprising that run shall again be checked. Any and all obstructions shall be removed to the satisfaction of the County Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

F. Conduits, Fittings, and Boxes

Conduit runs shall be made with as few couplings as standard lengths will permit. Rigid steel conduit connections shall be threaded.

Conduits shall have threaded ends coated with an approved material and be of sufficient length so that they will butt squarely and tightly in the coupling. Long running threads will not be permitted. Conduits shall be installed so as to be continuous and watertight between boxes and/or equipment.

Where conduits cross expansion joints in the structure, or where otherwise specified, they shall be provided with expansion fittings of an approved type. The electrical continuity of the conduit runs across the expansion fittings shall be assured by approved fittings.

Nonmetallic conduit shall be connected by a solvent welding process. Fittings for Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) conduit shall be watertight cast ferrous compression type.

Pull boxes or conduit bodies shall be used at conduit terminations. Conduits terminating in cast iron junction boxes shall be threaded into hubs with bonding screws furnished and installed on the interior of the boxes. Conduits terminating in cast iron junction boxes without hubs shall be secured with two lock nuts with an insulated grounding bushing furnished and installed.

All conduit connections to cabinets or panels shall be made using concentric punched or out holes. Entrances into sheet metal enclosures made using incendiary methods such as oxy-acetylene torches, propane torches, or similar means are absolutely prohibited.



Cabinets, boxes, and enclosures shall be completely cleaned of construction debris such as mortar, concrete, paint splashes, wire clippings, and metal shavings after construction is completed.

All metal surfaces of conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in contact with concrete encasement shall be painted with one coat of RTCB-5 Tar. All surfaces of conduits, fittings, boxes, supports, etc. exposed to view (material between stringers and above bottom of stringers is not considered exposed to view) shall be painted to match the color of adjacent material. All galvanized surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with Section 09900.03 before the application of any paint.

Conduits terminating at concrete foundations and manholes shall be secured as specified on the plans. All ends unused conduit shall end capped.

After installation, all conduit which will be left empty shall have a pull wire or cord installed. Pull wire or cord shall be made of corrosion resistant material with a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds.

G. Horizontal Augering Or Jacking

Conduit to be placed under existing pavements or paved shoulders may be installed by horizontal augering or jacking methods subject to the approval of the County Engineer. The Contractor must receive written approval from the County Engineer prior to the commencement of work for other thrust boring methods.

The ducts for installation in augered holes shall be placed in a hole augered under the pavement between the handboxes. The duct shall be installed by pushing in sections and coupling them together as the work progresses. The advance end of the first section of rigid duct shall be capped before pushing it into the augered hole.

The ducts for installation by jacking shall be installed by thrusting sections under the pavement with a hydraulic ram. Sections of rigid duct shall have a pointed nose cap screwed onto the advance end to facilitate penetration.

The Contractor shall avoid disturbing the existing roadway surface or weakening the roadbed. Any damage to the existing pavement structure shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the County Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

H. Trenches and Conduit

Trenches for underground conduits shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Plans and as specified in Section 02250.03.

All conduits shall be supported so that strain is not transmitted to outlet or pull boxes. Supports shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion of conduits during backfilling or wire pulling.






A. General


B. Electrical Conduit



SECTION 02732

PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDBOXES

02732.01 GENERAL

A. Description

Reinforced concrete electrical handboxes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to,the furnishing and installing of reinforced concrete electrical handboxes as shown on thePlans and in accordance with the Contract Documents or as directed by the CountyEngineer.


1. Adjusting utility structures; Section 02140.

2. Removal of existing pavement, sidewalk, curb and combination curb and gutter;Section 02160.

3. Structure excavation; Section 02220.

4. Selected backfill; Section 02245.



The County Engineer will inspect all materials and work to ensure compliance with theContract Documents.

D. Submittals

Submittals shall be as specified in Section 02730.01.

02732.02 MATERIAL


The County will not furnish any materials for reinforced concrete electrical handboxes.


Not applicable.


1. Reinforced Concrete Pipes

PRECAST ELECTRICAL HANDBOXES 02732-2


Reinforced concrete pipes for use as electrical handboxes shall meet therequirements of AASHTO M 170, Class IV.

2. Handbox Frames and Covers

Gray iron castings for handbox frames and covers shall meet the requirements ofASTM A 48, Class 30B.

02732.03 EXECUTION

A. Excavation

Excavation shall be performed as nearly as practicable to the outside dimensions of thehandboxes or to the minimum size required to suit the equipment for jacking or augeringthe rigid duct under the roadway surface.

B. Backfill

After the handboxes are set to proper grades, excavated spaces around the boxes shall bebackfilled with suitable material as indicated on the Plans. The backfill shall be placed andthoroughly compacted in 8-inch layers to the satisfaction of the County Engineer.




A. General


B. Electrical Handboxes



SECTION 02733

ELECTRICAL PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

02733.01 GENERAL

A. Description

Electrical pull and junction boxes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, furnishing and installing electrical pull and junction boxes on structures, as shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Contract Documents or as directed by the County Engineer.



2. Lighting standards; Sections 02760 and 02761.



D. Submittals

Submittals shall be as specified in Section 02730.01.

02733.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for electrical pull and junction boxes.


None.


1. Steel Plate

Steel shall conform to ASTM A36 or ASTM A709, Grade 36.

2. Iron Castings

Gray iron castings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30B.

3. Box Covers

ELECTRICAL PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 02733-2


a. Boxes which are encased in concrete shall be provided with covers extending ½ inch beyond the outside dimensions and drilled to match taped holes in the flange.

b. Boxes which are to be completely exposed shall be provided with covers meeting the outside dimensions of the box.

c. Boxes for exterior underground service shall be furnished with gasketed cover plates.

d. Cover shall be secured in position by round head brass or grade 316 stainless steel machine screws.

4. Pull and junction boxes shall be the sizes and types specified but in no case smaller than required by NEC. Boxes shall be weatherproof and corrosion resistant NEMA 4X, stainless steel. Conduit entrance shall be provided with conduit hubs or bosses of sufficient thickness that five full threads of the conduit shall engage the threaded holes in the box.

5. Concrete shall be mix No. 2 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.

02733.03 EXECUTION

Electrical pull and junction boxes shall be located where and in the manner shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall furnish suitable hardware and accessories to mount the boxes. Boxes shall be installed so that covers are readily accessible after completion of the installation.

When boxes are set in concrete, they shall be adequately supported to prevent movement during placement of the concrete. The number of unrequired knock-outs shall be kept to a minimum. After installation, the boxes shall be cleaned of any splashed concrete.






SECTION 02734

CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS

02734.01 GENERAL

A. Description

Concrete foundations shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the construction ofconcrete foundations for lighting standard installations and traffic control devices shown onthe Plans and in accordance with the Contract Documents, or as directed by the CountyEngineer. This work shall include excavation, backfilling, placing concrete, and allincidentals necessary to complete the work.


1. Structure excavation; Section 02220.

2. Portland cement concrete; Section 03310.

3. Painting; Section 09900.


1. The County Engineer will inspect all materials and work to ensure compliance withthe Contract Documents.

2. Concrete shall meet the quality assurance requirements as specified in Section03310.

D. Submittals

Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for all concretelighting and signal foundations. The shop drawings shall show the overall dimensions ofthe foundation, reinforcing size and location, and bolt circle data.

02734.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for concrete foundations.


Not applicable.

CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS 02734-2



1. Portland Cement Concrete

Portland cement concrete for concrete foundations shall be Mix No. [3]2 asspecified in Section 03310.

2. Grout

Grout shall meet the requirements specified in Section 03600 and shall be non-shrink, non-metallic, and have a compressive strength of at least 3,000 psi at 28days.

3. Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcing steel shall consist of deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615.Deformed bars shall be epoxy coated. Epoxy powder shall conform to Section917.02 of the "MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials,(1993)".

4. Conduit

Refer to Section 921.02 of the "MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction andMaterials, (1993)".

5. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers

High strength bolts, nuts, and washers shall conform to ASTM A325. Galvanizingfor hardware shall conform to ASTM A153.

6. Paint

Zinc rich primers shall be applied on shot blast cleaned steel for new structures orsand blast cleaned structures which are to be rehabilitated. Primers shall be selfcure inorganic zinc alkyl silicate base or organic vehicle and meet the requirementsof SSPC PS 12.00.

Zinc rich primer for galvanized surfaces shall meet the requirements of FederalSpecification TT-P-641, Type 11, zinc dust - zinc oxide.

7. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound

Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M148.

Field control testing of the white pigmented curing compound shall be on the basisof weight per gallon. The samples shall not deviate more than plus or minus 0.3pounds per gallon form the original source sample.

02734.03 EXECUTION

A. General

CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS 02734-3


Footings, including reinforcement, foundation, and bolt circle data shall be as shown on thePlans or in accordance with approved shop drawings. Anchor bolts shall be plumb.Suitable templates for setting anchor bolts shall be accurately placed and left in place untilconcrete has obtained its initial set.

Galvanized parts that have been cut or chipped to bare metal shall be repaired as specifiedin ASTM A780.

B. Excavation

The Contractor shall perform all excavation to neat lines and to the elevations anddimensions shown on the Plans. All excavation work will be inspected and approved by theCounty Engineer before proceeding with construction.

C. Concrete Placement

It is intended that all concrete be placed against undisturbed earth. However, where theexisting ground will not retain its shape during or after augering, or if the excavation shouldshow any tendency to cave in before placing the foundation, the Contractor shall provideand install a corrugated metal pipe to retain the earth and receive the concrete. The pipeshall remain in place.

Concrete shall be mixed, placed and tested as specified in Section 03300.

Tops of foundations shall be screeded to a dense smooth finish. Exposed surfaces shallbe cured by use of a liquid membrane curing compound.

D. Backfill

Material used for backfill shall be free from topsoil, loam, organic, frozen, or otherundesirable material. No trash shall be allowed to accumulate in the spaces to bebackfilled, and these spaces shall be well cleaned before backfill is placed. Backfill materialshall be material from the excavation or other sources which shall meet the requirementsof Section 02240.02. All backfill shall be carefully compacted in layers not exceeding 8inches in loose thickness and compacted with mechanical or vibratory compactionequipment to at least 92% of maximum density at a moisture content within 2% of theoptimum in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method C.




A. General


B. Concrete Foundation



SECTION 02735

ELECTRICAL CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTORS

02735.01 GENERAL

A. Description

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing loop detector wire and leads, electricalcable, cable ducts, wires, and associated connectors of the type and at the locationsspecified on the Plans and in accordance with the Contract Documents or as directed bythe County Engineer.




3. Concrete foundations; Section 02734.

4. Loop detectors; Section 02743.


The County Engineer will inspect all materials and work to ensure compliance with theContract Documents.

D. Submittals

1. Shop Drawings

Shop drawings shall be submitted as specified in the "General Provisions" for allelectrical cable, wire, and connectors. The shop drawings shall include the numberand size of conductor and general material information.


Certificates of compliance shall be submitted as specified in the "GeneralProvisions" for all electrical cable, wire, and connectors stating that the cable, wire,and connectors meet the requirements specified in Section 02735.02.

02735.02 MATERIALS


The County will not furnish any materials for electrical cable.

ELECTRICAL CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTORS 02735-2



Not applicable.


1. Electrical Cable and Wire

Refer to Section 950.06 of the "MSHA Standard Specification for Construction andMaterials, (1993)".

2. Connectors

Refer to Section 950.014 of the "MSHA Standard Specification for Construction andMaterials, (1993)".

02735.03 EXECUTION

A. General

The Contractor shall furnish and install copper conductor wire and cable of the types andsizes and at the locations specified in the Contract Documents. No splicing will bepermitted for cables unless specified in the Contract Documents. When specified, lightingcable splices will be permitted only in junction and pull boxes and handholes. Cable shallnot be installed until the entire related raceway, including manhole, handhole, andfoundation system is in place. A 6 foot (2 m) cable slack shall be provided neatly tied,coiled and positioned in the bottom of the handholes and manholes. Eight inch (200 mm)drip loops shall be provided at all overhead entrance points into structures.

B. Direct Burial Cable

Direct burial cable, unless otherwise stated, shall be placed in a trench at a minimum depthof 30 inches below finished grade to the top of the cable.

C. Trench

The trench may be hand dug or plowed.

The trench shall be backfilled and compacted as specified in Sections 02250.03 and02734.03.

D. Cable in Conduits

Refer to Section 810.03.02 of the "MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction andMaterials, (1993)".

E. Preassembled Cable Duct


ELECTRICAL CABLE, WIRE, AND CONNECTORS 02735-3


F. Cable in Lighting Structures


G. Identification Tags


H. Loop Detector Wire and Loop Detector Lead-in


I. Connector Kits

Connector kits shall be furnished and installed as required for the type of cable specifiedin the Contract Documents and shall conform to the manufactures recommendations.

J. Grounding Wire

Grounding wire shall be furnished and installed as specified in Section 02730.03.B.


A. Traffic Signal Electrical Cable


B. Miscellaneous Electrical Cable



A. General


B. Traffic Signal Electrical Cable


C. Miscellaneous Electrical Cable


Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 03600-1 GROUT

SECTION 03600

GROUT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Non-shrink grout for setting of equipment, precast units, and baseplates.


A. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE STRUCTURES

1.03. REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification.

A. American Concrete Institute

ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete

ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting ACI 309 Practice for Consolidation of Concrete

B. American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM C31 Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C109 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using

2-inch or 50-mm Cube Specimens) ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C1019 Standard Method of Sampling and Testing Grout ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit single-page catalog cuts for the following:

1. Non-shrink grout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. GROUT

A. Non-Shrink Grout - Shall be a flowable, non-staining, cement-base product, manufactured premixed, requiring only the addition of water or latex mix solution as supplied by the grout manufacturer at the job site.

1. For supporting smaller equipment of 10 HP or less, use non-shrink grout with a minimum strength of 5000 psi at 28 days with a fluid consistency. Also use for setting of precast sills, etc.


2. For support of heavy equipment or other large loads, and when stresses from vibrations are involved or when equipment will be subject to thermal movement, use grout specifically manufactured for such applications.

Provide Engineer with manufacturer’s certification for the use intended, including 2-inch by 2-inch grout cube strength tests in accordance with ASTM C109. Grout tests shall achieve 5000 psi in 7 days and 7000 psi in 28 days with a fluid consistency.

3. Non-shrink grout shall be applicable for damp, corrosive environments.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. Prepare surfaces, mix products, and install grout per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.02. GROUT MIXING

A. When a scheduled grout placement will consist of 3 cubic yards or more, the grout shall be produced at a batch plant, not site mixed.

3.03. TESTING FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality assurance testing shall be conducted by the Owner with samples tagged and sent to an independent laboratory.

B. In general, testing will be conducted for each day where more than 1 cubic yard of grout is placed.

C. Coordinate 48 hours in advance with the Engineer and testing laboratory to assure that testing can be accomplished. Provide free access to work and cooperate with the testing laboratory.

D. The following tests may be performed by the testing laboratory:

1. Slump Test - Made on each batch of grout produced, in accordance with ASTM C143. Grout which exceeds the manufacturer’s recommended slump shall not be used.

2. Compressive Strength Test

a. Samples of freshly mixed grout will be taken and tested by the testing laboratory for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C1019 except as modified herein.

b. Each specimen will be identified by a tag, furnished by the Contractor, which will be attached to the side of the specimen.

c. It is the Contractor’s responsibility that specimens be stored in an approved storage box provided by the Contractor on the construction site for 48 hours after they have been molded at a temperature between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F.

d. After 48 hours, the specimens will be transported to the testing laboratory and moist cured until testing in accordance with ASTM C39. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, and two at 28 days.


e. Should a 7-day or 28-day test strength from any specimen be lower than the specified compressive strengths, the Contractor shall immediately correct the mix for the next grout placement operation. Engineer will determine if installed grout must be replaced.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 11300

PUMPING EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Furnish, install, and test pumping equipment complete with pressure gauges, and all other required accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 11317 - SUMP PUMPS

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide in accordance with Section 01305, Submittals; Section 01640, Equipment – General; and as supplemented herein. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. For Pressure Gauges:

a. Shop Drawings

b. Pressure Gauge Schedule: Submit a complete schedule of all pressure gauges furnished under this section, including the proposed ranges for each gauge.

B. Provide operation and maintenance manuals and data where scheduled in Section 01640, Equipment – General.

1.04 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish the following spare parts in accordance with the Section 01640, Equipment –General, in clearly identified dust-proof containers:

1. One spare pressure gauge of each type provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Dwyer

B. Or equal

2.02 EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS

A. In the case of an “or-equal” or a substitution, demonstrate in writing, to the satisfaction of Owner that the manufacturer has produced the specified type and size of equipment for wastewater service that has been in successful operation in the United States of America for a minimum period of five years prior to the Bid date.

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 11300-1 PUMPING EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

2.03 EQUIPMENT DESIGN

A. Coordinate with the various pump manufacturers so that all pressure gauges furnished under this section are from the same manufacturer.

B. Pressure gauges and diaphragm seals shall be by the same manufacturer and shall be shipped as complete units, factory filled with silicone fluid.

C. No pressure gauges shall be required on sump pumps, polymer feed pumps, or screw pumps unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

D. Each pressure gauge and diaphragm seal unit shall be connected with the necessary brass pipe fittings and brass stopcock in accordance with the details on the Contract Drawings.

E. Pump Suction and Discharge Pressure Gauges

1. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the suction and discharge sides of pumps in accordance with the following requirements:

a. Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourdon-tube design with a dual-size ½” male NPT process connection. Pressure range shall be 0-100 psig.

b. Materials of construction shall be as follows: case rings shall be black epoxy-coated aluminum, Bourdon tube shall be phosphor bronze with a brass tip, diaphragm shall be 316 stainless steel, and window shall be glass unless otherwise specified.

c. Pressure gauges shall be stem-mounted.

d. Pressure gauges shall be calibrated to read zero at atmospheric pressure.

e. Pump suction pressure gauges shall be of the compound type to indicate both positive and negative pressure; they shall be calibrated to read vacuum to 30 psi.

f. Pump discharge pressure gauges shall be calibrated to read from zero to a minimum of five feet of water pressure above the pump shutoff head.

g. Pump suction and discharge pressure gauges shall be Series 7000B Spirahelic as manufactured by Dwyer, or equal.

F. Seal Water Pressure Gauges

1. Pressure gauges shall be installed on pump seal water and flushing water connections as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with the requirements for pump discharge pressure gauges, with the following exceptions:

a. Dial shall be 2.5-inches in diameter.

b. Case rings shall be polished stainless steel.

c. Seal water pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft No. 1009, or equal.


G. Diaphragm Seals

1. All pressure gauges shall have continuous duty, clamped Teflon diaphragm seals in accordance with the following requirements:

a. Each diaphragm seal shall have Type 316 stainless steel upper and lower housings.

b. The lower housing shall be a threaded connection.

c. Diaphragm seals shall be Ashcroft, Type 300, or equal.

2.04 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment shall be fabricated to meet the requirements listed in Section 01640, Equipment – General and specified herein.

B. Supplementing the requirements of the individual pump sections, furnish nameplates for each pump as specified below:

1. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.

2. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, pump size, and appropriate data describing the equipment performance ratings including the primary rating point (in gallons per minute and feet of total dynamic head), nominal speed, efficiency at primary rating point, and impeller size used to achieve primary rating point.

2.05 SHOP TESTING

A. All pumping equipment shall be tested in the manufacturer’s shop in accordance with the requirements of Section 01640, Equipment – General, and as specified herein.

B. Conduct performance tests of all pumps under simulated design conditions prior to shipment.

1. Conditions shall include:

a. Design point

b. Secondary and Tertiary design points (if applicable)

c. Design point with motor speed reduction at specified percentage (if applicable)

d. Shutoff head

2. Deviation of actual data from specified performance criteria shall not exceed +/- 3%.

3. Develop a pump curve for each pump type using at least ten actual data points.

4. For units specified to be operated with variable frequency drives or other speed controllers, develop at least five pump curves representing five different speeds for each pump. Speeds represented by curves shall include, but not be limited to, the following:


a. Full speed

b. Minimum speed

c. Reduced speed(s) required to meet pump design point(s)

5. Record motor amperage, break horsepower, and efficiency at each data point on each pump curve.

C. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to witness the shop test on each piece of equipment before the equipment is assembled for shipment to the project site.

D. Coordinate with equipment manufacturer to provide Owner and Engineer with ample notice of these tests so that Owner and Engineer can arrange to witness the tests.

E. Submittals of certified test results must be provided to and approved by Engineer before shipment of the pumps to the project site.

F. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. No field modifications to equipment shall be made without the written consent of the manufacturer and approval of Engineer.

C. Field verify all dimensions and elevations. Notify Engineer of specific differences.

D. Furnish all necessary materials (including lubricants, chemicals, etc.) and equipment (including measuring devices, etc.) for testing and startup.

E. All bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

F. Isolate dissimilar metals by backpainting or with dielectric using stainless steel fasteners.

G. Pressure Gauge Installation

1. Pressure gauges shall be installed in an upright position to facilitate easy reading of the dial.

2. Pressure gauges for pumps shall be installed to close to the suction and discharge flanges of each pump, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.

3. Pressure gauges shown on the Contract Drawings shall be installed at the locations shown.


3.02 TESTING AND STARTUP

A. Testing and startup shall be performed in accordance with Section 01660, Testing and Startup, and as specified herein unless otherwise noted.

B. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer and the equipment manufacturer or their approved representative.

C. Preliminary Field Tests shall be made after the installation of the pumps.

D. Functional Testing shall demonstrate the following:

1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment.

2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration.

3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts.

4. That the pumps can deliver the specified pressure and quantity at the rated speed.

E. All function tests shall be conducted with clean water from the plant water supply system unless otherwise specified.

F. Provide all temporary flow measurement devices as necessary to achieve accurate measurement of the pumped flow during the field tests.

G. If pumps are intended for use with variable frequency drives or other speed controllers, tests shall be performed using the approved drives or controllers.

H. During Functional Testing, readings of all essential data shall be recorded at a minimum of four operating points for each operating speed. Data taken shall include suction and discharge pressure, inlet and outlet water surface elevation, flow, pump speed, and motor amperage.

I. All field testing information shall be summarized in a report and submitted to Engineer for approval.

3.03 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE

A. Provide services of the equipment manufacturer or their approval representative in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment – General and as specified herein.

END OF SECTION


Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 11317-1 SUMP PUMPS

SECTION 11317

SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Furnish, install, and test one submersible sump pump and furnish one spare submersible sump pump, each complete with motors, level switches, and all other required accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 09900 - PAINTING

B. Section 11300 - PUMPING EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

C. Section 15170 - MOTORS

1.03 REFERENCES ORGANIZATION ID TITLE OF STANDARD EDITION

UL 508 Safety Standard for Industrial Control Equipment Latest

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pumps shall be capable of operating under the following conditions of service:

CRITERIA VALUE

Minimum Pumping Rate 20 gpm

Head at Minimum Pumping Rate 33 feet

Discharge Diameter 1.5 inches

Maximum Sphere Passing Size 3/8 inch

1.05 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings

2. Performance Affidavit

3. Manufacturer’s installation certificate

4. Special guarantees



1.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish the following spare parts in accordance with the Section 01640, Equipment –General, in clearly identified dust-proof containers:

1. One spare pump

2. One set of flexible seals

3. One set of gaskets

1.07 EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES AND SPECIAL GUARANTEES

A. The Supplier shall provide the following warranties and special guarantees in accordance with Section 01640, Equipment - General.

1. The equipment manufacturer shall guarantee for a period of two years starting at the time of equipment delivery to the job site, or one year starting at the time of Conditional Acceptance (whichever is shorter), that the equipment supplied is free from defects in materials or workmanship and will meet the specified performance requirements when operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The manufacturer shall correct any breach in this warranty at their expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Goulds Pumps, Model LSP07

B. Or equal

2.02 EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS

A. In the case of an “or-equal” or a substitution, demonstrate in writing, to the satisfaction of Owner that the manufacturer has produced the specified type and size of equipment for sanitary wastewater service that has been in successful operation in the United States of America for a minimum period of five years prior to the Bid date.

2.03 EQUIPMENT DESIGN

A. Casing

1. Pump motor casing shall be constructed of stainless steel.

B. Impeller

1. Pump shall have a glass-filled thermoplastic impeller and casing designed for solids handling. The impeller shall be threaded or keyed to a heavy-duty stainless steel shaft.


2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide sufficient power cord for the pump with adapter to connect to electrical receptacle furnished and installed by others, and wires to connect the pump and controls.

2.05 MOTORS AND DRIVES

A. Provide in accordance with Section 15170, Motors, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Motors and drives shall be furnished by the equipment supplier and shall be designed specifically for use with the equipment provided.

C. Motors shall be mounted on the pumps. The motor shall be provided with thrust and radial bearings to carry the entire load, which may be imposed upon it under all operating conditions.

D. The motor shall have a double labyrinth lip seal system to keep the motor free from moisture, consisting of three lip seals and a v-ring. The motor shall be fully submerged in high-grade oil. The power cord shall have an epoxy seal at the motor end. The motor shall comply with UL 508 for sump pump application.

E. Motor Parameters:

ITEM NO.

MOTOR PARAMETERS SMP-12-10-01

1. Maximum Allowable Motor Horsepower 0.75 hp

2. Full Load Current 7.1 A

3. Motor Selection

Type Submersible

Special Applications TEXP

4. Motor Speed (Nominal) 3500 rpm

5. Minimum Allowable Motor Efficiency 77%

6. NEMA Design B

7. Duty Continuous

8. Insulation Class F

9. Voltage, Phase, and Hertz 120 V, 1 Phase, 60 Hz

10. Service Factor 1.15


ITEM NO.

MOTOR PARAMETERS SMP-12-10-01

11. Motor Enclosure Submersible

12. Protection Built-In Thermal Overload Protection

13. Maximum Starts per Hour 12, evenly spaced

2.06 CONTROLS

A. Contractor shall provide a complete and operable system in accordance with the Contract Documents. Operation of the equipment in this Section is dependent on electrical and control equipment described in Division 16, Division 17, and on the Electrical Contract Drawings. Contractor shall coordinate with subcontractors and Suppliers to ensure that the equipment specified herein operates per all requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. The equipment Supplier shall provide the specific electrical and control equipment defined or referenced in this Section as well as additional equipment as needed to meet the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Each pump shall be provided with a piggy-back float control switch that shall automatically start and stop the pump.



B. Surface preparation and prime coat shall be applied at the manufacturer’s shop utilizing a universal primer that is compatible with the finish system specified in Section 09900, Painting.

C. All bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

D. Welds shall be continuous unless noted otherwise.

E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

F. Furnish nameplates for each piece of equipment in accordance with Section 11300, Pumping Equipment – General.

PART 3 EXECUTION





C. Field verify all dimensions and elevations. Notify Engineer of specific differences.



F. Concrete anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchors.

G. Backpaint aluminum in contact with painted or galvanized steel or concrete with a high-build epoxy coating in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.

H. Isolate dissimilar metals by backpainting or with dielectric using stainless steel fasteners.

I. Provide field coatings in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.


A. Testing and startup shall be performed in accordance with Section 01650, Starting of Systems, and as specified herein unless otherwise noted.




END OF SECTION

SECTION 15170

MOTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTIONS INCLUDES

A. All electric motors supplied under these Contract Documents shall conform to this specification as minimum requirements unless otherwise specified in individual Specification sections.

B. All electric motors shall conform to NEMA MG1 and to the NEC, Article 430.

C. The rating of the motors offered shall in no case be less than the horsepower required in the Contract Documents.

D. Motors shall operate without undue noise or vibration and shall show no signs of electrical unbalance. Provide vibration isolation as necessary to meet vibration requirements for each piece of equipment.

E. Motor efficiency shall be a prime consideration in selection of all motors. Unless otherwise specified in the individual Specification sections, motors shall meet the efficiency requirements specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES

ORGANIZATION ID TITLE OF STANDARD EDITION

IEEE Test Procedure 112 Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators

2004

NEMA MG1 Motors and Generators 2011

NEC National Electric Code 2011

1.03 HAZARDOUS OR EXPLOSION-PROOF AREAS

A. All areas noted as hazardous or explosion-proof (as defined in the latest edition of the National Electrical Code) shall have all work done in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) for that particular “class” and “division”, and all equipment enclosures (for motors, starters, switches, capacitors, etc.), fittings, conduits and appurtenances shall be of a type approved for the area.

B. Unless otherwise shown, all hazardous or explosion proof areas shall be Class I, Division 1 (Groups C and D); locations and all equipment enclosures, fittings, conduits and appurtenances shall be NEMA Type 7 and approved for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D atmospheres.

C. All wiring in these areas shall be done in accordance with the applicable NEC provisions.

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 15170-1 MOTORS

1.04 MOTOR EFFICIENCY

A. All single speed, three phase, squirrel cage induction-type motors 1 HP or larger, 60 Hertz, shall have nominal efficiencies in accordance with the table below unless specifically otherwise specified in the respective equipment section.

1. Determine efficiencies by using IEEE Test Procedure 112, Test Method B using segregated losses. Motors shall be listed by their manufacturers and be nameplated with words such as “High Efficiency,” “Premium Efficient,” and “Energy Saver.”

2. List guaranteed minimum efficiencies on motor nameplate. Adhere to the latest nominal efficiencies eligible for a rebate published by the local utility where rebates are available. Those efficiencies may be higher than those listed in Table 1 included herein.

OPEN DRIP-PROOF* TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED*

HP 900 1200 1800 3600 900 1200 1800 3600 1 74.0 82.5 85.5 77.0 74.0 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 75.5 86.5 86.5 84.0 77.0 87.5 86.5 84.0 2 85.5 87.5 86.5 85.5 82.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3 86.5 88.5 89.5 85.5 84.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 5 87.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 88.5

7.5 88.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 85.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10 89.5 91.7 91.7 89.5 88.5 91.0 91.7 90.2 15 89.5 91.7 93.0 90.2 88.5 91.7 92.4 91.0 20 90.2 92.4 93.0 91.0 89.5 91.7 93.0 91.0 25 90.2 93.0 93.6 91.7 89.5 93.0 93.6 91.7 30 91.0 93.6 94.1 91.7 91.0 93.0 93.6 91.7 40 91.0 94.1 94.1 92.4 91.0 94.1 94.1 92.4 50 91.7 94.1 94.5 93.0 91.7 94.1 94.5 93.0 60 92.4 94.5 95.0 93.6 91.7 94.5 95.0 93.6 75 93.6 94.5 95.0 93.6 93.0 94.5 95.4 93.6 100 93.6 95.0 95.4 93.6 93.0 95.0 95.4 94.1 125 93.6 95.0 95.4 94.1 93.6 95.0 95.4 95.0 150 93.6 95.4 95.8 94.1 93.6 95.8 95.8 95.0 200 93.6 95.4 95.8 95.0 94.1 95.8 96.2 95.4 250 94.5 95.4 95.8 95.0 94.5 95.8 96.2 95.8 300 -- 95.4 95.8 95.4 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8 350 -- 95.4 95.8 95.4 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8 400 -- 95.8 95.8 95.8 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8 450 -- 96.2 96.2 95.8 -- 95.8 92.2 95.8 500 -- 96.2 96.2 95.8 -- 95.8 96.2 95.8


*Nominal speed; for two-speed motors, the efficiency applies to the highest speed. For submersible motors, other motor horsepowers, speeds, and for Design C and D motors, the efficiencies shall be in accordance with the applicable equipment specification sections.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Provide the following additional information:

a. Manufacturer’s name

b. Manufacturer’s type

c. Electric characteristics

d. Design characteristics

e. Mechanical construction

f. Pertinent specifications for the use intended

g. Name of the equipment to be driven

h. The following information for each motor in tabulated form: Motor manufacturer Nameplate horsepower Model Motor rpm, full load nameplate Frame number Insulation class Type of enclosure Service factor Volts Maximum ambient temperature

Hertz Maximum temperature rise Phase Shop painting NEMA design Nominal efficiency Code letter Guaranteed minimum efficiency at 50, 75 and 100%

full load Locked rotor amps Minimum power factor at 50, 75 and 100% load Locked rotor torque Resistance temperature device information (if

applicable)



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RATINGS AND DESIGN

A. Furnish with adequate ratings to accelerate and drive connected equipment under all normal operating conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings.

B. Provide with service factors in accordance with NEMA standards as follows unless otherwise noted in individual equipment specifications.

MOTOR TYPE MINIMUM SERVICE FACTOR (SF) Mill and chemical duty 1.15 Open drip-proof 1.15 Totally enclosed fan cooled 1.15 Submersible 1.15 Inverter duty 1.0 All others 1.0

C. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load and frequency with a voltage variation up to 10 percent; at rated load and voltage with a frequency variation up to 5 percent; and at rated load with a combined variation in voltage and frequency not more than 10 percent above or below the rated voltage and frequency provided that the frequency variation does not exceed 5 percent.

D. Assume voltage unbalance to be 1 percent. Altitude is less than 200 feet.

E. Assume ambient temperatures to be 40 ºC for motors in air and 25 ºC for submersible motors.

F. Motor winding temperature rise shall be as follows:

MOTOR TYPE CLASS OF INSULATION B F H

Open, drip-proof motors 80°C 105°C 125°C Totally enclosed fan-cooled motors 80°C 105°C 125°C Totally enclosed non-ventilated motors 85°C 110°C 135°C Explosion-proof motors 80°C 105°C 125°C All other motors with 1.15 SF or higher 90°C 115°C --

G. Use the applicable paragraphs of NEMA MG1 12.42 in making design selections.

H. Unless otherwise specified, all three phase motors shall be constant speed, squirrel cage induction type.

1. Contractor shall provide multi speed (multiple windings or consequent poles - single winding, wound rotor, etc.) where required as specified in individual equipment specifications.


I. Motor Voltages

1. Motors of 3/4 HP and Larger - Squirrel cage induction type designed for 3 phase, 60 cycle, 230/460 volt operation unless otherwise specified.

2. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP - Capacitor type designed for single phase, 60 cycle, 120 volt operation unless otherwise specified.

3. Motors indicated on the Contract Drawings and/or specified in the Specifications as 208 volt shall be specially wound for voltage indicated and/or specified.

4. Dual-rated motors (e.g., 208/230 volts) are not acceptable for operation on 208 volts.

J. Motors intended for inverter duty (those controlled through variable speed drives), shall be specifically manufactured for inverter duty.

K. Hazardous area motors shall be certified to meet UL requirements for operation over the motor’s entire speed range in conjunction with the VFD used.

L. Unless otherwise specified, all single-phase motors shall be NEMA design letter M or N, designed to withstand full voltage starting in accordance with MG1 12.32.

1. Motors shall comply with NEMA Standards for Definite Purpose Motors (paragraphs 18.001 18.717).

M. In general, capacitor start induction run or split phase type motors shall be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

N. Shaded pole motors larger than 1/8 HP will not be allowed.

O. Thermal overload protectors and any auxiliary components necessary to provide required starting characteristics including capacitors, resistors and automatic switching devices shall be furnished and mounted integrally unless motor starters with overload protection are provided.

2.02 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Unless otherwise specified, electric motors shall be of the following types of construction according to the degree of mechanical protection:

1. Totally Enclosed, Explosion-Proof (TEXP) Motors - When located in areas designated as hazardous locations (NEC locations Class I, Divisions 1 or 2).

a. See the Contract Drawings for other hazardous area classifications.

2. Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled (TEFC) Motors - When located outdoors or indoors in wet areas such as washdown areas or elsewhere if specified.

a. Winding heaters shall be provided when specified.

3. Mill and Chemical Duty or Severe Duty - Suitable for use in corrosive areas unless otherwise specified in individual equipment specifications.

4. Submersible Motors - For submerged application.


a. Provide motor winding thermal protection in motors 1 HP and larger.

5. In all other cases, they shall be open drip proof.

B. Encapsulated Windings - Where specified, an additional “dip and bake” will not be acceptable. Encapsulation shall be Contour Mold Everseal by U.S. Motors; Custom Polyseal by General Electric; or equal.

C. Bearings

1. Unless otherwise specified or required, motors rated above 2 HP shall have the bearings of the grease lubricated, anti-friction ball type with conveniently located grease fittings.

2. Provide a means of preventing bearings from becoming over greased (such as double shields on bearings or pressure sensitive relief fittings).

3. Unless otherwise specified, bearings shall be rated at a minimum L-10 life of 20,000 hours under axial loads.

4. Unless otherwise specified, submersible motors shall have bearings rated at an L-10 life of minimum of 30,000 hours.

D. Vertical Shaft Construction - Motors shall have adequate thrust bearings to carry all motor loads and any other operating equipment loads.

1. Grease slingers to be provided.

E. Horizontal Shaft Construction - Coupled to fluid pumps, the motors shall either have adequate thrust bearings or they shall have the coupling’s end play and rotor float coordinated to prevent damage to rotor bearings.

F. Rotors (including non-reverse ratchets on hollow shaft motors)

1. Statically and dynamically balanced.

a. 25 HP and Smaller: Manufacturer’s standard balance.

b. Greater than 25 HP: Special precision balance to achieve no more than 0.08 inches per second peak vibration.

2. Have secondary bars of heavy copper silver brazed to one piece end rings or have rotor windings of one piece cast aluminum.

3. Where applicable, construct with integral fans.

G. Inverter duty motors shall have enhanced rotor and stator designs.

H. Non-reversing ratchets shall be provided where specified in the individual equipment specifications.

I. Nameplates - Furnished of stainless steel with all motors, with markings in accordance with NEMA MG1 10.38.


J. Terminal Boxes

1. Sized in accordance with NEC, Article 430 12 and of sufficient size to accommodate conduits and conductor sizes as shown on Contract Drawings.

2. Furnish rubber gasketed terminal boxes with splash proof and totally enclosed motors.

3. Horizontal Motors - Locate on the left hand side, when viewing the motor from the drive shaft ends and design such that conduit entrance can be made from above, below or either side of the terminal box.

4. Include grounding lug in terminal box.

5. Oversize terminal boxes in the following applications:

a. Motors 7-1/2 HP and larger operating at 208 or 230 volts.

b. Motors 20 HP and larger operating at 460 volts.

6. Inverter duty motors shall have a minimum of two conduit penetrations. One penetration shall be used for the motor power feeder conductors, sized to accommodate VFD type cable and the other shall be used for auxiliary device wiring (i.e. motor winding thermostats, space heaters, etc.)

K. Motors used with belt drives shall have grease slingers on the sheave end and sliding bases to provide for belt take up.

L. Cast iron construction for all motors, when available for the application.

M. Motors provided with integral cables such as submersible motors shall be provided with separate power and control cables to facilitate use of metric disconnects and meltric connectors.

2.03 MOTOR POWER FACTORS

A. Provide when called for on the Contract Drawings.

B. Provide for all three phase motors, 7-1/2 HP or larger, 1200, 1800, or 3600 rpm (nominal), 60 Hertz, constant single speed (not VFD controlled), squirrel cage induction type, which do not have a minimum power factor of 85 percent. Motors which cannot meet this criteria shall have power factor correction capacitors, switched integrally with the motors (unless otherwise required by either the motor or starter manufacturer), which will bring the power factor up to a minimum of 90 percent.

C. Furnish and install, at no additional cost to the Owner, the capacitors and provide all necessary wiring to connect them to the motor terminals or motor controller terminals.

1. Properly sized fuse switch or circuit breaker to serve as a disconnect for the capacitor.


D. Capacitor and Disconnect Enclosure

APPLICATION ENCLOSURE Indoor mounting (non-hazardous) NEMA 12 wall mounted Indoor wet areas NEMA 4 wall mounted

APPLICATION ENCLOSURE Outdoor mounting NEMA 4 wall, pad, or mounting stand

mounted Explosion-proof areas NEMA 7 wall mounted (DS only)* Corrosive areas NEMA 4X wall mounted*

*Locate capacitor outside the hazardous or corrosive area.

E. Size capacitors so they do not increase the self-excitation voltage above the motor nameplate rating.

F. Do not use capacitors on motors controlled by variable frequency drives.

G. When used with solid-state starters, energize only after bypass or full speed bypass contactor is energized. Verify with starter manufacturer their connection requirements and follow them.

2.04 INSULATION

A. Minimum NEMA Class B insulation unless otherwise noted in the individual equipment specifications.

B. Provide Class F insulation if required by the manufacturer to meet specified energy efficiency.

C. Use Class F or H insulation where ambient temperatures exceed 104 ºF (40 ºC) as shown on the Contract Drawings or elsewhere in the Specifications.

D. Where motors are to be used with variable frequency drives (VFDs), insulation systems shall be “inverter duty” with Class F thermostats. Insulation system shall meet NEMA MG1 30 standards.

2.05 VERTICAL HOLLOWSHAFT MOTORS

A. Where specified, design vertical hollowshaft motors to carry the motors, pumps, and associated equipment’s full thrust. Equip motors with oil lubricated spherical roller thrust bearings and lower grease lubricated radial guide bearings. Provide motors with visual oil level indicators and sufficient oil to fill the motor.

B. Vertical Adjustment - By means of a lockable nut at the top of the shaft.

C. Non-Reversing Ratchets - Provide where specified in the individual equipment specifications and where suitable for continuous operation at any speed between 50 percent and 100 percent of rated speed. Dynamically balanced as specified for rotors under the Mechanical Construction Article of this Specification section.


2.06 TWO-SPEED MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger Specified as Two Speed Motors - Two windings unless otherwise noted. Motors less than 1/2 HP will be permitted with single windings. Speeds of the motors shall be as specified. Two speed motors shall be tested at the higher speed.

2.07 MOTOR SHOP TEST

1. Perform motor shop tests in accordance with the IEEE Code for polyphase induction machines. Use NEMA report of test forms and submit results to the Engineer, in five copies, for his approval.

2. Test each motor and submit report for power factor and efficiency at 50, 75 and 100 percent of its rated horsepower; for insulation resistance and dielectric strength; for heating; and for compliance with all specific performance requirements.

3. For motors less than 50 HP, provide guaranteed performance data based on previous testing of the motor design. For motors of 50 HP or larger, make complete tests of each motor and furnish certified test data sheets.



B. Surface preparation and prime coat shall be applied at the manufacturer’s shop utilizing a universal primer that is compatible with the finish system specified in Section 09900, Painting.

C. All bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

D. Welds shall be continuous unless noted otherwise.

E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

F. Furnish nameplates for each piece of equipment in accordance with Section 11300, Pumping Equipment – General.

PART 3 EXECUTION




C. Field verify all dimensions and elevations. Notify Engineer of specific differences




F. Concrete anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel adhesive anchors.

G. Backpaint aluminum in contact with painted or galvanized steel or concrete with a high-build epoxy coating in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.

H. Isolate dissimilar metals by backpainting or with dielectric using stainless steel fasteners.

I. Provide field coatings in accordance with Section 09900, Painting.


A. Testing and startup shall be performed in accordance with Section 01660, Testing and Startup, and as specified herein unless otherwise noted.


C. Field Testing:

1. All three phase electric motors 1/2 HP and larger and all single phase electric motors 1 HP and larger shall be field tested by the Contractor at as near operating conditions as possible prior to System Demonstration Testing. Complete and submit all of the information required by the attached “Motor Test Report” for all motors to be tested per the above.

2. Operate motor under lead for a minimum of four hours after which the motor leads shall be disconnected, the motor megger tested, and the motor leads permanently reconnected. Tabulate result in “Motor Test Report”.

3. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to witness all testing.

4. Submit completed forms in quadruplicate and include results in O&M manuals.



(CONTINUED)


MOTOR TEST REPORT Equipment Description_____________________________ Equipment No.______________ Equipment Loc. ________________________________________________________________ Drawing Nos. and Rev. _________________________________________________________ MCC/Panel No._________________________________ Section/CKT. No._______________ Control CKT. No. ______________________________________________________________

NAMEPLATE DATA Motor Mfr.___________________________________ HP_______ Rpm_____ S.F._________ Volts________________ Phase________ F.L. Amp______ KVA Code_____ O Rise________ Serial No.____________________ Other __________________________________________ Locked Rotor KVA __________________________ Efficiency ______________________ Prestart Checks Date Lubrication Checked (Motor and Driven Equipment) __________ Motor Rotates Freely __________ Overload Heater Size/Setting_______________ (located at starter) __________ Control Circuit Tested __________ Breaker Size (Frame Size/Trip Element Rating)_________________ __________ Motor Insulation Resistance (Megger) Test Volts________(500V for up to 250V motors and 1000V for up to 600V motors) Test Duration - 1 minute Phase A to Gnd_________ Phase B to Gnd_________ Phase C to Gnd_________ Phase A to B___________ Phase B to C___________ Phase C to A___________

UNCOUPLED DATA (Provide this only when motor is shipped, uncoupled.

Do not uncouple motor from drive to test.) Bus Voltage_______ Inrush Current_______Amps ________Sec Run in Time ________ Average Running Current________A ________B ________C Rotation * ______________ Rpm_____________ Performed by_____________________________________ Date_______________________ Approved by______________________________________ Date_______________________

Test Engineer

COUPLED DATA Bus Voltage_______ Inrush Current_______Amps ________Sec Run in Time ________ Average Running Current________A ________B ________C Rotation * ______________ Rpm_____________ System Lineup/Conditions _____________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Test Equipment Control Nos. ___________________________________________________ Remarks: ______________________________________________________________________ Performed by_____________________________________ Date_______________________ Approved by______________________________________ Date_______________________

Test Engineer *As viewed from motor outboard end. EQUIPMENT NO._________________________

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16057

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Modifications to existing power panelboards and general panelboards.

B. Modifications to existing Intersite PS Duplex Motor Starter Control Panel (MSCP).

C. Modifications to existing Radio Telemetry Unit (RTU) Cabinets.


A. Section 02730 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK

B. Section 16196 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

C. Section 16950 – TESTING AND INSPECTION

1.03. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES

A. General

1. Ensure that all hardware items and replacement equipment are on hand prior to attempting any equipment modification or upgrades.

2. Refer to Section Contract Drawings for Demolition, Removals, and Relocations, for demolition, removals, and relocations of equipment which is being modified or upgraded.

3. Provide new nameplates and tagging for modified, upgraded, and relocated equipment.

B. Equipment Modifications

1. Modify existing equipment as specified and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Provide field surveys of existing equipment and components as required to verify and log actual field As-Built conditions.

3. Provide as-built drawings documenting all changes made to existing equipment.

1.04. CONNECTIONS AND ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING WORK

A. General

1. Keep existing electrical system in operation during the progress of the work. Provide temporary electrical connections to systems or equipment, etc. where necessary to maintain continuous operation until the new systems and equipment are ready for operation.

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 16057-1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

2. Contractor shall develop a schedule for necessary power outages. Schedules shall be reviewed by Engineer and Owner and subject to change based on limitations required to maintain equipment essential to the plant operation, and the effect of the outages on plant operation is minimized. This may require working outside normal working hours when demolishing or installing equipment which will cause a shutdown, partial or complete.

3. When the work specified hereunder connects to any existing equipment, conduit, wiring, etc., perform necessary alterations, cuttings, fitting, etc. of the existing work as required to provide connections between the new and existing work. The completed systems shall be performed in a finished and workmanlike condition.

4. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to perform field verification of the existing wiring associated with the Work prior to removal of existing work and installation of new work. If discrepancies arise between the Contract Drawings and what is field verified. The Contractor shall immediately bring this to the attention of the Engineer.

B. Control Wiring Modifications

1. Connections of new electrical equipment to existing control wiring circuits are indicated on the Contract Drawings to the extent possible.

2. Provide temporary connections that may be required for plant operations in order to maintain power, control, alarm notification and instrumentation circuits.

3. Contractor shall disconnect and relocate existing alarm and status circuits which are identified on the Contract Drawings and as specified.

4. Contractor shall field verify existing wiring. Prior to disconnecting any circuits, the Contractor shall label all circuits designated for removal with wiring labels and termination blocks (if not labeled). The Contractor shall log all circuits and terminal block designations in a tabular format for future reference (Circuit Identification Table).

5. Contractor shall “ring-out” and test the operation of all control and alarm circuits designated for reuse, relocation and/or reconnection prior to beginning demolition work. Contractor shall trace each circuit from field component to termination point in panels. In the event that a circuit does not function, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer.

6. Contractor shall submit a copy of Circuit Identification Table to the Engineer for review and approval prior to disconnecting any circuits.

7. All circuits shall be systematically relocated to minimize downtime and disruption of service to the plant. The circuits shall not be relocated until the process control system has been installed and tested.

8. The Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of this work with the Owner and the Engineer.

9. Relocated circuits shall be tested by the Contractor to demonstrate operability.


1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Provide a detailed sequence of construction plan for performing modifications and upgrade to existing equipment. This information may be submitted in a consolidated construction plan.

B. Contractor shall submit a copy of Circuit Identification Tables to the Engineer for review and approval prior to disconnecting any circuits.

C. Submit test reports for all equipment which has been modified or upgraded. Tests shall be performed in accordance with Section 16950, Testing and Inspection.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01. GENERAL

A. Refer to Division 16 specifications for electrical material requirements.

B. New components for installation in existing equipment shall be of the same type and design as the original equipment. If direct equipment replacements are not available, the Contractor shall be permitted to provide alternate models/series components, permitted the parts are documented as directly compatible with the original equipment and components.

C. Contractor shall field verify the existing equipment to determine equipment compatibility requirements regardless if this information is provided on the Contract Drawings.

D. Where new components are provided for existing power distribution and control equipment, the components shall be provided with short circuit and interruption ratings that match or exceed the existing equipment ratings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall develop a detailed wiring list prior to disconnecting any existing power and control circuits.

B. Contractor shall perform a functionality test of each unit to be modified prior to starting any work. Functionality test shall be performed and documented.

C. Provide updated panel directories for all existing equipment which has been modified. New directories or panelboard cards shall be provided to replace old directories. Directories shall be “typed” and identify both new and existing equipment. (Handwritten directories, or updating existing directories is not acceptable). Refer to Section 16196, Electrical System Identification, for additional requirements.

D. Provide modifications to the existing panelboards as required to replace power circuit breakers. Provide new circuit breakers where shown on drawings. Contractor shall rearrange existing circuit breakers as required to accommodate space for new equipment. Provide blank panels as required to cover open spaces.


E. Provide new motor control center components as shown on the Contract Drawings. Contractor shall field verify existing motor control center equipment as required to match component types and ratings.

F. Provide new circuit breakers in existing panelboards to accommodate new equipment. Coordinate shutdowns with plant construction schedule. All new circuit breakers shall have at minimum a kAIC rating to maintain the kAIC rating of the panelboard.

G. Contractor shall coordinate connections and terminations at all panels with the Engineer and Owner.

H. Specific Items to the existing Intersite PS Duplex Motor Starter Control Panel (MSCP)

1. The existing Intersite PS Duplex Motor Starter Control Panel (MSCP) shall be modified to integrate with the new Secondary Control Panel as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. The cabinet shall remain in place and shall serve existing motors. Contractor shall provide all modifications and provide as-built drawings showing all major components of the panel. Drawings shall be 11x17 and performed in an electronic CAD software package. One set of drawings shall also be placed in the MSCP for quick reference by plant personnel. If it is possible to as-built panel on one sheet, drawing in panel shall be laminated and taped to inside of door.

2. Demolished components located in the cabinet shall be removed and turned over to the Owner if they desire or removed if not desired. Owner shall have first pick.

3. All existing functionality of existing panel shall be maintained with modifications to provide automatic control from the Secondary control panel and terminal blocks with a jumper installed to allow for east installation of a future Primary Controller under separate Contract.

END OF SECTION


Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS 8616764 16191-1 AND FASTENERS

SECTION 16191

ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Conduit and equipment supports.

B. Equipment Mounting Racks

C. Anchors and fasteners.

1.02. REFERENCES

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association

ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code


A. Division 2 - Site work

B. Division 2 – Electrical

C. All Division 16

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01305, Submittals and Section 02730, General Electrical Work.

B. Product Data - Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for fastening systems.

C. Manufacturer’s Instructions - Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

D. Contractor shall submit sealed drawings of all proposed fabricated apparatuses such as equipment mounting racks, overhead supports, etc. Drawings shall detail parts, hardware, and components of the apparatus.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other third-party testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes - Provide products which incorporate corrosion resistance adequate for the conditions in which they are to be installed.

B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products and designing system supports.

2.02. STEEL CHANNEL

A. Non-PVC Coated

1. Ductile Iron

a. Description - Hot dipped galvanized steel channel designed for use with steel fittings, spring backed washers and nuts.

b. Manufacturers - Kindorf, Uni-Strut, B-Line, Globe, or equal.

2. Stainless Steel

a. Description - For the purpose of this Section, all stainless steel (S.S.) channel shall be Type 316.

b. All fasteners, fittings, clamps, saddles and accessories as shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Manufacturers - Uni-Strut, B-Line, or equal.

2.03. ALUMINUM SUPPORTS

A. Provide aluminum channels, angles and supports for equipment mounting racks and overhead conduit support systems as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

B. Provide aluminum backboards and instrumentation supports as detailed on the Contract Drawings for supporting instrumentation equipment and control panel enclosures.

2.04. FIBERGLASS CHANNEL

A. Description - Pultruded materials of glass strands and polyester resins to form rigid, high strength, non-corrosive, non-flammable structural channels, connectors and fasteners. Manufacturers - Robroy Industries, Enduro, Aickinstrut, Strut Tech. or equal.

B. All strut and hanger rods in corrosive areas shall be fiberglass manufactured in a continuous process whereby linear glass strands, continuous mat laminates, and corrosion resistant polyester resins form a uniform rigid thermoset finished shape. The fiberglass parts shall be self-extinguishing with a V-O classification in the UL 94 test for flammability. Hanger rod washers shall be stamped from protruded flat stock. Hex nuts and strut nuts shall be injection molded. Other hardware shall be PVC coated to a nominal 15 mils. The bond between metal and plastic shall be equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the plastic. Manufacturers - Robroy Industries, OCAL, or equal.


2.05. TWO-PIECE MALLEABLE IRON CLAMPS

A. Cast malleable iron strap clamp sized to match conduit with mating malleable iron clamp backs (spacers). Clamp back shall be thick enough to provide 1/4-inch standoff from conduit to wall. Cadmium plated anchor and washer. Manufacturers - O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, Raco, or equal.

B. PVC coated cast malleable iron strap clamp sized to match conduit with mating malleable iron clamp back (spacer). Clamp back shall be thick enough to provide 1/4-inch standoff from conduit to wall. Stainless steel anchor and washer. Manufacturers - Robroy, Perma-Cote Industries, Kor Kap, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Refer to Contract Drawings for materials of construction for overhead conduit support racks, equipment mounting racks (EMRs), instrumentation supports, and general mounting configurations.

2. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. Anchor conduits to or support from structural members only.

4. Fasteners used to anchor any material or equipment weighing 75 lbs or more to concrete or masonry shall be adhesive grouted Type 316 stainless steel anchors as specified herein and in Section 03600, Grout. All other materials or equipment weighing less than 75 lbs may be supported via drilled anchors.

5. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.

6. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

7. Do not drill or cut structural members.

8. Install supports in a manner that does not interfere with or weaken the bolts when attaching to structural steel. Obtain the County Engineer’s written approval of any drilling or cutting on the structure.

9. Through spaces where surface mounting is not available, install multiple conduits on electrical channel rack, either hung or wall mounted. Provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits.

10. All hung systems with conduits 3-inch or larger shall also have lateral seismic supports at each hanger.

11. Support conduit passing through above-grade floors so that sealing sleeves or mechanical link seals do not carry the weight of the conduit.

12. Secure conduit installed in poured-in-place concrete to reinforcing bars with tie wires. Install suitable brackets secured to forms in the absence of reinforcing bars.


13. Install individual surface mounted conduit with two-piece cast malleable iron clamp assembly.

14. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four or six anchors, depending upon the number of normal anchor points. See table at the end of this section.

15. In wet and damp locations use fiberglass or stainless steel channel supports to stand cabinets, panelboards and mounting panels 1/2-inch (12 mm) off wall. Aluminum components shall be provided as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

16. Finish of all supports shall be compatible with painting system specified previously or with conduit material in corrosive or wet areas, except where stainless steel is used.

17. Extra steel bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets, or any other items required for proper support.

18. Supporting accessories where required, whether or not shown on Contract Drawings.

19. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

20. Refer to details on the Contract Drawings for free standing and railing mounted construction and for any other details of special conditions.

21. Fasteners, brackets and supports shall be fabricated as specified herein.

B. In areas where spray insulation is to be applied, install steel channel standoffs for electrical conduit, boxes and enclosures prior to installation of insulation.

Provide conduit extensions to all boxes and enclosures. Install connecting conduit, boxes and/or enclosures over the installed insulation.

C. Support applications.

1. Unclassified Areas - Galvanized steel channel system or malleable iron clamps.

2. Interior Corrosive /Wet Locations - Fiberglass reinforced plastic channel system. Provide aluminum equipment mounting racks and supports where shown or detailed on the Contract Drawings.

3. Exterior Areas - Stainless steel channel system.

D. Anchor and Fastener Application Schedule - See Schedule at end of this Section.

E. Support Spacing

1. Metallic Conduit - Not more than 8 feet on center. Types A, A-1, B, E, E-1 within 3 feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Type C, within 18 inches of box or fitting. Support boxes, fittings, or cabinets independent of conduit system.

2. Non-Metallic Conduit

a. Sizes up through 1-1/4-inches diameter - not more than 3 feet on center.

b. Sizes 1-1/2-inches diameter and larger - Not more than 4 feet on center.


c. Within 18 inches of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.

3. Maximum Deflection

a. Metallic Conduit - 1/100th of span between supports.

b. PVC Conduit - 1/360th of span between supports.

(continued)

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 16191-6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

ANCHOR AND FASTENER APPLICATION SCHEDULE

ITEM CATEGORY

MOUNTING SURFACES

WOOD, PLYWOOD

WALLBOARD, GYPSUM, FRP, COMPOSITION

HOLLOW

MASONRY SOLID

MASONRY CAST

CONCRETE SHEET

METAL

Individual conduit F G D A A E

Steel/FRP channel F, I D D A A E

Structures; i.e., conduit rack, cable tray F, I D D A A --

Devices and equipment less than 75 lbs. (Note 4) I Note 1 D A A Note 2

Devices and equipment 75 lbs. or more (Note 4) I Note 2 H B, H B, C, H Note 2

Mounting panels (Note 3) I Note 1 D B, H B, C, H Note 2

Key to Anchor Types:

A - Drilled (lead insert in masonry, expansion bolt in concrete)

B - Adhesive grouted anchor

C - Cast in place insert

D - Toggle bolt, hollow wall fastener

E - Sheet metal screw

F - Wood screw

G - Sheet rock screw

H - Through bolt

I - Lag screw

In wet, exterior, or corrosive, all fasteners and anchors shall be Type 316 stainless steel. In all unclassified areas, cadmium-plated fasteners shall be used.

Notes:

(1) Support via plywood mounting panel lagged to studs or via electrical channel lagged to studs.

(2) Do not mount to these surfaces.

(3) Panels mounted to masonry or concrete surfaces shall have 1/2-inch air space between surface and panel via stainless steel spacers.

(4) Provide two additional support connections; minimum of four or six, depending on number of normal connection points. This requirement may necessitate fabricating the additional

connections. Maintain NEMA rating of enclosure.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 16196-1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 16196

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates, signs and labels.

B. Directory cards.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Conduit markers.

E. Underground warning tape.


A. Section 02730 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK

B. ALL DIVISION 16

1.03. REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01305, Submittals and Section 02730, General Electrical Work.

B. Product Data - Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.

C. Submit complete list of captions for nameplates, signs, and labels.

D. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer or County.

E. Manufacturer’s Instructions - Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

1.06. EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700, Contract Closeout.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Nameplates and Signs

1. Unclassified Areas - Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

2. Warning Signs - Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on red background.

B. Letter Size

1. 5/16-inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.

2. 3/8-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

3. 1/2-inch letters for identifying panelboards, motor control centers, other large sized enclosures.

2.02. LABELS - EQUIPMENT IN ENCLOSURES

A. Self-debossing, aluminum foil type.

B. Material - 0.0002-inch thick aluminum foil.

C. Typewritten or machine impressed.

D. Permanent pressure-sensitive adhesive; high temperature adhesive for labels on heat producing devices.

E. Letter Size - All upper case, minimum 0.1-inch high.

F. Embossed adhesive strip labels from hand-held dispenser devices are not permitted.

G. Manufacturer - Seton, Brady, EMED Company, Inc., or equal.

2.03. DIRECTORY CARDS

A. Typewritten or machine printed in upper-case letters on extra heavyweight paper or card stock.

B. Locations

1. Panelboards

2. Load centers

3. Distribution panels

2.04. WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers

1. Thomas & Betts


2. Brady

3. Or equal

B. Description - Machine printed wire label with clear tape overwrap, or sleeve type wire markers. Black print on white background.

C. Legend

1. Power and Lighting Circuits - Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.

2. Control Circuits - Control wire number shall match that indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on shop drawings.

2.05. TERMINAL TAGS, COVERS AND MARKERS

A. Terminal markers shall be the type specified in the following table or, or equal:

DESCRIPTION TYPE APPLICATION

Terminal Marking Card Phoenix Type SBS All Terminal Blocks as Required

Terminal Strip Marker Phoenix Type KLM Each Group of Blocks

Insertion Strip Phoenix Type ES/LP As Required

2.06. CONDUIT MARKERS

A. Manufacturers

1. Seton Model ‘On the Spot Marker’

2. Brady

3. EMED Company, Inc.

4. Or equal

B. Description

1. Standard preprinted, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, plastic sheet extending 360 degrees around conduit; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive backing, matching adhesive plastic tape, cover with plastic laminate.

2. Emergency Powered Circuit Conduit - Black lettering on red background.

3. General Conduit 120 Volt System - Black lettering on white background.

4. Conduit Up to and Including 2-Inch Diameter - Marker color field shall be 8 inches long.

5. Conduit Larger Than 2-Inch Diameter - Marker color field shall be 12 inches long.


6. Letter Size

CONDUIT DIAMETER LETTER HEIGHT

1/2" through 1-3/8" 1/2"

1-1/2" through 2-3/8" 3/4"

2-1/2" and larger 1-1/4"

All lettering shall be upper case.

C. Color

1. 480 Volt System - Red.

2. 208 Volt System - Blue.

3. 277 Volt System - Blue.

4. Telephone System - Green

D. Legend

1. 480 Volt System - (Circuit No.) - 480V.



4. Telephone System - Telephone.

2.07. UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Description - 6-inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines; Model as manufactured by Seton, EMED Company, Inc.

2.08. ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS

A. Provide and install warning labels (orange <40 cal/cm2) or danger label (red > 40 cal/cm

2) for

each piece of equipment in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-2002.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. APPLICATION SCHEDULE, SIGNS, NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Signs - As specified herein or as shown on the Contract Drawings and as required by NFPA 70.

B. Nameplates - All electrical enclosures and operating devices, such as:

1. Power distribution equipment.

2. Transformers.


3. Distribution panels.

4. Panelboards and load centers.

5. Transfer switches.

6. Equipment control panels.

7. Motor starting switches.

8. Safety switches.

9. Disconnect switches.

10. Annunciator.

11. Instrument enclosures.

12. Alarm control panels.

C. Labels - All electrical devices inside enclosures, control panels, wall switches, receptacles, control stations, and dedicated receptacles.

D. Label - All dedicated receptacles, amps, voltage, and appliance name.

E. Provide Service Entrance Plaques with identification information in accordance with NFPA 70 (NEC).

3.02. NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.

B. On NEMA 1, 2, 5, 12, and 12K equipment, secure plastic laminate and nameplate to equipment front using a minimum of two self-tapping Type 316 stainless steel sheet metal screws. Adhesive mounting is not acceptable.

C. On NEMA 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 11, 13, 7, 8, 9, and 10 equipment, use industrial grade double face adhesive tape or glue to permanently bond the nameplate to the mounting surface.

D. On recessed panelboards in finished locations, secure nameplate to inside surface of door.

E. On surface mounted panelboards, install nameplates on the front of the door centered above or below manufacturer’s nameplate.

F. Labels Inside of Enclosures - Center beneath respective components, clearly visible and readily associated with the equipment which they are intended to identify.

3.03. DIRECTORY CARDS

A. Permanently fasten directory card in place behind protecting glass or clear plastic cover. Remote equipment names must match directory.


3.04. CONDUIT SYSTEM

A. Identify conduit numbers as shown on motor control center or power distribution schedule or diagrams.

B. Provide markers on exposed conduit

1. At each device.

2. At junction boxes with more than one incoming and outgoing conduit.

3. At each point of entry to or exit from a room.

4. At 50 feet on center in runs exceeding 100 feet.

3.05. WIRE MARKERS

A. All panel connection wiring shall be tagged at terminations with machine printed, slip-on tags. The Contractor shall show wire/cable tag designations on all wiring diagrams. There shall be a tag placed within two inches of any wiring termination. The tag shall be fixed to the wire to prevent the tag from sliding more than two inches from the terminal as the result of gravity or vibration. Wires shall also be labeled at each junction box, panelboard gutter, pullbox, and load connection.

B. Control Circuits: Each individual connection wire shall be tagged at both ends of the wire with a wire number. The tag shall be placed on the wire within two inches of the terminal to which the wire is terminated. The Contractor shall assign a unique number to each wire within a panel.

C. Power Circuits: All 120 VAC power wires shall be tagged with the designation “120 VAC-“, followed by the circuit breaker number shown on the Contract Drawings, and followed by a letter designating whether the wire carries line (L), neutral (N), or power ground(PG).

D. Signal Circuits: Signal circuit multi-conductor cables shall be tagged at each end with the designation shown on the wiring diagram. Each signal conductor shall be tagged at each end with the designation of the terminal block to which it is connected. Individual conductors in each pair of twisted-pair cable shall have distinctly different colors, such as black and white, or black and clear. Shield ground common wires connected between drain wire terminal shall be green and shall be tagged “SG”.

3.06. TERMINAL TAGS, COVERS AND MARKERS

A. Each terminal strip shall have a unique alphanumeric code designation at one end and a plastic marking strip running the entire length with a unique number for each terminal. The Contractor shall assign terminal strip numbers from the number “1” and continuing in ascending cardinal order. The terminal strip designation shall be the letters “TB” followed by the terminal strip number. The strip and terminal point designations shall be machine printed and 1/8 inch high. Terminal blocks carrying 120 VAC power circuits shall be provided with a transparent, hinged cover for personal protection and accessibility.

3.07. OPERATIONAL SAFETY AND WARNING SIGNS

A. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide sign with clearly-written messages appropriate for the situation (i.e., At automatically started equipment, sign to read, ‘Danger, This Equipment Automatically Starts - Stay Back’).


3.08. UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Provide continuous underground warning tape above all ductbank(s) in accordance with ductbank detail.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 16900-1 INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

SECTION 16900

INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section includes requirements for the complete instrumentation system for this project as shown, specified and as scheduled. Detailed specifications for instrumentation equipment are included herein, on the Contract Drawings, and where specifically referenced elsewhere in the specifications.

This Section shall apply to all instrumentation furnished under this project regardless of whether it is specifically identified in this Section unless otherwise specified.


A. Division 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – All Sections

B. Section 01305 - SUBMITTALS

C. Section 02730 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK

D. Section 16903 – AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

E. Section 16950 – TESTING AND INSPECTION

F. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in full compliance with Division 16, Electrical Specifications.

1.03. REFERENCES

A. Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been specified herein:

1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

2. ASME - The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

3. ASTM - The American Society for Testing Materials

4. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers Association

5. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

6. ISA - Instrument Society of America

7. NEC - National Electrical Code

8. NEMA ICS 1 – General Standards for Industrial Control Systems


9. NEMA ICS 3 – Industrial Systems

10. NEMA ICS 6 – Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01305, Submittals and 01640, Equipment - General.

B. Submittals for equipment and materials shall be clearly marked or noted with specific features, standard options, and wiring diagrams to indicate compliance with Contract Documents.

C. Where deviations to Contract Documents are proposed, submit a list of deviations. Provide a detailed description and explanation for each deviation.

D. Submit shop drawings which shall include the following:

1. Bill of Materials for all instrumentation and accessories.

2. Manufacturer’s catalog information for all instrumentation and accessories.

3. Manufacturer’s wiring diagram including field termination points and project specific requirements.

4. Spare Parts List (including specified spare parts to be furnished by the Contractor and manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list for each instrument).

5. Instrumentation Tag List.

6. Project specific installation and mounting details for each instrument type. Materials of construction for supports, brackets, and mounting hardware shall be provided with details. Mounting details shall include specific details of interfacing with other equipment such as tanks, handrails, and other equipment required.

E. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a set of system coordination drawings which shall show all instrument connections and interconnections as well as the functional and connection relationship of the instrumentation equipment to the related equipment and devices.

F. Submit calibration report for each piece of instrumentation, including spares. Report shall include as a minimum the following:

1. Project Name

2. Device Location

3. References

4. Instrument Tag/Description

5. Manufacturer/Model

6. Manufacturer Serial Number


7. Test Equipment Type and ID Number

8. Date and Time Calibrated

9. Calibrated By

10. Calibration Data showing the input value, output value and deviation percentage at 0, 10, 25, 50, 75, 90, and 100 % of full capacity

11. Ambient Temperature Conditions

12. Other relevant data where applicable, including temperature, pressure and type of process fluid or media.

G. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that final acceptance test has been successfully completed.

H. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manual in accordance with the Section entitled Electrical General and Division 1 specifications. Each shall include:

1. Index and tabbed section dividers.

2. Reviewed submittals

3. Wiring diagrams.

4. System coordination drawings.

5. Field adjustable settings (e.g. set points, ranges, spans, current alarm trips)

6. Manufacturer's instructions on care and operation of equipment.

7. Warranty certificates.

8. Spare parts list.

9. Complete typewritten operating instructions, covering all systems descriptions and operation, emergency operating instructions and precautions.

10. Name, address and telephone number of supplier and representative of manufacturer for each item of equipment in Contract.

Bind above items (all unused, clean, and legible) in three ring binders and submit to Owner for review. Provide before request for final acceptance.

I. Submit project Record Documents in accordance with Division 1 Specifications.


A. Uniformity: Unless otherwise specified, equipment or material of same type or classification, shall be products of same manufacturer. All material shall be new and of the latest design of manufacturer providing equipment or material.

B. Design: Equipment and accessories not specifically described or identified by manufacturer's catalog numbers shall be designed in conformity with ISA, ANSI, ASME, ASTM, and other applicable technical standards and shall have neat and finished appearance.


1.06. WARRANTY

A. All instrumentation shall be provided with a minimum of a (2) two year warranty covering sensors, transducers and transmitters. Warranty duration shall commence the date of substantial completion.

1.07. COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate with equipment suppliers to verify the proposed instrumentation equipment will function as designed for each specific application. Contractor shall verify field conditions and equipment submittals to verify mounting configurations and arrangements. Any deviations from that which is specified shall be brought to the Owner’s attention during shop drawing submittal reviews.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01. GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise specified, each measurement system shall be accurate within one percent of full scale reading over the specified range. This accuracy requirement shall apply to each overall system including any transmitters, re-transmitters, receivers, etc. that are shown or required.

B. All instrumentation equipment and components shall be supplied by the Contractor, who shall coordinate the equipment and its arrangements in the shop drawing, installation and start up stages of the work.

C. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one year's supply of all charts, pens, special paper, ribbons, etc. for any and all instruments provided unless otherwise noted.

D. Relay contacts shall be rated a minimum of 5 amperes at 120 VAC, unless otherwise noted.

2.02. SIGNAL CARRIERS

A. Signal carriers for instrumentation shall include the electric wires, cables and conduits as shown, specified and required for a complete transmission of signals between transmitters and receivers.

B. Electronic instrument signals (4-20mA) shall be carried over shielded twisted pairs of wires as specified.

C. All electric interconnections and terminations shall be in accordance with the requirements for control wiring specified.

D. Shielded, coaxial, or special cables, where specified or required by the manufacturer, shall be supplied by the Contractor regardless of whether they are specifically scheduled or shown.

E. Current isolators shall be provided and installed where required for proper operation of the equipment and signals.


2.03. LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION

A. General

Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation equipment from induced surges propagating along the signal a power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, shall be maintenance free, and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, properly grounded. Ground wires for surge protectors shall be connected to an earth ground and where practical, each ground wire shall be installed individually and insulated from each other. The protection systems shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or a separate NEMA 4X junction box connected via a PVC coated RGS conduit nipple to the enclosure. The units shall be as manufactured by Joslyn, Pheonix Contact, or equal.

B. Power Supply

Protection shall be provided for all 120 VAC instrument power supply lines. Cabinets, control panel enclosures and groups of field instruments shall be protected by isolation transformers and surge suppressors. Individual field instruments shall be protected by individual gas tube surge suppressors.

C. Signal Lines

All 4-20 mA analog signal loops containing field mounted (i.e. remote from control panel) transmitters shall include surge/lightning transient protectors at both ends of the loop (at instrument and in control panel enclosure). Transient protectors shall be Joslyn Model 1669-02, Phoenix Contact Pipe Trab, or equal.

2.04. GENERAL EQUIPMENT

A. Instrument housing or enclosures shall be suitable for installation in the location where the instrument is mounted as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. General Equipment Parameters

1. Provide one (1) transmitter assembly for each transducer. Multi-channel transmitters are not applicable for this project unless otherwise noted.

2. All memory shall be non-volatile EEPROM. Configuration parameters and alarm set points shall not be lost upon power loss.

3. Instruments shall be configured to energize up after a power outage.

4. All terminal strips shall be labeled for external electrical connections.

C. Signal Conditioners

1. Isolators: Current to current (I/I) or Current to Voltage (I/E) isolators shall be one of the following:

a. 4 wire type - Rochester Instrument System (RIS) Series 1300 AC, AGM Series PTA 4000, or equal with options as required for application.


b. 4 wire type - M-System Co., LTD Model KWVS, or equal with options as required for application.

c. 2 wire type - Rochester Instrument System (RIS) Series 2300, AGM series HPM, or equal with options as required for application.

d. Rack mounted type - Rochester Instrument System (RIS) Series SC-8300, AGM Series REA 4000, or equal with options as required for application.

D. Power Supplies

1. DC power supplies shall be of sufficient size to power all connected equipment with an additional 50% reserve. Provide individual dedicated power supplies where shown on the drawings. Provide common power supplies for powering multiple circuits where shown on the drawings. DC power supplies shall be one of the following:

a. Phoenix Contact

b. or Equal

E. Power Disconnection and Overcurrent Protection

1. Panel mounted instruments shall have integral or external fuse protection.

2. Panel mounted large case instruments shall be cord and plug connected or shall have toggle switch for power disconnection.

F. Digital Display Indicators

1. General: The digital display indicator shall be LED type, numeric display suitable for panel mounting.

2. Electrical:

a. Display Type: 7 segment, 3-1/2 digit LED direct readout.

b. Input Signal: 4-20mA into a 250ohm load (max), Isolated.

c. Accuracy: +/-0.5% of span

d. Power Supply: 120VAC or Loop Powered

e. Output: (2) Configurable Set-Point Relays

3. Mounting: Provide mounting hardware for panel mounting on front of enclosure doors, sub-panel mounting, or swing-out panel mounting as required for each individual application.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Red Lion Control – Apollo Series

b. Durant – Eclipse Series

c. Or Equal


G. Accessories

1. Nameplates – Provide nameplates for each instrument as specified.

2. Mounting Hardware – Provide stainless steel mounting hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s suggestions to mount equipment in locations as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide additional mounting brackets and hardware as detailed on the Contract Drawings. All bolts shall be epoxy grouted in concrete.

3. Conduit Connections – Transducer wiring shall be installed in PVC coated rigid steel conduit from the transmitter to the mounting surface of the transducer mounting bracket. Final connections to the transducer shall be made with liquid tight flexible metal conduit with PVC coated couplings and fittings. (Provide explosion proof flexible conduit for equipment located in Hazardous Locations). Provide conduit reducers as required to accommodate conduit fittings less than ¾”.

SPACE BELOW INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


2.05. LEVEL SWITCH – FLOAT

A. General

Float switches shall be provided for level control and level monitoring where shown on the Contract Drawings and scheduled herein.

Float (Ball) shall be direct acting, leak-proof, shock-proof, corrosion resistant and constructed of polypropylene or other corrosion resistant material. Switch shall be electromechanical microswitch or snap-action switch (change-over switch (mercury type float switches are not acceptable).

B. Switch: Switch assembly shall be a hermetically sealed micro-switch that is activated by a moving counterweight as the switch assembly changes position in the fluid.

Switch contacts shall be rated a minimum of 16 amperes at 250 VAC. Switch shall be provided with one normally open (NO) and one normally closed (NC) contact.

C. Cable: Float switch cable shall be provided with sensor as an integral assembly. Cable shall be PVC insulated, oil resistant, and suitable for use in sewage and wastewater applications. Cable shall be sealed at the float utilizing a flexible boot and compression type lock seal.

Cables shall be 3 wire cables, provided with a minimum size conductor of No. 17 AWG.

Cables shall be provided in sufficient length to mount the float switches in the locations shown on the Contract Drawings plus an additional 10 feet (minimum) of cable. Cables shall be provided in continuous lengths between the float and the associated junction box or control panel.

Excess cable shall be coiled and tie-wrapped to the cable mounting supports.

D. Mounting: Float switches shall be provided with support masts and mounting bracketswhere shown on the Contract Drawings. Float switch masts shall be Model 874862W-BR as manufactured by J.M. Gillin Corp. or equal.

Coordinate type of mast and bracket for each individual application with the Contract Drawings.

Provided wire mesh grips to support cables.

E. Mfr.: MJK Automation – Model 7030 (Mercury Free)

Anchor Scientific – Eco-Float SE/SI

Or Equal

F. Schedule:

Instrument Tag:

Service Actuation Level Reference Notes

LSLL Low Water Level Alarm Float Refer to M Contract Drawings

2,3

LSL All Pumps Off Refer to M Contract Drawings

2,3

LSH Lead Pump ON Refer to M Contract Drawings

2,3

LSHH High Water Level Alarm Float Refer to M Contract Drawings

2,3

Spares: Provide 2 spare float switches

Reference Notes:

1. Provide control circuit lightning protection.

2. Float Switch Circuits shall be intrinsically safe.


3. Actuation Level shall be set by Contractor in the field. Coordinate final levels with Owner.

4. Attach float to pump support/lifting cable 6” above pump housing with stainless steel cable clamps.

2.06. FLOW METER – MAGNETIC

SCHEDULE OF MAGNETIC FLOW METERING EQUIPMENT

NAMEPLATE DESIGNATION

FLOW TRANSMITTER/ ELEMENT

FLOW DESIGNATION

SIZE

LINER MATERIAL FLOW RANGE

(GPM)

Wastewater Flow FE/FIT-1 3” Neoprene/ Urethane or Hard/ SBR Rubber

0-500GPM

A. General

Magnetic flow meters shall provide continuous flow measurement of municipal wastewater and waste activated sludge. The flow meter shall measure the average velocity of the media and produce a 4-20mA signal proportional to the flow rate. The flow tube and converter/transmitter assembly shall be by the same manufacturer.

Principle of Operation: The magnetic flow meter shall use Faraday’s law of Electromagnetic Induction to induce a voltage in a conductor (conductive liquid) moving through a magnetic field, the magnitude of induced voltage being proportional to the velocity of the conductor.

B. Process Application Parameters: Media: Municipal Wastewater Fluid Velocity Range: Less than 30 fps Pipe Size/Material: (See schedule below for pipe size) / Ductile Iron Pipe Orientation: Horizontal or Vertical Mounting: Inline type flow tube w/flange mounting. Pipe reduces

upstream and downstream of each unit. Standard Conditions: 0-140 F.

C. Performance Requirements: Accuracy: 0.2% of rate in 10 to 100% of flow range. Not affected by

changes in percent solids, fluid density, temperature, or viscosity.

Repeatability: 0.1% of rate in 10 to 100% of flow range. Drift: Include zero stability as an inherent characteristic of the

metering system electronics Minimum Liquid

Conductivity: 5 micro-siemens per centimeter

D. Flow Element:

Flow Tube: Metering tube shall be constructed of non-magnetic type 304 stainless steel. Metering tube shall be capable of accidental submergence in 30’ of water for 48 hours. (NEMA 6P)

Liner: Neoprene/Urethene or Hard/SBR Rubber

Coil Excitation: Pulsed DC


Sensing Element: Electrodes shall be constructed of type 316 stainless steel. Unit shall be provided with high impedance amplifiers in the electrode sensing circuit to minimize the need for periodic electrode maintenance.

Mounting: Stainless Steel flange connections drilled to the 150 lb ANSI Standard.

Cable Connections:

For Remote Transmitter Assemblies: Provide sensor manufacturer’s cable assembly(s) for interconnection between the flow tube and remote transmitter assembly. Flow tube shall be provided with a NEMA 4X terminal box and watertight cable entrance seals. Cable shall be provided in sufficient length to connect the equipment for the locations shown on the Contract Drawings.

E. Transmitter: Design: The transmitter shall consist of a magnet driver to power the

magnet coil and a signal converter. The converter shall be of integrated solid state circuitry and shall convert the transmitter output signal to a 4-20 mA signal which is linearly proportional to the flow measured.

Incorporate automatic zero stability without flow interruption. Electronic Converter: Transmitter electronics shall based on the principle of pulsed

dc coil excitation to eliminate the need to periodically reset zero signal at zero flow.

Low Flow Cutoff: Drive the output signal to zero when the measured flow rate is 0-10% (adjustable) of full scale and when fully developed flow no longer exists.

Input Span: Continuously adjustable between 0-1 fps and 0-31 fps via a calibrated range dial. Range adjustment shall be direct reading. Converter shall not be affected by quadrature noise nor shall it require zero adjustment or special tools for startup.

Enclosure: NEMA 4X fiberglass, remote or integral mounting from flow tube as scheduled.

Display: Integral LCD, scaled in gpm. Interface: Alphanumeric Keypad Power Supply: 120 VAC, 1 Phase, 60 Hz. Output Signal: 4-20mA signal isolated, into 600 ohms. Signal shall be linear

and directly proportional to flow. 1 Pulse output signal for remote flow totalization

Relay Outputs: Two (2) 0.5 amp, SPDT Field Adjustable Set Points (Alarm Signal)

Conduit Connections: Two (2) – 1/2" (1 Power, 1 signal) Surge Protection: As scheduled

F. Options/Accessories:

Integral Totalizer Corrosion resistant ground rings/straps. Meters shall be hydraulically calibrated, traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.

G. Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser – Promag 53W Foxboro – Series 9100 w/IMT-25 Transmitter Or Equal

H. Schedule: Service

Instrument Range

Calibrated Range

Reference Notes

FE/FIT-1 Wastewater Flow 0-500GPM 4


Reference Notes:

1. Provide transmitter power supply and 4-20mA output signal circuit lightning protection at the transmitter.

2. Electrical Classification: Flow tubes shall be FM approved for installation in Class I, Division 2, Group D Hazardous Locations as defined by the National Electric Code.

3. Transmitters shall be mounted in NEMA 4X Instrument Enclosures. Instrument Enclosures shall be provided with all accessories as shown on the Contract Drawings.

4. Transmitter Assembly shall be remotely mounted from Flow Tube. 5. Provide Submergence Rated Flow Tube.

I. Manufacturer’s Services (Authorized Service Representative)

Installation: Installation Oversight, Calibration, Pre-Final Testing – 4 hours

Final Acceptance:

Equipment Demonstration – 1 hours

Training: 2 hours of instruction

Calibration: 3 Point Calibration



2.07. DIGITAL 7-DAY CIRCULAR CHART RECORDER NEMA 4X

A. General Microprocessor based circular chart recorders shall be provided to record chlorine residual Chart recorders shall provide a continuous, permanent record on a paper chart. Recorder shall be capable of printing its own chart grid and background on blank thermal sensitive type charts. Recorder shall be provided with an alphanumeric display for digital indication of the channel reading and shall provide operator interface for configuration of the recorder.

B. Performance Requirements:

Accuracy: 0.1% of input span

Sensitivity: 0.05%

Span Step Response Time:

6 seconds max with no filtering

Sampling Rate: 3 times per second

C. Process/Mechanical:

Mechanism: Stylus shall be mounted on a swing plate such that all components are accessible from the front of the instrument.

Input Channels: 2 (1 Active, 1 Spare)

Number of Pens: 2 (1 Active, 1 Spare)

Pen Type: Thermal Sensitive

Output Channels: 2

Chart Size/Type: 12” (nominal)/ Circular Thermal Sensitive Paper

D. Electrical:

Design: Microprocessor based, field configurable Enclosure: NEMA 4X, with Acrylic Window and Door Lock Display: Integral vacuum fluorescent, alphanumeric Power Supply: 120 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz. Battery backup for memory retention Input Channels: 4-20 mA, 250 ohms Output Channels: 4-20 mA, isolated into a 600 ohm (minimum) impedance,

proportional to flow range selected. Relay Outputs: Two form C, Field Adjustable Trip Points. Conduit Connection: ¾” Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Mounting: Wall Mounted E. Options/Access: Options: Totalizer shall be provided for each input channel. Totalizers shall

be field resettable (password protected). Provide Chart Illumination

Spare Parts: 100 blank circular 12” charts (thermal sensitive)

F. Manufacturers: Honeywell – DR 4500 Truline (Smart Chart) – modify Model No. as appropriate for NEMA 4X Chessel Or Equal

G. Schedule: Service Instrument Range

Calibrated Range

Reference Notes

FIQR-1 Flow Chart Recorder NA Field Coordinate

Reference Notes:



H. Manufacturer’s Services (Authorized Service Representative)

Installation: Installation Oversight, Calibration, Pre-Final Testing – 2 hour(s) per instrument

Final Acceptance: Equipment Demonstration – 2 hour(s) per instrument type.

Training: 2 hours of instruction

Calibration: Field


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Electronic instruments and systems shall operate on a universal 4-20mA signal system unless otherwise noted. Instruments shall be installed in the instrument loop so that the failure or removal of any instrument from the loop, other than primary element or power supply, will not affect the remaining instruments on the loop or the overall integrity of the loop. This shall be accomplished through the use of bias resistors at each receiver.

2. All instruments shall be installed as shown, specified, directed and recommended by the manufacturers.

3. The instrument enclosures shall be solidly grounded with a ground conductor as specified in Section 16100, Grounding.

4. Instruments shall be factory calibrated to minimize field adjustments and insure proper operation.

5. Installation: Erect equipment in neat and workmanlike manner; align, level and adjust for satisfactory operation; install so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from indicated arrangements may be made, but only after obtaining approval from Owner. All power and signal (4-20 mA / 1-5 VDC / other) cables shall be kept isolated and installed in separate conduit systems.

6. All instruments shall be labeled with nameplates. In addition identification tags, instrumentation equipment shall be tagged by means of metal tags or durable printed symbols with information regarding manufacturer, serial number, catalog number and model number.

7. Instrument panels complete with all accessories and appurtenances as shown, specified and scheduled.

8. Furnish and install all mounting stands, supports structures, brackets and accessories as required or detailed for the installation of the instruments furnished. Unless otherwise specified or required, supports shall be aluminum. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. Equipment mounted on walls in contact with ground or water shall be mounted offset from the wall a minimum of 1 inch.

9. Temporary storage of all instrumentation equipment shall be in a humidity controlled environment heated to a minimum of 55 degrees F, maximum of 85 degrees F and in accordance with the General Provisions of the Contract Documents.

10. Isolation of each device on 4-20 mA loops as required to prevent ground loops, with current to current isolators.

11. Current to current isolators as required to provide rated outputs into total impedance of each loop.


12. Cutting and drilling of existing panels for new instrumentation as shown, specified, or required, including repair and touch up painting of panel after installation.

3.02. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General

1. Contractor shall furnish the services of a competent factory trained representative of the manufacturer who shall supervise the installation for proper assembly, start and operate the equipment, conduct field tests and make adjustments if required. Factory representative shall be certified by the manufacturer as being factory trained and competent to perform field calibration and adjustments, startup and demonstrations.

2. Factory representative shall verify proper mounting of the equipment, including hardware, mounting surface, and functional location.

3. Unless specifically waived in writing by the Owner, all tests and demonstrations shall be made in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner.

B. Pre-Final Field Tests

1. After installation, instrumentation equipment shall be checked and the required adjustments shall be made by the representatives of the manufacturers.

2. Equipment shall be field tested in the presence of the Owner and shall be demonstrated to operate satisfactorily over the specified ranges.

3. The Contractor shall provide the necessary test equipment and qualified test personnel.

4. In the event of failure of the field test, the Contractor shall perform the necessary corrections and retest, at his own cost and expense, the equipment as directed by the Owner.

5. Submit field calibration report for each individual instrument.

C. Final Acceptance Tests (Functional Demonstrations)

1. Each piece of instrumentation shall be tested to demonstrate that the equipment has been properly installed, calibrated, and is functioning as specified including:

a. Demonstrate that configuration set points are not lost upon power loss. This shall be tested by disconnecting the transmitter from power for 30 minutes.

2. Final Acceptance shall be performed by a factory trained service Owner or representative.

3. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance prior to the scheduling the final acceptance test.

4. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that final acceptance test has been successfully completed.


3.03. TRAINING

A. Training shall be provided for each piece of instrumentation provided for this project. Training shall be conducted on site, and shall be conducted by a factory trained service engineer or representative. Training shall include calibration, trouble shooting, and maintenance of each piece of instrumentation.

B. Manufacturer’s services for training time shall be performed separate from Installation and Final Acceptance services.

C. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance prior to scheduling the training.

END OF SECTION

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 16903-1 AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

SECTION 16903

AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pushbutton.

B. Selector switches.

C. Indicating pilot lights.

D. Contact blocks.

E. Control power transformers.

F. Fuse blocks.

G. Limit switches.

H. Timers.

I. Time delay relays.

J. Electronic alternating relay.

K. Industrial control relays.

L. Intrinsically safe relays.


A. Section 01305 – SUBMITTALS

B. Section 02730 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK

C. ALL Division 16

1.03. REFERENCES

NEMA ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Control Systems NEMA ICS 2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems NEMA ST 1 Standard for Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type)

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01305, Submittals.

B. Submit shop drawings to NEMA ICS 1 indicating control panel layouts, wiring connections and diagrams, dimensions, support points.


C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01305, Submittals.

D. Submit product data for each component specified. The submittal shall be included as part of the system in which the component is specified.

E. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01305, Submittals.

F. Submit samples as requested by the County Engineer.

1.05. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 1 Specifications.

B. Accurately record actual locations of control equipment. Revise diagrams included in Drawings to reflect actual control device connections.

1.06. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications.

B. Include instructions for adjusting and resetting time delay relays, timers, and counters.

C. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Division 1 Specifications.

D. Include recommended preventive maintenance procedures and materials.

1.07. QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 10 years’ experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01. GENERAL

A. All components shall be UL listed.

2.02. PILOT DEVICES

A. General

1. Pilot devices shall include indicating light, pushbuttons, and selector switches.

2. Heavy-duty, industrial type, construction.

3. Area Classification

a. Non-Classified Area Device Rating - NEMA 13 oil-tight.

b. Wet Area or Exterior Device Rating - NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 oil-tight and watertight.

c. Corrosive Area Device Rating - NEMA 4X, non-metallic.

d. Hazardous Area Device Rating - NEMA 7, explosionproof.


4. Controls and relays shall be by one manufacturer wherever possible.

5. Provide enclosure for field mounted devices and individual controls.

6. 30-millimeter diameter.

7. Retaining ring and boot type.

B. Pushbuttons and Selector Switches (PB) and (SEL SW)

1. Lockout feature as indicated.

2. Color - Red for stop or terminate function; black for all others.

3. Operators:

a. Provide “gloved hand” knobs for selector switches.

b. Provide “mushroom head” button on emergency stop pushbuttons.

4. Stackable contact blocks.

5. Devices shall be either momentary, maintained, spring return, push-pull, or other operational types as shown or otherwise specified.

6. Manufacturer NEMA 4 and 13 Oil and Water Tight - Square D Type K.

7. Manufacturer NEMA 4X, Non-Metallic - Square D Type SK.

8. Manufacturer NEMA 7, Explosionproof - Crouse-Hinds Type EFS and Type EMP for panel-mounted units.

C. Indicating Pilot Lights (IL)

1. Glass or plastic lens.

2. 24 VDC LED transformer type.

3. Push-to-test type. When six or more pilot lights are used in control panels, a single lamp test switch can be used in lieu of all lamps being push-to-test.

4. Lens color shall be as follows:

FUNCTION COLOR Motor running Red Malfunction Amber Ready Green

5. Manufacturers - Square D, or equal.

2.03. TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified terminal blocks shall be captive screw with pressure plate, DIN EN 50035 rail 600 volt rating. Terminal blocks shall be the type specified in the following table, or equal.


DESCRIPTION TYPE APPLICATION Terminal Block Phoenix UK5N 120 VAC Neutral

24 VDC Power Return Shiled Terminals

Grounding Terminal Block Phoenix USLKG5 Equipment Grounding Fused Disconnect Terminals UK6.3 Fused Disconnects 120 VAC Line

24 VDC Power Analog Input Surge Suppressor Phoenix TT-2-PE-24DC Analog Input Signal Wire Bridged Block Allen Bradley 1492-HM2C Logic Circuits End Clamps Phoenix E/UKT Each Group of Blocks

2.04. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER (CPT)

A. Standard industrial control type, VA size as required for the powered load.

B. Dual voltage primary, with 120V ac, single phase secondary. All primary connections fused; size as required for the transformer.

C. Secondary control fuse with capacity for the control circuit indicated.

D. DIN rail-mounted type in control panels.

E. Manufacturer - Square D, or equal.

2.05. FUSE BLOCKS

A. General purpose Class H, K, and R phenolic fuse block for dual-element cartridge fuses.

B. DIN rail mounted in control panels.

C. Manufacturer - Buchanan or equal.

2.06. LIMIT SWITCHES (LS)

A. Contacts - Silver-to-silver snap-acting where practicable and in all cases where the motion is slow.

B. Switches - Operated by levers, plungers, or pushrods, depending on the application.

C. Rollers - Provided where excessive wear due to a sliding action would result.

D. Limit switches shall be suitable for installation in locations where shown on the Contract Drawings or specified.

E. Limit switches shall be provided with 2 – N.O. and 2-N.O. contacts for operation of fan or light circuits.

F. Manufacturer - Square D Class 9007 Type C, or equal.

2.07. MOTOR-DRIVEN RESET TIMERS (MTR)

A. Synchronous motor driven type.


B. Calibrated dial adjustment of time setting as well as indication of expired time.

C. Manufacturer - Eagle Signal Division HP 5 Series, ATC Series 305.

2.08. ELAPSED TIME METERS (ETM)

A. Minimum six digit, non-resettable hour meter panel mounted.

B. For operation on 120 volts.

C. Manufacturer - General Electric, or equal.

2.09. PROGRAMMABLE TIMERS

A. Microprocessor-based digital controller with eight channels, each channel programmable for each day of the week on a separate schedule, or repeat function for every day of week, with one setting.

B. Program entries shall be made by mechanical pushbutton and an acknowledgement of each entry into the unit shall be by audible signal.

C. Override switches shall be provided for continuous On or Off, automatic and visual indicators for each channel.

D. Controller shall provide 365-day programming in advance with up to 40 holiday dates and 8th day holiday schedule. Also, eight holiday blocks of unlimited duration, each capable of a different schedule.

E. Each channel shall have independent programming with 40 On/Off pairs per week.

F. User selectable a.m./p.m. or 24-hour military time.

G. Automatic daylight savings or standard time. Provide daylight saving option to offer U.S. option (first Sunday in April/last Sunday in October).

H. Up to nine different duty cycle patterns settable from 1-99 minutes On.

I. Pulsed or maintained output contacts, user selectable.

J. Plain English self-prompting display.

K. Timing sequences shall be fully detailed in the operations and maintenance manuals for the respective equipment controlled.

L. Manufacturer - Tork “K864Z” Series or equal.

2.10. SOLID STATE TIMING RELAYS (TR)

A. Solid-state type with calibrated dial head or dip switch adjustment, encapsulated coil, snap-action switch assembly of number of poles indicated.

B. “On-Delay,” “Off-Delay,” or “On-Off Delay” dual head type as indicated; timing range intervals as shown or specified.

C. Bases shall have captive screws for locking fork solderless connectors, single tier design, with relay retainer clips.


D. Dust-tight construction.

E. Provide auxiliary contacts where indicated.

F. Contacts rated 10 amps resistive and 1 amp inductive at 120 VAC.

G. Manufacturer – ATC Diversified Electronics Series “TDC/TUC;” Square D, Type JCK; Timemark 300 Series, or equal.

2.11. GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROL RELAYS (CR)

A. Units shall be plug-in type.

B. Use - Shall be used in motor control centers where all relays are in separate sections and only for such things as indicating lights, alarm output, and motor starting coil seal in contact.

C. Number of poles and arrangement as shown or specified.

D. Contacts

1. Shall be rated 10 amps resistive and 1 amp inductive at 240 volts AC.

2. Material shall be silver cadmium oxide.

E. Coils shall be rated continuous duty.

F. Sockets

1. Supply with relay retainer clip.

2. Terminal connections with captive screw to accept locking fork solderless connectors.

3. Single tier design.

G. Manufacturers - Square D Company Class 8501 Type K relay and Type NR socket; Potter-Brumfield; or equal.

2.12. INDUSTRIAL CONTROL RELAYS (CR)

A. Industrial machine tool type.

B. Use - Shall be used to control equipment with power requirements, such as solenoid valves.

C. Shall be used in MCC for all control relay applications.

D. Contacts

1. Double break field convertible.

2. Rated 10 amps resistive and 1 amp inductive at 600 volts AC.

3. Rated 10 amps resistive and 1 amp inductive at 250 volts DC.

E. Coil shall be encapsulated, continuously rated of the voltage rating indicated on the plans.

F. Number of poles as indicated on Contract Drawings, but not less than four.


G. Holding and Operating Mechanism

1. Electrically held, electrically operated, Square D Company Class 8501, Type X; or equal.

2. Mechanically held/electrically held relay with mechanically-held attachment.

3. Time Delay - Pneumatic timer attachment for electrically-held delay; ‘on delay’ or ‘off delay” as indicated on plans.

2.13. ELECTRONIC ALTERNATING RELAY (ALT)

A. Relay type.

B. Contacts - Rated 10 amps at 120 VAC.

C. Electronic, continuous duty, capable of duplex or triplex operation.

D. UL listed.

E. Manufacturer - Diversified Electronics No. ARA-120-AME, or equal.

2.14. INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS (ISR)

A. Intrinsically safe relays shall be UL listed for Class I, Group D, Division 1 Hazardous Locations, 120VAC, 1 phase operation, with 1-N.O. and 1-N.C. 8 amperes output contacts. Intrinsically safe relays shall be type S27A1D0 as manufactured by Warwick Controls, Harwil Corporation, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. General purpose control relays shall be used in motor control centers and manufactured or custom-built control panels.

3.02. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER

A. Provide individual control power transformers for each control circuit.

B. Size as required by control circuit.

3.03. FUSE BLOCKS

A. Size as indicated on Drawings or as required.

3.04. LIMIT SWITCHES

A. Limit switches shall be provided where specified and where it is required to convert a mechanical motion into the control of an electric circuit.

3.05. PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

A. Units shall be back-mounted wherever possible.


3.06. SOLID STATE TIMING RELAYS

A. Solid state timing relays shall be provided where indicated on the Contract Drawings to delay starting of pumping equipment thereby minimizing the starting current required of the Emergency Generators.

B. Timing relays shall be set to start equipment in 15 second intervals, i.e. if two pumps are to be delayed, pump no.1 shall be delayed 15 seconds and pump no.2 delayed 30 seconds.

C. Install timing relay on the main control power feed to each Motor Starter Control Panel such that the delay only occurs when power is first applied to the Motor Starter Control Panel. In cases where one control panel controls multiple pumps to be sequenced, contractor shall install timing relays such that “call to run” signals to the individual motor starters are delayed in 15 second increments.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16950

TESTING AND INSPECTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical power distribution and control circuit testing.


A. Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

B. Section 01305 – SUBMITTALS

C. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

D. Section 02730 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK

E. Section 16900 – INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

F. Section 16990 – CONTROL PANELS

G. All Division 16

1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Made in accordance with Section 01305, Submittals and as specified in this Contract.

B. Submit test records and reports for all testing.

1.04. CERTIFICATION OF TESTING

A. Perform all tests in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. When the presence of such representative is so waived, certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor.

B. Perform all tests in the presence of the Owner. Give the Owner written notice of all tests at least two weeks in advance.

1.05. TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all instruments and a qualified engineer to properly perform all tests required.

1.06. FACTORY-TRAINED SUPERVISION

A. Provide necessary factory trained supervision to check over equipment for proper functioning before putting the equipment into operation as may be required by these specifications. This shall include establishing a simulated fault on checking out the coordination of the protective devices.

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 16950-1 TESTING AND INSPECTION

B. Make necessary adjustments and testing in cooperation with the respective manufacturers and other Contractors when necessary. Perform all tests in accordance with the latest standards of the ANSI, IPCEA, IEEE and NEMA.

1.07. COSTS

A. Costs of all tests shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the contract price.

1.08. DAMAGES

A. If damage is indicated or observed during testing or from the review of tabulated data, replace defective or damaged materials and retest at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01. TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all test equipment required to correctly perform the system tests.

2.02. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. 500-volt dc Megger - For maximum 300-volt systems.

B. 1,000-volt dc Megger - For 600-volt systems.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. GENERAL

A. After completion of the work, thoroughly test the entire electrical system, including electrical work required for instrumentation, control and power, and adjust electrical system as required.

B. Test all electrical circuits to insure circuit continuity, insulation resistance, proper splicing, and freedom from improper grounds.

C. System performance test runs are required. Coordinate test runs of electrical systems with test runs of equipment served thereby (i.e., mechanical, heating, air conditioning, process systems and plumbing).

3.02. GENERAL TESTING METHODS

A. Panels - Test each panel with mains disconnected from the feeder, branches connected, branch circuit breakers closed, all fixtures in place and permanently connected, lamps removed or omitted from the sockets, and all wall switches closed.

B. Feeders - Test with the feeders disconnected from the panels.

C. Individual Power Circuits - Test each individual power circuit at the panel or motor control center with the power equipment connected for proper operation.

D. Transformers (Low Voltage) - Megohmmeter test all transformers in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.


E. Lighting and receptacle circuits do not need to be megger tested.

3.03. EQUIPMENT TESTING (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

A. Megohmmeter Tests

1. Conduct megohmmeter tests of the insulation resistance of rotating machines and power distribution feeders down to panelboard feeders. The results will be accepted when the megger shows the insulation resistance to be not less than 50 megohms at 20 degrees C using either a 500-volt or 1,000-volt megger. Wait 1 minute between each test for all conductors in the same enclosure and each conductor and ground.

2. Perform megohmmeter testing (Insulation Resistance Test) of all motor power and control wiring after the cables are in place and just prior to final terminations. Record all data as per Exhibit A. Lighting and receptacle panelboard branch circuits are not megohmmeter tested.

B. Voltage and Amperage Testing

1. Check all single and three phase motor amperage while the unit is running at as close to operating load as possible. Record voltage on each line and the amp draw for each leg. Provide results in a typed report format and submit as part of the Contractor’s closeout package.

2. Check the load current in each phase of each distribution, lighting and receptacle panelboard feeder and make modifications to the circuit loading to correct load unbalance to within 1 kVA phase to phase for each panelboard.

3.04. GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. Test the grounding system to verify a resistance to ground of 5 ohms or less. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, modifications shall be made to the system by adding additional ground rods or plates to bring the resistance test value to 5 ohms or less. Perform test a minimum of 90 days after the installation of the ground rods. Submit a record/report to the Owner. Include the following:

1. Time, date, temperature, frost information depth (if applicable), and weather conditions.

2. Location of ground grid under test.

3. Date of ground grid installation.

4. Driven depth of electrodes.

5. Moisture content of earth at time of measurement (wet, dry, etc.).

6. Ground test equipment, model numbers, and last date of calibration.

7. Detailed description of method used.

8. Plot of “distance from ground grid versus resistance.” Resistances shall range from 0-50 ohms with enough points to produce a smooth curve.

9. Maintenance information and recommendations (if applicable).


B. Test all grounding conductors and grounding systems for continuity. Where continuity does not exist, conditions will be corrected by an approved method and the system retested.

3.05. SYSTEM LOAD BALANCING

A. Check the load current in each phase of each distribution panel feeder and make modifications to the circuit loading to correct load unbalance to within 1 kVA phase to phase for distribution panels.

3.06. SYSTEM CHECKS

A. Preliminary

1. Connect all motors to protective devices and controls to give proper motor acceleration and correct motor rotation. Interconnect the control wiring to all the control devices associated with a machine, a group of machines, or other device to produce the correct operation, timing, and/or sequencing of the equipment.

2. Adjust overload elements in motor starters and check for coordination with the actual installed motor characteristics. Replace any overload element that is inadequate.

3. Check all motor nameplates for verification of proper voltage, horsepower, speed, phase, and power factor.

B. Operational

1. Then give the equipment an operational test to determine that all components including motors, controls, protective and switching devices, and auxiliary associated equipment are in operable condition and can function as described and shown on relevant specifications, operating instructions, and drawings.

2. Take motor current reading at full load or as close to full load as the driven machine will develop. If the ammeter reading is over the rated full load current or the proper current for the load at which the machine was operated, determine the reason for the discrepancy and take the necessary corrective action.

3. Remove the cause of any motor operating above full load rating instead of increasing the overload relay trip rating.

3.07. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. General - Sequence closeout procedures so that work will not be endangered or damaged, and so that every required performance will be fully tested and demonstrated. Closeout shall be in accordance with Section 01700, Contract Closeout, and as required herein.

B. Final Operational Check - Make a check of each item in each system to determine that it is set for proper operation. With the Owner present, operate each system in a test run of appropriate duration to demonstrate compliance with performance requirements. During the following test runs, make final corrections or adjustments of systems to refine and improve performances where possible, including noise and vibration reductions, elimination of hazards, better response of controls, signals and alarms, and similar system performance improvements. Provide testing or inspection devices to permit observation of actual system performances and shall demonstrate that controls and items requiring service or maintenance are accessible.


C. Cleaning and Lubrication - After final performance test run of each electrical system, clean system both externally and internally, comply with manufacturer’s instructions for lubrication of both power and hand operated equipment, and remove excess lubrication, touch up minor damage to factory-painted finishes and other painting specified as electrical work, and refinish work where damage is extensive.

D. Operating Instructions - General operating instructions are required. In addition to specific training of the Owner’s operating personnel specified in the individual sections, and in addition to preparation of written operating instructions and compiled maintenance manuals specified elsewhere in these specifications, provide general operating instructions for each operational system and equipment item of electrical work, and coordinate instructions with instructions for mechanical work, and other equipment where associated with electrical systems or equipment.

E. System Description and Operation

1. Perform in the presence of the Owner, the Owner’s operating personnel and the Owner.

2. Describe each basic electrical system and explain identification system, displayed diagrams, signals, alarms and audio visual provisions.

3. Describe interfaces with mechanical equipment, including interlocks, sequencing, startup, shutdown, emergency, safety, system failure, security, and similar provisions.

4. In the presence of the Owner’s personnel, display and conduct a “thumb-through” explanation of maintenance manuals, record drawings, spare parts inventory, storage and extra materials, meter readings, and similar service items.

5. The Contractor shall videotape these sessions and provide the Owner with two VHS tape copies.

3.08. CONTINUED SYSTEM OPERATIONS SUPPORT

A. Coordinate the Owner’s takeover of electrical systems with takeover of mechanical systems, including the provision of skilled electrical operating and maintenance personnel until the time the Owner’s personnel take over operation of entire mechanical and electrical plant. Respond promptly with continued consultation and services (beyond takeover date) on electrical systems, matching required continued services on associated mechanical systems and equipment until the end of the warranty period.

3.09. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURE

A. Signed commitments are required. The transfer of electrical systems to the Owner for operation will not proceed until guarantees, warranties, performance certifications, maintenance agreements and similar commitments to be signed by Contractor and other entities have been executed and transmitted to and accepted by the Owner for placement in the Owner’s records.

3.10. THERMOGRAPH INSPECTIONS

A. Perform thermograph inspections on all service terminations, subfeed terminations, major power splices, transformer terminations, MCC terminations, and motor terminations for motors 5 HP or larger. Testing on major power distribution equipment will be performed with the plant running at a minimum of 70 percent capacity or the highest load that can be


operated. Testing on individual pieces of equipment will be performed while the unit is operational at rated load and has operated for at least 30 minutes for continuously operated equipment or near the end of a cycle for equipment that operates on/off. Loads shall be minimum of 40 percent of full load. Readings at overcurrent devices and starters will be for line and load; motors will be connections in motor terminal boxes; and for transformers, primary and secondary terminations. Provide a report of test results to the Owner including indication of any actions taken to resolve abnormal readings. See Exhibit B at the end of this section. All thermographic tests shall be reported on this form.

(continued)


EXHIBIT A

TESTING AND INSPECTION

ELECTRICAL INSULATION TEST RECORD INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST

EQUIP. I.D.

CKT/MARK NO.

TEST VOLTAGE

PHASE TO GND. MEG OHMS

PHASE TO PHASE MEG OHMS

DATE TESTED

A

B

C

N

A-B

A-N

B-C

B-N

C-A

C-N

TEST EQUIPMENT CONTROL NO. __________________ __________________ __________________ REMARKS:___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ PERFORMED BY: _______________________________________________ DATE: APPROVED BY: ________________________________________________ DATE:

Test Engineer


EXHIBIT B

TESTING AND INSPECTION THERMOGRAPHIC TERMINATION TEST

LINE/PRIMARY LOAD/SECONDARY LOAD

CONDITION (% OF FULL)

EQUIPMENT AMBIENT(1) 1 2 3 1 2 3 COMMENTS(2,3)

Thermograph Model Date of Test ____________________ Conducted by Outdoor Temperature _____________ Room Temperature Owner Witness (1) Ambient is the breaker case temperature, transformer winding temperature, or motor housing

temperature. For bus or cabling, it shall be the temperature of the bus or cable a minimum of 24 inches from the splice or termination.

(2) TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE CONDITION ACTION 1°C to 3°C Possible

deficiency Investigate, i.e., clean terminations/retorque

4°C to 15°C Deficiency Determine problem and repair; retest 16°C and above Major deficiency Immediate shutdown; determine problem and

repair and retest (3) Indicate any discrepancies the cause of any temperature differences and indicate action to be

taken. Test Parameters: • Imaging equipment shall be capable of detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1 degree at 30

degrees C. • Equipment shall detect and convert emitted radiation to a visual signal. • Tests to be run during periods of maximum possible loading, but at least 40 percent of rated load.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16990

CONTROL PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section includes requirements for new control panels as shown on the Contract Drawings, specified herein, and otherwise indicated or referenced.

B. The panel supplier shall furnish the minimum following control panels and equipment which shall include:

1. One (1) Intersite Pump Station Secondary Control Panel (SCP).

2. One (1) Instrument Enclosure for magnetic flow meter transmitter FIT-1.

3. Control Panels as specified and/or as shown on Contract Drawings.

4. As-Built Drawings (Elementary Wiring Diagram) and Modifications to the Intersite Pump Station Duplex Motor Starter Control Panel (MSCP) in accordance with Section 16057, Electrical Equipment Modifications.

C. Equipment furnished under this Contract shall be installed in an industrial type environment and powered from an electrical source that may include harmonic distortion, surges, sags, and other electrical noise under normal operating conditions. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment furnished shall function correctly in an environment where electrical noise of the types referenced are common during normal operations. If the equipment is found to be unable to operate in this environment, the Contractor shall furnish additional and/or replacement equipment, surge protection, power line conditioners, UPS, or other equipment required to correct this problem at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. This Section includes power line surge protectors as shown on the Contract Drawings, specified herein, and otherwise required for appropriate equipment, including, but not limited to control panels, instrument cabinets, instruments, processors, and other equipment susceptible to damage from power surges in the electrical supply.


A. Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

B. Section 01305 – SUBMITTALS

C. Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

D. Section 02730 – GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORK

E. Section 16191 – ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND FASTENERS

F. Section 16900 – INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL

G. Section 16903 – AUXILIARY CONTROLS AND RELAYS

Cobb Island Interconnection Charles County, Maryland 8616764 16990-1 CONTROL PANELS

H. Section 16950 – TESTING AND INSPECTION

1.03. REFERENCES

A. Material and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following:

1. National Electric Code - NEC

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association - NEMA

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. - UL

4. JIC Standard EGP-1

5. UL508 and UL 508A


A. Qualifications of Manufacturer

1. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be furnished by manufacturers who meet the quality, workmanship, and experience requirements as specified in the General Provisions Section of this Contract.

B. Control Panel Supplier (CPS)

1. The CPS shall be regularly engaged in the business of instrumentation and controls and shall be responsible for the furnishing, coordination and the installation oversight of the equipment and components specified herein.

2. The CPS shall demonstrate the requisite resources of in-house staff, facilities and finances to complete the project in the schedule specified. These resources shall include personnel who are direct payroll employees of the CPS to engineer, design, implement, fabricate, stage, and test the entire integrated hardware and software system at the CPS’s facilities. In-house personnel shall include all disciplines associated with system manufacture, fabrication, and integration to include but not be limited to engineering, drafting, analog and digital control systems and wiring design, construction, wiring, labeling, software configuration, test/demonstration programming, project management, quality control, field engineering and training.

3. The CPS shall assign a specific person to be the CPS Project Manager for this project. The Project Manager shall be a direct employee of the CPS, shall be assigned to this specific project, and shall be skilled and experienced in project management, and in the type of work described herein. The Project Manager shall be assigned for the period of the Contract. Should it become necessary to replace the CPS project manager, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the credentials of the person assigned as a replacement.

4. The CPS shall maintain a UL 508 listed fabrication shop located at the CPS facility for the assembly of the various control panels, cabinets, consoles, instrument racks, enclosures, and wiring required for this project. This shop shall be available for inspection by the Engineer to observe quality control and workmanship. The CPS facilities shall include hardware and software owned by the CPS Subcontractor for development and support of any system software, and any testing and demonstration equipment to be utilized on the project.


5. The CPS shall be:

a. Company: Sherwood Logan & Associates, Inc. Contact: Robert W. Sherwood Telephone: 301/970-2181 b. Company: Micro-Tech Designs, Inc. Contact: Mark T. Duvall Telephone: 410/239-2885 c. Or Equal

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with the Special Provisions and as described herein.

B. Prior to obtaining any material in connection with this Section, detailed shop drawings on all material shall be submitted.

C. Submittals for equipment and materials shall be clearly marked or noted with specific features, standard options, and wiring diagrams to indicate compliance with Contract Documents. Terminal board wiring diagrams including terminal numbers and conductor color codes shall be indicated.

D. Where deviations to Contract Documents are proposed, submit a list of deviations. Provide a detailed description and explanation for each deviation.

E. Shop drawings shall present complete and accurate information relative to all working dimensions, equipment weights, assembly, and section views, and all necessary details pertaining to coordinating the Work of the Contract. Shop drawings shall contain information such as special tools and other items of information that are required to demonstrate detailed compliance with the Contract Documents.

F. Submit shop drawings which shall include the following:

1. Submittals shall include verification that panels will be fabricated to UL 508A standards and labeled as such. Submit short circuit current ratings (SCCR) for each individual control panel assembly.

2. Submittals shall contain the NEMA type designation and manufacturer data describing the enclosures and showing its compliance with specifications and associated standards.

3. Control panel assembly drawings detailing panel cut-out locations and sizes, back panel and device layout and locations.

4. Provide electrical point to point wiring diagrams showing detailed internal wiring and wiring to field devices. Device tag numbers shall be indicated where shown on the Contract Drawings. Terminal blocks and wiring numbers shall be identified on the wiring diagrams.

5. Bill of Materials for all equipment and accessories.

6. Manufacturer’s catalog information for all components and accessories.


7. Manufacturer’s standard wiring diagrams including all available terminal connections for each component.

8. Spare Parts List (including specified spare parts to be furnished by the Contractor and manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list for each type of unit).

9. Project specific installation instructions and mounting details for each component. Materials of construction for supports, brackets, and mounting hardware shall be provided with details for each type of equipment mounting rack.

10. A list of nameplate titles shall be submitted.

11. Identify spare control panel space for future equipment.

G. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for control panel equipment and components.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01. GENERAL

A. General

1. Control panels shall include display panels, relay panels, annunciator panels, termination boards, or any other assembly of electrical components shop assembled in enclosures.

2. The control panels and associated controls and instrumentation equipment shall be furnished as a coordinated assembly requiring only field connections of the power and control circuits for a complete and operating installation as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings.

3. Electrical equipment and controls shall be provided as required to perform the control function as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. Controls shall include motor starters, control power transformers, circuit breakers and power disconnecting devices and hardware, control relays, timing relays, intrinsically safe relays, and miscellaneous controls as required, or as specified. Electrical equipment and controls shall be provided in accordance with the specifications contained herein and in Division 16.

4. The control panel enclosure, components, and controls shall be UL Listed and Labeled. Control panels shall conform to the requirements of UL 508.

2.02. ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosure Construction

1. General

a. Dimensions of enclosures shown on the Contract Drawings are typical. Contractor shall size each enclosure as required to house the electrical equipment shown or specified. Each enclosure shall be sized such that a minimum of 20% spare open space is provided on the interior subpanel and/or swingout panel for mounting of future equipment. Spare Space shall be located in one clear and open, contiguous area of the subpanel.


b. Control panels shall include an equipment support system for mounting internal wiring and control components, and for the proper support of long case instruments. This system shall ensure that equipment is adequately supported by the main structural frame members. Fixed support members shall not be attached to front panels or removable access panels.

c. Steel enclosures shall be constructed of a minimum of 14 gauge steel and shall be constructed in accordance with NEMA requirements. Seams shall be continuously welded and ground smooth, with no holes or knockouts. Exterior hardware, including mounting hardware shall be stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

d. Panel cutouts shall be provided for mounting components as arranged on the Contract Drawings and shall include cutouts and coverplates, and shall be capable of being removed for the addition of future components. Components shall either be door mounted unless otherwise noted. Control panels requiring rear access shall have the components mounted on side opposite the door.

2. NEMA 12 Steel Enclosures

a. NEMA 12 enclosures shall be dust-tight, drip-tight suitable for protecting enclosed equipment and components from fibers, flyings, lint, dust and dirt. NEMA 12 enclosures shall provide a degree of protection against light splashing, seepage, dripping and external condensation of non-corrosive liquids.

b. Manufacturers

1) Hoffman

2) Saginaw SCE

3) Equal

3. NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures

a. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be water-tight and dust-tight suitable for outdoor installations. NEMA 4X enclosures shall protect enclosed equipment against splashing water, seepage of water, falling or hose-directed water, severe external condensation, and shall be corrosion resistant.

b. Enclosures shall be constructed of 14 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. Trim shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Exterior shall be unpainted.

c. Manufacturers

1) Hoffman

2) Saginaw SCE

3) Equal


B. Enclosure Doors

1. Enclosures shall be provided with front access single or double overlapping doors as required for the enclosure size. Door(s) shall be provided with heavy duty three point spring-roller latches operated by a key locking handle. Latch rods shall have rollers to facilitate door closing. Provide a minimum of two keys for each lock. Locks shall be keyed the same. Door assemblies for NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures shall be constructed to maintain the NEMA rating of the enclosure assembly without the use of external door clips or hasps.

2. Door(s) shall be mounted with continuous piano hinges. Contractor shall cooridnate door swing (right hand or left hand) for each control panel to avoid interference with other equipment mounted adjacent to the control panels.

3. A rolled lip around minimum three sides of door shall be provided to prevent dirt and liquid from dropping into the panel when door is open.

4. Door(s) shall be fitted with a neoprene gasket applied with oil resistant adhesive and held in place with stainless steel retaining strips.

5. Enclosures mounted outdoors shall be provided with stainless steel door stops to hold the door(s) in the open position. The open position shall be field adjustable.

C. Interior Subpanels

1. Interior subpanels for component mounting shall be provided and assembled for each enclosure. Interior subpanels shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel finished in white enamel paint. Subpanels shall be provided with intermediate stiffeners where required to maintain surface flatness and panel rigidity. Fasteners, screws, and equipment mounting racks shall be stainless steel.

2. In addition to interior subpanels, provide ‘swing-out’ type panels where shown on the Contract Drawings. Swing-out panels shall be of similar construction to subpanels specified above. Swing-out interior panels shall be provided with a continuous stainless steel piano hinge along the side of the panel. A stainless steel catch latch shall be provided to lock the swing-out panel in-place to prevent unwanted movement. Heavy duty hinges shall be provided as required to carry the load of the swingout panels as mounted equipment.

D. Enclosure Finish

1. NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures shall not be finished.

2. NEMA 12 enclosures: Sheet metal components shall be thoroughly cleaned, bonderized and finished with a prime coat and two topcoats of a two-component, catalyzed, polyurethane enamel. Texture semi-gloss finish shall be applied to provide a non-glare and abrasion resistant surface. Enclosures shall be provided with gray finish inside with a white enamel interior unless otherwise specified.

E. Enclosure Accessories

1. A large print pocket shall be provided on interior face of the enclosure door(s). Where this cannot be accommodated due to windows and other control devices


mounted on the door, the print pockets shall be mounted on the interior side of the control panels.

2. Circuit Breaker Operators

a. Where shown on the Contract Drawings, circuit breaker disconnect handle operators shall provided. Handle operator shall be accessible from the face of the panel, and shall be capable of being locked in either the ON and OFF position with a padlock.

b. Handle operators shall prevent opening of the control panel doors with the handle in the ‘ON’ position. Operators shall be provided with a defeater mechanism to allow authorized personnel to open the door with the handle in the ‘ON’ position.

2.03. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Power Distribution

1. Control panels shall include provisions for distributing power to all three phase and single phase equipment shown on the Contract Drawings. Control panels shall include a main circuit breaker which shall disconnect power to the entire system. Incoming terminals shall be oversized to accommodate wiring and cable sizes as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Motor control panels which include motor controllers, motor starters, variable frequency drives, solid state reduced voltage starters, etc, shall have flange mounted disconnects mounted on the enclosure. “Through Door” type disconnecting handles are not acceptable.

3. Branch circuit breakers shall be provided on control power circuits and each individual circuit distributed from the panel. Circuit breakers shall be grouped on a single subpanel or DIN rail. Place subpanel so that there is a clear view of and access to the breakers when the door is open. Use branch circuit breakers rated at no more than twice the load.

4. Provide toggle switches to disconnect the control power to inside the panel where shown on the Contract Drawings. The toggle switch shall be mounted on the interior sub-panel of the control panel unless otherwise shown or specified.

5. Provide control power transformers and power supplies as required to obtain an operable system. Control power transformers shall be provided with suitable fusing on the primary and secondary side of the transformers. Control power transformers shall be sized as required to power equipment as shown on the Contract Drawings.

6. Place no more that 20 devices on any single circuit. Do not exceed 12 amperes on the branch circuit

7. Where multiple units provide parallel operations, do not group devices on the same branch circuit.


B. Circuit Protective Devices

1. Circuit Breakers

a. Circuit Breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic air type, and shall be as specified in the Section 16055, Electrical Work. Circuit breakers shall be appropriately sized to protect the equipment served per the requirements of the National Electric Code.

b. Thermal magnetic air circuit breakers shall be provided for branch circuit disconnect service and short circuit protection of motor control and auxiliary circuits.

c. Main circuit breakers for motor control panels which include motor controllers, motor starters, variable frequency drives, solid state reduced voltage starters, etc, shall be rated a minimum of 35kAIC.

2. Fuses

a. Provide fuses as required and specified for protecting individual control circuits and systems. Fuse ratings shall be sized to protect the equipment served per the requirements of the National Electric Code.

C. Terminal blocks

1. General

a. Terminal blocks shall be feed through, single level, and suitable for din rail mounting. Terminal blocks shall be fabricated complete with marking strip, covers, end plates, partitions, and screw type pressure connectors.

b. Terminal blocks shall be UL listed, rated for 600 VAC, 35 amperes unless otherwise noted.

c. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided.

d. Terminal blocks for external connections shall be suitable for No. 12 AWG wire.

2. Terminal blocks for low voltage instrumentation circuits shall be rated for 300 VAC, 10 amperes.

3. Separate terminals shall be used for AC and DC voltages. These terminals shall be labeled AC and DC and shall be provided with two distinct colors. Separate wireways shall be installed for AC and DC voltages. AC and DC wiring shall be kept separate at all times.

4. Fuse terminal blocks shall be provided with LED blown fuse indicators and shall be capable of being disconnected without the use of any special tools.

5. Ground terminals shall be green.

6. Terminal blocks shall be located in the bottom of the panel, except where otherwise shown or noted. Terminal blocks shall be located near the doors or access panels of


the enclosures to facilitate field wiring connections. Minimum spacing between terminal blocks shall be 5 inches and a minimum of 4 inches all around. Duplicate terminals shall be used to limit the number of wires at one terminal to two.

7. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification shown on supplier's submittal drawings. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external circuits, plus one ground for each shielded cable. Wires shall be numbered using wire markers. Wire numbers shall agree with terminal numbers, submittals, and remote equipment wiring designations.

8. Provide a screwdriver with blade suitable for operating each type of terminal screw provided.

9. Terminal blocks shall be as manufactured by:

a. Phoenix Contact

b. Equal

D. Internal Wiring

1. Internal instrument and component device wiring shall be as normally furnished by the manufacturer.

2. With the exception of low voltage instrumentation circuits (less than 30 V), interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be not less than No. 14 AWG copper, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a moisture and heat resistant material and flame-retardant nonmetallic covering.

3. Wiring, except where noted, shall terminate on panel terminal blocks. Wiring shall be from terminal to terminal with no splices. Wiring from external devices shall terminate at the panel's field termination terminal blocks.

4. Instrumentation circuits shall be shielded.

5. Wiring shall be grouped or cabled and firmly supported to the panel. Not less than eight inches of clearance shall be provided between the terminal strips and the base of vertical panels for conduit and wiring space. Plastic wireway, Panduit or equal, shall be used to route wire within the panel. Wireways shall be provided with removable covers. Wireway shall be run in continuous length with snap on covers. AC and DC wiring shall be run in separate plastic wireways.

6. Tie-wraps used for bundling wire shall be cinched carefully to eliminate grooving the insulation.

7. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, and fuses and circuit breakers shall be clearly labeled and located for easy maintenance.

8. Color code wiring as follows:

a. Line and Load Circuits (ac or dc power) Black b. Neutral White c. AC Control Circuits Red


d. DC Control Circuits Blue e. Interlock Control Circuits on the panel energized from

external source. Yellow

f. Equipment Grounding Conductors Green

E. Circuit Identification

1. Devices mounted on or within the enclosures shall be permanently identified. The device and terminal identifications shall agree with those shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Circuit identification shall be as specified in Division 2 Electrical and Division 16 Electrical.

F. Controls and Instruments

1. Panel mounted control relays, pushbuttons, indicating lights, selector switches, and instruments and components shall be as specified in the Section 16903, Auxiliary Controls and Relays.

2. Device, Junction, Pull Boxes and other conduit system accessories shall be as specified in Division 2 Electrical and Division 16 Electrical.

G. Grounding

1. Enclosures shall be provided with two grounding lugs located on opposite sides of the enclosure for connection to external grounding system.

2. Provide a ground bus in each cabinet or panel for the shield and signal grounding circuits.

3. Swing-out panels shall be grounded and provided with flexible grounding braids that allow the swing-out panels to be opened.

2.04. CONTROL PANEL IDENTIFICATION

A. General

1. Control panels and enclosures shall be provided with nameplates on the exterior of each enclosure identifying the application function of the equipment enclosed such as "Fill Station Panel". Nameplates shall be mounted directly above equipment.

2. In addition, for selector switches and/or pushbuttons, a factory installed legend plate shall be provided to indicate the function each station performs, such as "ON" or "OFF."

3. Nameplates shall be engraved 1/4 inch high (1/2” inch high for enclosure titles) black capital letters on a 1/8" thick plastic black tag with white letters mechanically attached to enclosure. Lettering shall be in capitals except as shown. Nameplate text shall be as shown or scheduled on the Contract Drawings.


4. Legend plates shall be metal with black lettering mechanically attached to control panel.

5. Interior mounted components and equipment shall be provided with nameplates. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to, but not on, the given device and visibility shall not be obstructed by wire bundles or other equipment. Nameplates shall include device identification number as well as descriptive name.

6. Instrumentation Equipment shall be provided with brass identification tags.

7. Enclosures shall be provided with instruction plaques indicating any warnings or special instructions required by the component manufacturers. Warning plaques shall be red with white lettering.

8. Control panels that contain wiring fed from multiple external power sources shall be provided with a nameplate on the front of the enclosure indicating:

“WARNING -

THIS PANEL IS FED BY MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES”

9. Nameplates shall be permanently secured to enclosures and backpanels.

2.05. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Wiring Diagrams

1. A glossy embossed elementary wiring diagram shall be provided, permanently attached to the inside door of each control panel. The wiring diagram shall include all shop drawing and field changes and revisions performed during construction.

B. Surge Suppressors

1. Surge suppressors shall be provided on all DC operated relay coils to minimize the high transient voltages generated when the circuit to the operating coil is opened.

C. e Parts

1. Each control panel shall be provided with the following spare parts:

One control relay of each type provided One timing relay of each type provided (where applicable) Five fuses of each size and type provided One lighting fixture lamp (where applicable) One indicating light (lamp) of each type provided. Two spare air filters.

D. Safety Barriers

1. Provide safety barriers for signal conductors connected to equipment located in Hazardous Locations. Barriers shall be Series MTL 700 by MTL, Inc., or equal.


E. Additional Control Components

1. The CPS shall coordinate to provide additional control and interlock components and wiring and connections for each control panel as required to interface with the field wiring and controls. The CPS shall include time and services to provide connection of relays as directed by the Engineer during project submittal review period and during field wiring of the equipment. All components shall be wired to terminal blocks and each relay shall include wiring of relay coil and two normally open and two normally closed contacts.

a. (2) 120VAC Control Relays

b. (1) Timing Relay

c. (2) Control Interlocks

d. (1) LED indicating Light

e. (1) Pushbutton

f. (8) Nameplates

2. Components which are not installed shall be turned over to the Owner as additional spare parts.

2.06. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTORS

A. General - Power line surge protectors shall be provided to protect equipment from transients on the AC power line. Surge Protectors shall meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C62.41. They shall be of the type required to protect equipment installed in an industrial environment.

B. Hardwired Type - Hardwired power line surge protectors shall be wired to the input terminals of the respective panel or equipment. Power line surge protectors shall be by Topaz, Best, Tycor, Control Concepts, or equal.

C. Powerstrip Type - Integral surge protector/powerstrip shall be wired ahead of cord connected equipment that is being protected. The devices shall include NEMA 5-15R outlets and Power On indicator. Powerstrip shall be installed ahead of all cord connected equipment susceptible to damage due to incoming power line surge. Powerstrip type surge protector shall be by Best, Topaz, Tycor, Wm. Shape Co., or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01. CONTROL PANEL FABRICATION

A. General

1. Fabricate control panels, install instruments and components plumb, and wire in the factory. Test wiring and check plumbing prior to shipment.

2. Use panel fabrication techniques that allow for removal and maintenance of all equipment after installation.


3. Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for panel mounted instruments and smoothly finish with rounded edges.

4. Place knockouts for the wiring of freestanding panels either at top or bottom of the panel. Cover holes for future devices with a plastic plate.

B. Wiring

1. Panel wiring shall be installed by the panel manufacturer and shall be brought out to identified terminal blocks. Interwiring between panel sections shall be from terminal blocks to terminal blocks. Terminal blocks for panel wiring shall be correlated with those for the electrical equipment by the panel manufacturer.

C. Component Location

1. Equipment shown or specified to be furnished with the panels shall be mounted by the panel manufacturer. Panel mounted controls shall be located such that they are easily accessible. Panel mounted controls and components shall be mounted a minimum of 30" above grade or finished floor and a maximum of 72" above finished floor, The panels shall be furnished as completely assembled units, requiring only field connections of power and control wiring.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Contractor shall verify placement of panel prior to fabrication and any and all shipping splits shall be provided.

2. Panels shall be grounded and all equipment and circuits included in the panels, as shown or required to be grounded, shall be connected to the grounding conductors.

3. The panels shall be installed as shown and directed. The final control panel locations shall be coordinated by the Contractor to avoid interference with standard operation and maintenance practices of the adjacent equipment. Wiring shall enter the panels as shown or specified.

4. Wall mounted control panels butting to masonry walls shall be provided with closure strips to seal the opening between the panel and the masonry.

B. Control Wiring: Contractor shall include time to install/replace/provide additional control and interlock components and wiring for each starter/VFD assembly as directed by the Engineer in the field. Modifications shall be performed as required to provide electrical interlocks and interface wiring to obtain a complete and operating control system.

3.03. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTORS

A. Install power line surge protectors on the incoming power of all equipment susceptible to damage in an industrial or commercial environment due to line surges, lightning, transients, or other line disturbances.

B. All control panels containing electronic, microprocessor based, or other line powered equipment susceptible to damage be shall be provided with adequate line surge and transient protection.


3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Testing and Demonstration

Control panels shall be tested for proper operation and operational sequencing. Proper operation of control panels shall be demonstrated to the Engineer. Testing and demonstration shall be performed by a qualified service representative of the control panel fabricator or manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


APPENDIX 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ... - Charles …...Aug 19, 2015 · Charles County Department...

Documents

Transcript of APPENDIX 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ... - Charles …...Aug 19, 2015 · Charles County Department...